Home

Xtags Maximized

Contents

1. gt The second line needs to read off of the bottom right of the numbered text box That is why we are calling out BR2 with 0 for the x and y lt amp lbu 0 BR2 0 90 19 or 1 W gt The full Xtags code for this will be lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 35p 25 40p 25 n n 100 m 56 GB Disk Xtags Chapter 04 fg04_014 eps gt lt tbu2 0 BL1 1p6 5 1p2 5 1p6 5 n n 100 K 20 14 gt label 1 lt amp te gt lt amp lbu 0 TL1 0 0 14 5 or 1 W gt lt lbu O BR2 0 90 19 or 1 W gt lt g 4 3 2 1 gt This could also be handled with a rule around the numbered box but the white border would be 1 pt below the image and to the left of the image that would not be visible The box width would need to be an extra 1 pt in width The code for the text box would instead be lt amp tbu2 1 BL1 1p8 5 1p3 5 1p7 5 n 1 W n 100 K 20 14 gt Rotated Solid Shadow on Image This is to illustrate how some images are handled where the designer will put a decorative background behind the image to give the feel of a shadow I ve seen it before where the image is actually rotated 4 or 5 to give it a different effect This is very easy to do by using relative placement for the width and depth of the actual image Xtags_Ch0O4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 90 p 90 Xtags Maximized Here is how the image and caption will import FIGURE 1 1 Many cities border ing the oceans have
2. bb4 lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 0 9p11 05 40p6 22p k n 1 K n 100 K 10 1 21 12 8 12 t gt bb5 lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 3 4 5 gt Xtags_ChO5 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 117 Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 117 The text file would look like this SMP_BX1_HD_S bb1 Music Business Profile SMP_BX1_SHD_S Independent Record Companies bb2 SMP_BX1_HD Music Business Profile SMP_BX1_SHD Independent Record Companies bb3 SMP_BX1_SSHD The Rise in the 80 bb4 SMP_BX1_F It practically happened overnight bb5 In the input file you ll want the macros bb1 bb2 etc to run in If not your document will have a runover space at the end of each text box Writing a detailed coded sample reduces the complexity for everyone in volved I personally write a MacPerl script inserting the tags for these boxes For example s SMP_BX1_HD_S A Z 1 bb1 2 g This pattern replacement places the bb1 code between the style name and the first character of text s SMP_BX1_SMP_SHD_S n 1 2 bb2 g This puts the bb2 at the last character of type and removes the return so the text will run in with the next style MacPerl or AppleScript can keep the control in your hands rather than a markup department My advice is to follow whatever works best for you If you begin scripting you will quickly realize that productivity will increase As you have seen ea
3. 100 n M 56Disk Chapter 06 fg01_005 eps gt lt amp g 1 2 3 gt Where we can save time here is by adding most of these tags with a transla tion table That way the replacement will be easier Here is how the tags can appear in the text file b1 Chapter 06 fg06_004 eps b2 bx2t line Wireless Internet bx2f Box text first paragraph bx2 Box text second paragraph b3 How these replacements will need to be written are as follows Search for lt amp pbu2 d d 9 14 7 6 256Disk Replaced with b1 The b2 translation table entry will need to replaced with Search for gt lt amp tbu2 0 0 2 bxt Replaced with b2 bx2t Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 156 p 156 Xtags Maximized The b3 translation table entry will need to replaced with Search for lt amp te gt lt amp g 2 1 gt Replaced with b3 The line translation table entry will need to replaced with Search for bxt Replaced with 1 line The actual translation table entries will appear as b1 lt amp pbu2 189 14 142 107 n 100 n 9 14 7 6 m 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images b2 gt lt amp tbu2 0 0 29p 35p 21p9 k n 0 5 n 100 n 30 1 2 1 2 9 1 A b3 lt amp te gt lt amp pbu2 0 0 29p 11p k n n 100 n M 56Disk Chapter 06 fg01_005 eps gt lt amp g 1 2 3 gt line lt Bt 10k 88f Opti
4. Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 126 6 39 PM Page 126 F Xtags Maximized 10 ll 12 Xtags is necessary to automate this process Don t panic the most time consuming part is getting the Quark formats and anchored info correct Then go to Edit Copy XTags Text Go to the pasteboard draw a text box and Paste You will now have a code that looks like this lt v2 00 gt lt e0 gt DM lt amp pb 54 30 b 3 0 K n 100 100 Solid W 100 0 0 0 0 5m 100 100 56 GB Disk AP Equations EQ_005 eps gt Depending on the width and depth of your equation you ll have differ ent values I ve highlighted the values that need to change Change the width and height values to be 26p 9p If you have a 30p text width this can be 29p I usually bring this in 1 pica from the total text width The pathname to your art is going to be different but this shouldn t change from what you have during the Copy Xtags Text stage By eliminating unnecessary Xtags information your path resemble this DM lt amp pb 26p 9p b 3 K n 100 100 W 100 0 1 0 1 m 10 0 100 56 GB Disk AP Equations EQ_004 eps gt Yow ll need to cut out part of this and paste it into your Xtags translation table and label as shown here dm1 lt amp pb 26p 9p b 3 0 K n 100 100 Solid W 100 0 1 0 1 m 100 100 0 0 0 0 Your folder pathname dm2 gt You ll see there are two individual parts The first part makes
5. pattern you would type in a 1 and this will give you the following appearance with the tab PRIEOZOT 3 DOOKSiz mn e e be sotenthondeseneateetas 49 95 If you would like the dots to have a space between it would need to read as 2 and the tab will give this appearance Price of 3 books 2 eee eee ee eee eee 49 95 Xtags_Ch02 24 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 24 Xtags Maximized By looking at the Tabs window in QuarkXPress it is easier to make sense of this tag Center Right Decimal Comma Align On Position 20p8 Set Fill Characters Clear All Align On This particular tag would be written as lt t 20p8 2 1 gt The breakdown for this is that the Position is 20p8 the Right tab is 2 and because the Fill Character is just a it gets the 1 indicator When using the Align On command the tag would contain the character you wish to align on For example if you wanted to align on a the tag would read as follows lt t 20p8 2 gt Two tabs in one tag will need to be separated by a comma and will appear as follows lt t 43 0 1 175 288 0 1 gt Character Information in the Style Sheet Definition Type Style lt P gt This is the Type Style enhancement that is in the definition It will either fall right after the tabs or paragraph information The options are as follows lt P gt Plain lt gt Strike through l
6. 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 109 F Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 109 Combining Elements Some boxes have a lot of elements combined that make the floating object seem very difficult but upon further investigation its more apparent that this can For be handled without any problem Take this example Box 3 3 Internet Home Businesses With the onset of online shopping auction companies and the ease of use through wireless Internet home business ven tures are growing to be where some of the big money lies Unlike the commercials that you see where it shows the entre preneur sitting by his pool sipping a mixed drink a home busi ness does require a lot of extra time A normal 40 hour work week can easily become a 65 to 70 hours a week job just to keep the business going strong Once established setting pri orities and hours are easier but still require a lot of push such a small box there will be six different strings using text picture and line tags The bottom line could technically be put into the formats but for demonstration purposes I ve left this as a line Heres how we would start working with this box l 2 The text box is standard so nothing has to be really thought out for this Since the text box needs no special handling I will deal with the two boxes at the top These are fairly simple with only shading that is needed They will need to align next to each other The width of the firs
7. A 02 Figure 3 2 This is the caption lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt fgn ph1 Chapter 04 ph_0401 eps ph2 A PO1 This is the first photo caption lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt fgn ph1 Chapter 04 ph_0402 eps ph2 A P02 This is the second photo caption lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt fgn un1 Chapter 04 ua_0401 eps un2 A U01 This is the first unnumbered caption lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt fgn un1 Chapter 04 ua_0402 eps un2 A U02 This is the second unnumbered caption lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt So the question you probably have is how does this happen I will break it down one step at a time Scripting Option One thing to understand about FileMaker Pro is that it has a very powerful scripting engine called ScriptMaker that gives you the ability to alter the field information in the program to your specifications For this database I elected to use AppleScripts within ScriptMaker to go into BBEdit and use Grep to make these replacements to the text file Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 198 p 198 Xtags Maximized There are two options for AppleScripts One can be copied directly out of AppleScript and in the Perform AppleScript window it can be pasted into the Native AppleScript option Or if you want to use the data in the fields then you would use the Calculated AppleScript option where you can grab infor mation out of the fields and really do some intricate repla
8. Here s the full code lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 40p 1 40p 1 n 0 5 n 100 Solid K 0 m 0 5 0 5 56 GB Disk APBook Art Photos ha1 tif gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 8 35p R 0 0 2p gt ALPHA a lt te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt lt amp pbu2 18 TR1 0 40p 1 40p 1 n 0 5 n 100 Solid K 0 m 0 5 0 5 56 GB Disk Xtags Art Photos ha2 tif gt lt tbu2 0 BL1 8 35p R 0 0 2p gt ALPHA b lt amp te gt lt g 1 2 gt lt amp pbu2 18 TRI 0 40p 1 40p 1 n 0 5 n 100 Solid K 0 m 0 5 0 5 56 GB Disk APBook Art Photos hawaii3 tif gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 8 35p R 0 0 2p gt ALPHA c lt te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL7 9 5 30p 2p gt FIG_CAP Hawaii s beaches and beautiful scenery are favorites amongst tourists lt te gt lt g 1 2 5 8 gt ae Xtags_Ch0O4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 82 F 82 Xtags Maximized The coded file with macros would be reduced to this fl1 hawaiil tif f2 ALPHA a f3 hawaii2 tif f4 ALPHA a f5 hawaiil tif f6 ALPHA a f7 FIG_CAP Hawaii s beaches and beautiful scenery are favorites amongst tourists f8 This truly demonstrates the cost effective power of the translation table mm Complicated Figure Caption Usage Designers have the ability to keep things simple but also are well known for getting tricky Their job is to make sure that the elements throughout have a harmonious ambiance to them There is nothing wor
9. 100 n m 56 GB Disk Xtags Chalkboard eps gt lt pbu2 0 BLL 1 10p6 1p6 n n 100 n m 0 507 5 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 05 Chalkboard eps gt lt g 3 2 1 gt 5 By handling it this way the tags can always be set up the same for the markup department using mn1 mn margin note text here mn2 6 This shows how the margin note can expand but still close the same al lowing for any extra text without having multiple common elements to have to position each time This proves the time saving power of Xtags Here Ea perfect exam ple of a margin note Typically You would use a font that Cooke tke handuriting Here i how this will expand if extra lines are put ito the fie and stl main tain the same ending Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 123 Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 123 Picture Box Using Skew Over the years that I have been working with Xtags I haven t found many uses for the 6 Boxskew field The reason for this is usually the designers cre ate the images the way they want them to be used in the design without using the skew override I have seen many designs where the skew could be used and it really depends whether the designer sets the skew in the image or in Quark Even though my current workflow does not use it that often I still can see where there are a lot of uses for this A good example is in this box example shown here Innovati
10. 4 Always have the box built perfectly with trapping alignment and so on before writing the Xtags strings to ensure everything will work correctly when importing the text 5 Make sure to set up as much as possible in the style sheets This includes any rules While there are so many things that can be accomplished with boxes I feel that this section will open up your mind to what Xtags can do For Autopage users it is acceptable to use the library and the T E code but you ll find that a lot less hand manipulation happens when importing with Xtags I ll let you make your decision after reading through this chapter Single Column Box This is a fairly uncomplicated box that many less experienced pagers may set with two or three boxes In most cases they would begin by first taking the Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 102 102 Xtags Maximized Creating Translation Tables title and create that box then make the gray screen a picture box and the text would be in its own box Creating Translation Tables A well set up translation table can have the same power as a well written script Use the translation table for im porting art creating boxes style information etc The idea of the translation table is to take your com plex strings and put them in one place where the trans lation table now uses a macro to identify the string This can be completed with only one box and imported easily with Xtags A few things
11. Always spend extra time in the beginning to f make sure you have your preferences set up correctly A script can be run to assure this This is an easy box to set up correctly The main thing is setting up the text box correctly with a 3 Zapf Dingbats in a 75 ruled text box Here is the an chored text code for this lt amp tb 30 30 a 0 75 Gn 100 1 1 1 6 24 gt Anchored Text Example 4 Sometimes there will be a head that needs a small disclaimer or additional in formation alongside of it Look at this example We will look at many different aspects of consumer Co nsu m e r Spotl i g ht goods in this series of examples from leading experts This is the type of treatment I m referring to I ve watched pagers who tried to baseline shift these lines to sit like this and their coding was a complete mess It is much easier to put this in a text box and anchor it following the head Here s how the anchored box including the baseline shift will be coded lt b 3 gt lt tb 152 15 n 100 66 1 555555 gt The markup department would code this as follows bxtl Consumer Spotlight al We will look at a2 Xtags_Cch03 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 61 p Chapter 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes 61 We will cover more uses for working with anchored and unanchored text and picture boxes later in the book Don t be afraid to experiment yourself Re member to just try things At first th
12. Darryl J Keck Xtags_FM 11 27 06 5 38 PM Page ii F Xtags Maximized by Darryl J Keck To report any errors or omissions email highvolume mchsi com Copyright December 2006 by High Volume Press Dubuque IA 52003 ISBN 0 9762041 2 6 TW Wom High Volume Press Ae ROTTS 3500 Dodge St 200 PRESS Dubuque IA 52003 Manufactured in the United States of America 10987654321 Production and Layout Darryl J Keck Cover and Interior Design Paula J Keck Printing Midland Press Corporation Davenport Iowa Production Notes Xtags Maximized was produced using QuarkXPress 6 5 Xtags 6 2 BBEdit 8 5 1 Adobe Photoshop and Adobe Illustrator Computers used Power Mac Dual 1 25GHZ G4 and Powerbook Titanium G4 Screenshots were created using SnapzPro X Photos courtesy of author www photos com or Art Explosion Examples The examples shown within this book are not part of any other printed book They were created as similar examples to types of books I ve worked with in the past or that I made up for demonstration Rights and Liability All rights reserved No part of this book may be transmitted or reproduced in any form without the prior written permission of the author For permission contact highvolume mchsi com Quark QuarkXPress and other Quark Inc trademarks are the property of Quark Inc and all applicable affiliated companies Portions 2000 Quark Inc All rights reserved FileMaker Pro screenshots are
13. This makes that part easier without requiring two extra picture boxes To start this I will begin by trying to keep this as simple as possible Here s the approach I would take with this figure l The text box must start 15 pts from the top of the pasteboard to accom modate the vertical rule It will also need to have a None background lt amp tbu2 0 B 15 10p 24p m gt The image just needs to be 1p to the right of the image with a 1 2 pt drop from the caption The image needs to be trapped within the keyline lt amp pbu2 12 TR1 1 2 30p 5 48p 5 0 5 n 100 m 0 5 0 5 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 04 fg04_011 eps gt Since we need a 5 pt vertical line extending the length of the image we will need to make a 1 pt box for this We cannot use a vertical line for this because we need the line to be relative to the length of the image which the lines feature does not currently support The problem we run into is that a picture box tag needs 1 pt minimum width To make a 5 pt rule requires another 1 pt black 0 filled box to overlap it by 5 pt This box also needs to extend above the image 1p2 Therefore we need to make two relative box images The first needs to be read off of the image and the second off of the first vertical picture box The first box reads as follows with 2p1 5 TL1 from the image with 14 pts above the top of the image We ll add 1p2 in the relati
14. Xtags_ChO5 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 104 104 Xtags Maximized Simple Box with Background Art This is a good example because it demonstrates how to put an art background behind a standard block of text I ve seen a similar box throw off some pagers when they try to set it up The odd thing is that it isn t really that difficult It all comes down to proper use of relative placement Here s an example of how this should look Note The purpose for working through all of these examples is to get the user more familiar with the different aspects of the program It seems that a lot of people work with software like this for years but fail to break new ground out of not having proper direction The goal is to show as many different examples as possible covering all of the picture and text box options through the examples It s one thing to read about them and another to see the strategies in action Remember there s always more than one way to do something To get these results follow these steps 1 The text box has a multiple text inset but the rest is standard 2 The picture box containing the image is where most of the work will be This box needs to have relative placement exact to the depth and width has a 5 point rule around it uses the Send to Back flag and needs to position 0 TL1 The top left positioning is how it expands perfectly to fit the content Here is an example of the picture box c
15. amount of wasted time will be spent manually creating layout changes puttin up front setup of Xtags How far you go with the Xtension is up to you You can begin using the software the first day and gain more knowledge with cach book or you can explore functions whenever you have time FIGURE 15 1 Home businesses show that work ltd amaze others at your findings Once yo orward vad from almost anywhere due to you ll find that tasks you normally would have completed manu ally are now handled this wa Book 1 The Style for the Entire Book Can Second Party Software be the Best vestement 444 Can Second Party seins te honda P riy Xio dlons Software he the Sed pariy en Re honed eso a a when needed that boost of power knew there was a developer out there Best Investement wira had just the thing needed 1 would go out of my way to eam this sof s ware also want to help people who sometimes get a little confused on get the Xtags Headers amp Contents XMLxt and even the QuarkXPress docu ment set up properly The more you have working correctly up front the less Chance tere wil be of unforeseen problems later nthe project What is Second Party Software ji the prereqi to be successful with this book is that you have used g al project Al xy that you have read through the X by Em Software Inc which is an invaluable refer works withthe code ence guide It s obvious to me that there would
16. gt Figure Caption Here lt te gt lt pbu2 6 TL2 6 30 R 12 0 6 1 k n Gn 100 K 15 m gt lt g 3 2 1 gt ae Xtags_Ch0O4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 95 p Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 95 Fit to Height and Fit to Width Multi Piece Example In chapter 3 we discussed the Fit to Height and Fit to Width option that can be included in the width and depth fields This is one of those options that I can not rave about enough There are so many applications for it and can really make fitting images to the area you need an easier task than ever before I have had situations in books where the author wanted to include 3 images together set up similar to this example FIGURE 1 1 This is a particularly good use of the Fit to Height and Fit to Width feature that was shown earlier in the chapter The problem with a layout like this is you want it to have some balance but you aren t sure the depth or width of the images based on the text area If the book is a modified pickup the margin area may have changed from the pre vious edition This can be solved handling the images with the Fit to Height and Fit to Width option The images need to have a balanced feel so using the top right and bottom right positioning is essential for this to work Here is how I approached the example above 1 In this case the two top images each need to have a 9p8 depth To achieve this in the 4 field you will need to put 9p8
17. ment situations Take a look at this tag below 13p SE p2 10p This contains the different options in this tag that would go in field 4 unan chored or field 2 anchored This is broken down as height sizing options size adjustment minimum height The sizing options can be the R telative F fit to box width S shrink to fit or L forced leading anchored only options A combination of these can be added together as shown in the above example The size adjustment is telling the box the amount of additional depth can be added This sometimes helps when creating boxes The minimum height is the smallest depth allowable For anchored images an additional parameter is available at the end for addi tional leading The tag would look like 13p SE p2 10p 5pt Working with Figures In Chapter 3 I displayed examples of different ways that figures can work with caption placement Those examples were constructed of only a picture box grouped with a text box I have found figures and captions are not always so basic At times the designer will go out of their way to make the figure caption combination a little more difficult to work with by trying to give it more appeal Tm going to show how you could go about making different figure treat ments Some might be self explanatory but it has been my experience that a lot of pagers see images caption groupings like this and just panic ve been asked many times to set up the Xt
18. pression The final code is lt amp tbu2 0 0 268 24p p7 n 36 n 100 K 15 2p2 gt All text here lt te gt lt pbu2 47 BL1 28 102 37 9 31 24 k n n 100 K 15 M 555 J gt lt g 2 1 gt Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 134 p 134 Xtags Maximized Using Xtags for Design Element in Box Do not be afraid to use Xtags to add flair to a box There are times when a pager sees a box set up with a design element and end up creating the element in an art program This is workable but there are times when this can be built entirely in Quark When using a translation table the design element can all be part of one code Consider this box as an example Steps to Follow in Box Building Follow these steps when setting up boxes e Try to use as few boxes as possible during the set up If can use insets or First Baseline to accomplish this l Il spend a little extra time to keep the boxes as user friendly as possible e Always have the box built perfectly with trapping alignment and so on before writing the Xtags strings to ensure everything will work correctly when importing the text When first looking at the upper left design element this appears that it would be less work to create this in Adobe Illustrator and then import it in the cor ner each time This is a less involved way to do this but you can develop your skills by using Xtags to create this To do this with Xtags instead of as art
19. r Replaced with Leave Blank Xtags_Ch0s8 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 181 Chapter 8 Repurposing with Xtags 181 Delete the list of the style sheets that appear following the paragraph and character style sheets H1 NL1 You must be careful with this one and be very specific to ensure that you do not delete the style names throughout the text file It is important not D to put in a here because it could go through the entire line if a ended the line of text Here s the replacement Search for w w w r Replaced with Leave Blank Go through the document and decide what content is unnecessary to your objective I typically go through the file and delete all tags that are not per tinent to the file This includes the tracking baseline shifts paragraph overrides etc Here is the replacement to delete a series of these all at once Search for lt t d gt lt t d gt lt t d d gt lt b d gt lt b d gt lt k d gt lt k d gt lt s d gt lt h d gt Replaced with Leave Blank This takes care of all of the tracking kerning shading and horizontal scaling that would be overrides in the text file The tracking kerning and baseline shifts have a negative and positive search There are other things throughout the file that need to be changed The search above only wipes out those overrides For example any occur rence of paragraph overrides will need t
20. s eas ier to just put in Giovanni and then let the program realize the italic version needs to be Giovanni Bookltalic rather than having the pull down menu be full of all of these options To set this up properly you should have a predetermined amount of fonts to put in the Display Font and Text Font categories Since the idea is for standard designs you want to give enough flexibility to make them unique but not too much where it overcomplicates the process Indents Another interesting field is the Asymmetrical Indent which lets you decide what type of indent is required on the text area if the main head straddles the margin area This is where you can be tricky If you are going to have the type always set right of the page where the straddle goes to the left you could have all of the main text set on an indent If using Autopage you would want the text area to be in its own text box while the heads are set in a text box straddling the entire margin area A field controls this called Export Data which gives the two options of Xtags Only or Autopage Export Data Pxtags Only Depending on which is selected in the Export Data field using If State ments will instruct the script if it has a Asymmetrical Indent of 7p and Export Data Autopage to the styles with off of a Op indent If using Xtags Only the indent would start on 7p Using the inf
21. set selection of window 1 to 3 find lt z9 5c Red01 f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z11cKf NewBaskerville Roman gt t searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top false wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false with selecting match grep substitution of 4 t set selection of window 1 to 4 find lt z9 5c Red01 f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z11cKf NewBaskerville Roman gt t searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top false wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false with selecting match grep substitution of 5 t set selection of window 1 to 5 Yow ll notice the sections broken by try and end try are actually con verting the bullets into numbers This can be handled in many different ways but this is the easiest to understand at this point What it is doing is for the first one it goes to the top of the BBEdit text file by keeping the starting at top true selected It then matches the first bullet and changes it to be 1 Following this I change the selection to be starting at top false which goes to the one immediately after and changes it to 2 then 3 and so on The only problem you could have here is if you do an entire chapter and this exact match
22. sion immediately The fact that Xtags already supports the import makes this a very important update To the best of my knowledge there isn t a way to turn off the different lay ers of a PSD file upon import Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 220 220 Xtags Maximized OpenType Support Quark 7 now supports OpenType fonts otf fonts which have special charac ters including ligatures substitute versions of characters swashes and other type options Here is the OpenType addition in the Character Attributes dialog Y OpenType Standard Ligatures C Tabular Figures F Fractions Discretionary Ligatures Proportional Figures O Swashes v Ordinals Titling Alternates Small Caps W Lining Figures All Small Caps C Oldstyle Figures Position Superscript C Apply C cance G Contextual Alternates Xtags has the capability of calling out multiple selections in one tag The options are available in the character style sheets To override a setting using Xtags to include OpenType the following coding structure would apply lt o liga ordn frac gt or lt o smcp Inum gt The coding structure for most of these OpenType options are as follows liga ligatures onum oldstyle figures dlig discretionary ligatures pnum proportional figures ordn ordinals Inum lining figures titl titling alternatives tnum tabular figures frac fractions numr numerator position swsh
23. 1 x This represents the left position x coordinate on the page of the text box or picture box typically this should be set at 0 for the top box unless you have an indent By using B 0 B 0 after the x coordinate before the comma the art will position on the pasteboard 2 y This represents the top position y coordinate of the box where it imports on the page Normally this also should be at 0 for the top box 3 width This is the width of the box By typing in the maximum width the art can be and then adding a question mark after ward the box will shrink to fit the width of the piece of art lt amp pbu2 0 0 15p 25p 4 height This is the depth height of the text box By typing in the maximum depth of the art can be and adding a question mark afterward the box will shrink to fit to the depth of the art Make sure the height does not exceed the maximum depth including the pasteboard lt amp pbu2 0 0 15p 25p Xtags_Cch03 44 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 44 F Xtags Maximized You can also make a box shrink to fit with some additional depth by typing a value after the and before the comma lt amp pbu2 0 0 15p 25p p4 boxangle If a box needs to be rotated 45 this is where you d apply this You can rotate either direction up to 360 Here s an example of how the boxangle will appear with a 15 rotation boxskew If the box needed to be skewed you d do i
24. 57 Space Between Rule and Figure 76 Spacing Tags 221 Stray Colors 39 40 Style Sheets Definition 19 Overrides 26 Tag Attributes 18 Table with Art Handling 114 Tabs 23 24 30 33 162 187 Templates 34 35 Text Align 56 Text Outset 47 Top Caption 53 Tracking 25 Translation Tables 12 14 17 22 28 32 33 Codes 35 Format 35 First Character Delimiter 33 French Quotes vs Brackets 32 p Hangs 33 Start Tag 33 Testing the Codes 36 Troubleshooting Tips 38 Type Size 25 Type Style 24 nanchored Lines 61 nanchored Picture Box Tags 43 nanchored Text Box Tags 50 nique Box Treatment Using Skew and Angle 133 nsupported Shape Box 107 sing all the Placements in One Element 135 sing Lines for Top and Bottom of Box 124 sing Xtags for Design Element in Box 134 CA GG GG GE Vertical Alignment 51 130 Vertical and Horizontal Mixed Relative Placement 70 Vertical Relative Placement 70 Width 43 62 Working with Blends in Captions 86 Working with Figures 76 Working with Multi Column Text Boxes 111 XML 15 39 101 107 115 157 159 175 177 179 188 192 218 XMI xt 5 15 39 159 175 Xtags Export Issue 31 Xtags Fields 41 Xtags Issues 42 Xtags User Guide 8 9 11 38 43
25. This is an AppleEvent relative box name This should be left blank unless this fits your workflow If you use AppleScript this is a way to name the box so the script can find the box layer name This is for Quark 6 1 and higher This is for unan chored boxes only It instructs which layer for the unanchored box to be placed on If not indicated it will be on the selected layer The layer will appear in the Xtags string as shown highlighted below lt amp pbu2 0 0 259 137 0 0 n 0 K n 100 100 Solid n m ges New Layer 2 ys mm Unanchored Text Box Tags The Unanchored Text Box uses the lt tbu2 code Keep in mind that if only default information is going to be needed it is acceptable to only include the first four fields The first 15 Unanchored Text Box fields are exactly the same as the first 15 of the Unanchored Picture Box Tags so there is no real use in going over these again We ll start with field 16 and continue to the end 16 17 18 19 columns By placing a 2 here this will put in a two column text box It s pretty self explanatory but the problem is that if you put in a 36p depth the first column will fill completely before put ting text into the second column gutter This is the gutter between the columns By putting lp in here it will put a lp gutter between the two columns text inset This is where you can set the text inset If needing 12 points around put in a 1
26. caption next to it to be the same depth This usually happens with shading or with a rule around the caption The positioning on this is used with the TL1 or TR1 as 46p4 R 0 1 Here is how this will import for a relative vertical placement in Xtags A great use for this is a design with a shaded box This is the caption 7 w Here is the Xtags string for the above image and relative caption lt amp pbu2 14p B 0 30p 46p4 n K W 100 100 K 0 m 56GB Disk AP_Book Art beach tif gt lt amp tbu2 13p TL1 0 9p 46p4 R 0 1 n CK W 100 100 K 10 9 c gt Label1 This is the caption for a relative vertical placement in Xtags A great use for this is a design with a shaded box lt te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt Vertical and Horizontal Mixed Relative Placement The relative placement can also be used both vertically and horizontally at the same time This is extremely useful when you have a piece of art that may have a decorative border or some other type of attached art element needing to be ignored during placement Autopage has a C O option in the art tables and side art that will position only the information in the text box containing the C O tag This can be placed over the top of the photo to ensure this type ae Xtags_Ccho4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 71 Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 71 of placement I mention Autopage a lot because I am a power user of Autopage and sometimes I
27. eps gt The next section we are going to look at is a page of the text area This is very much with the same type of treatment There s also a new element that was not part of the first book It s a vignette at the top of the second page that says Intro to Second Party Xtensions It appears like this Intro to Second Party Xtensions Second party Xtension have revolutionized QuarkXPress and may be a big sell in the future for InDesign always had a good grip on QuarkXPress but when I needed that boost of power knew there was a developer out there who had just the thing needed would go out of my way to learn this soft ware also want to help people who sometimes get a little confused on where to start It s one thing to set up a book in Autopage but it s another to get the Xtags Headers amp Contents XMLxt and even the QuarkXPress docu ment set up properly The more you have working correctly up front the less chance there will be of unforeseen problems later in the project e Xtags_ChO6 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 147 Chapter 6 Custom Publishing 147 This will need to be designed for This is where having a Design Style Data base in FileMaker Pro will be of benefit That way you don t have to really spend very much time thinking about it This is covered in the last chapter So the first thing I will do here is to design all of the missing elements for this first chapter I know this may
28. f1 nautic tif f2 CAP Nautical Equipment f3 CAP f4 CAP Nautical Equipment f5 nautic tif f6 8 After this is set up the next step is importing the text into the Quark file Xtags_ChoO7 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 166 F 166 Xtags Maximized 9 Locate each left and right piece of art on the pasteboard Move each piece into the library the left piece marked FIG1_L the right piece marked FIG1_R consecutively 10 Code the reference as AR 1 L FIG1_L R FIG1_R When Autopage runs it will place the left piece on the verso page or the right piece on the recto page depending on which page the reference lands on If you prefer you can also import without the text in the caption and use the T E method This process although lengthy saves adjustments during paging such as putting a rule above each piece repositioning and so on Just for the record this entire example including typing the explanation only took 50 minutes Throughout an entire project this process saves time and headaches once it s perfected The best solution for the library is to duplicate the standard library for the book and have one for each chapter The time it takes to put them in the library and name the piece is minimal in comparison to the time you ll save Solution 2 Manually Positioning the Rule The second possibility requires the pager to manually place the rule with the art but without having to adjust the
29. fit the depth could eventually become too long and an Xtags error will appear On the following page I do show how to pull them in side by side To keep track I may even make the label display the chapter number For example Label lt C gt 24 a I will delete the 24 once I group the three parts of the figure together The alphas combined with the art and caption will look like lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 36p 48p4 5 K W 100 100 Solid K 0 c Fig ure 01_01 eps gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 p6 36p R 0 1 p12 gt Label a lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 10 5 36p R 0 1 6p6 n K W 100 100 Solid n 1 5 ot gt This is the caption below the alpha lt amp te gt lt g 3 2 1 gt Here s an example of how this will import a This is the caption sitting below the alpha Bringing in Multi Piece Figures Together Until art departments make multiple piece figures as one piece with support files there is no getting around multi piece images Having multi piece images doesn t stop Xtags from working This can fail if you are trying to bring in stacked images because the depth will usually hit the page depth maxi mum unless you put a small amount in the total depth of the image On images that are side by side this works very well I find that it is extremely difficult to base align the alphas on multi depth images because the images will not shrink to fit in reverse If the alphas should base
30. gt lt g 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt When using a translation table the coded file would be handed as b1 Text box material b2 Title b3 New Technology b4 Overall this box is somewhat tricky but it doesn t need to impact the markup department once the codes are set into a translation table and you mark up the coded sample Xtags_Ch0O5 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 121 F Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 121 Side Margin Box Expandable Tve seen pagers make a major mistake when working with side margin boxes or regular boxes that need to be created as art Especially in a case like this where the bottom of the box is distinct from the rest of the box Look at this example f erea perfect exam ple of a margin note lgpially You would use a fort that looks hke handwriting As you can see the bottom of the box is unique to the rest of the element I ve actually seen pagers have an art department create 10 different sized boxes that would be treated like this They have the art named margin_10p eps margin llp6 eps margin_13p eps etc Handling it this way creates a huge mess for everyone During edits you are scrambling to put in the cor rectly sized piece The more effective way is to have one large piece that can handle any depth of the margin note Then have Xtags import as three pieces using relative placement for positioning Here s how we will accomplish this 1 The first objective
31. gt lt t0 gt lt z11 gt lt f Berkeley Medium gt CHAP_BM_FIRST This has a lot In order to get this to page correctly I deleted the lt t 32768 gt lt z 32768 gt and the lt f gt codes and I reimported I did a Copy Xtags Text Paste combination and the first character was selectable again without the error codes CHAP_BM_FIRST This has a lot This 32768 error will show up occasionally and it needs to be deleted out I ve seen it once actually make type disappear I would go to page 15 of the file and suddenly all of the type would be gone to the beginning of the file It would still be there but wouldn t be visible on the screen This code can show up in strange forms Here s one I found a few months ago where the tag all ran together lt t 32768z 32768b 32768f gt Error Appearing in the Last Space Here is another error that sometimes appears in the paged file I usually find this on the last space of a text box I have no idea what causes this but it can trigger major errors with the type and sometimes keeps pages from being printed The code will appear like lt B gt lt I gt lt O gt lt S gt lt gt lt V gt lt S gt lt U gt lt 4 gt lt gt lt t 32768 gt lt h 32768 gt lt Z 32768 gt lt b 32768 gt This usually ends up enhancing the style and putting a shadow on the type This may seem minor but it has been a major problem in a few books I ve had to correct I do not have the
32. gt Replace With O Ben While Grep is extremely useful to do this to multiple chapters the most effective method that I suggest is to do this in AppleScript This is the smartest way to go because it will save time on future chapters by mak ing all of these changes at once Xtags_ChO6 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 144 144 Xtags Maximized Before we get into all the changes it s important for you to understand a lit tle bit on how the Grep searches work with AppleScript Shown below are all of the changes that will need to happen in this sec tion of text The final AppleScript for this is as follows tell application BBEdit activate replace ch_cn using cn searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false replace ch_ct using ct searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false replace ch_obj using obj searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false replace lt f NewBaskerville Italic gt 2 lt f NewBaskerville Roman gt using lt I gt 2
33. gt and you typed in lt f Bembo Bold gt with an en dash between it it would take on the Normal style of type It is very important to make sure the name is correct Test this first Creating Character Styles Very similar to creating a Paragraph Style Character Styles use only the last half of the style tag from the type style to the font definition Here s an exam ple of how the character style will appear H4 lt K gt lt s90 gt lt t0 gt lt h80 gt lt z11 5 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt c C10 gt lt f Berkeley Bold gt The descriptions on the previous pages apply exactly the same to the charac ter styles When defining a character style it is possible to only include the important information For example you could just enter the following H4 lt K gt lt s90 gt lt h80 gt lt z11 5 gt lt c C10 gt lt f Berkeley Bold gt The undefined tags take on the Normal style specifications Style Sheet Overrides If you need to override a style sheet you can use whatever tags you would need to make this happen For example if a workbook needs a different set ting for one list element but a style sheet isn t necessary it is possible to put this type of a treatment in the style sheet BXNL lt p 1p10 1p10 gt lt t 1p10 0 1 gt 1 lt 009 gt This is the type As shown above the paragraph parameters that normally contains 8 fields looking like lt p 0 0 0 14 0 0 g U S English gt has been broken down to
34. i m 100 K 0 12 12 6 12 m gt 26 GB Disk Xtags Book Images f2 gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 6 31p6 5p i n 100 n 1 1 24 6 ED t1 lt amp tbu2 5 5 TL1 6 5 24p6 30p p 5 1 6n 100 n 24 34 34 94 scsi This is specifying that when using the ol Origin Tag that the image will place at 14p6 x and 5p6 y This is the text area where the image will need to place I will only use 01 tag once The remaining images will have the 02 specifier which is saying that all remaining images need to be set at the same x and y coordinates as the first image but on the page they import on By using a runaround the images tables or boxes will place throughout the document on the page where they were originally typed The only downfall to this that I have found is if more than one image falls on the same page they will stack on top of each other If you are not careful this is an easy way to lose an image I do want to point out that an argument could be that instead of using the Origin Tags that you could just include the page area x and y coordinates in the Xtags strings This makes certain the images would always pull into that location rather than using the Origin Tags This is acceptable to do as long as you do not want to use the same strings in different places such as art that would fall within boxes or tables The Origin Tags give you much more con trol over when you want to use the coord
35. kt gt wireless Internet lt p gt has been important Using lt kt gt laptop lt p gt computers You would do a Grep replacement of Search for lt kt gt w w lt p gt 2 lt p gt Replaced with T ISR 2 4 2 3 4 5 The end result would look like this The onset of lt kt gt SR wirelessInternet wireless Internet lt p gt has been important Using lt kt gt SR laptop laptop lt p gt computers This would also work with margin notes by putting the S laptop code using the character style of the lt mnkt gt up to the lt p gt This is a small sampling of how the Autopage codes work but it gives you a basic idea where to begin I ve saved hours on a project by just having this figured out at the beginning of the project and other than a few duplicate code errors the chapters paged very well Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 154 154 Xtags Maximized Altering Boxes to New Style Matching the look of boxes is very important and really requires using the Grep replacements to execute What seems to happen in many cases is that new styles appear in the book that you need to change that aren t in the des tination book This requires creating the new styles Sometimes the boxes just need to have the look changed Here is an example of what the box is in the original book WIRELESS INTERNET With the onset of online shopping auction companies and the ease of use through
36. lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z11 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Berkeley Medium gt CFT S CFT lt C gt lt h Standard gt lt kn0 gt lt kt0 gt lt ra0 gt lt rb0 gt lt d0 gt lt p 0 0 0 30 0 0 g U S English gt lt K gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z30 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Slimbach Black gt H1 NL1 CFT CFN Chapter 1 CFT Building Picture and Text Boxes TX1 When was first introduced to Xtags almost 10 years ago the picture and text box tags were the big sell to me had no idea how much time had wasted prior to realizing the power that lies in these tags alone lt t1 gt A lot of automation awakenings happened for me upon learning about Xtags lt t0 gt HI1 Xtags Fields TX1 Xtags uses comma separated fields to process the detailed information for importing boxes and images The following shows a complete string for importing art CTR lt b1 gt lt lt gt ART FILE 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 03 fg03_02 eps W 182 882pt H 51 539pt XS 100 YS 100 lt gt gt lt b0 gt H2 Xtags Issues TX1 When using Xtags to bring in photos or boxes one of the biggest mistakes is ending up with unnecessary information When using Xtags there are two ways to get the Xtags strings One is to type the fields in manually or by grouping the boxes together going to lt f Berkeley Italic gt Edit Copy Xtags Text lt f Berkeley Medium gt and lt f Berkeley Italic g
37. m Macintosh HD Art city1 tif gt lt amp tbu2 1p BR1 9p9 7p 10p n n 100 n 0 b gt FIG lt FIG_NUM gt Figure 6 lt p gt Bottom Right Side Example lt amp te gt lt g 1 2 gt ae Xtags_Ch03 56 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 56 p Xtags Maximized Grouping Following any combination of text or picture boxes make sure you have the items grouped together using the amp g code The full code is lt amp g 1 2 gt for two boxes lt g 1 2 3 gt for three boxes and so on The order is based on the recently created boxes or how you want them to be grouped It is possible to have different groupings in one tag Here s an example where there are 2 boxes grouped together then two other boxes grouped together then at the end box pairs are grouped lt Q pbu lt g 2 1 gt lt amp pbu lt g 2 1 gt lt amp g 4 1 gt Anchored Picture and Text Boxes Anchored picture and text boxes are very similar to unanchored with some differences in the fields Anchored picture boxes use amp pb and anchored text boxes use amp tb There are many uses from icons to small images MathType art can also be used as anchored pieces If you are anchoring type one advantage is that when exporting the material the text within the an chored piece becomes part of the text flow Be aware that an anchored box cannot contain another anchored box It s one of the limitations of QuarkXPress Anchore
38. so 45 is used in the box angle field to represent the 45 angle 2 The text box was Sent to Back using k in the flags field 3 The baseline offset is set for 2p to keep from having to use an inset since the styles have 1p left and right indents 4 As an alternative to using an inset for the bottom of the box I added 5 points to the depth of the shrink to fit 16p on the text box which added enough space to have lp around the box DREAMWEAVER VS WRITING CODE There s no denying that things move fast in software Only a few years ago Dreamweaver was introduced taking the guesswork out of setting up complicated web pages Other programs have also been introduced but many html enthusiasts feel they want to write out the code themselves This shows different options using Xtags For this box it s not necessary to use a BLI since the boxes will always start in the same locations lt amp pbu2 6 3 B 6 3 30 30 45 n n 100 Solid K 75 m gt lt amp tbu2 21 B 10 5 17p10 16p p5 k n 0 5 n 100 Solid K 15 2P gt SUPTTL Dreamweaver lt gt lt gt vs Writing Code BOX There no denying themselves lt amp te gt lt g 2 1 gt To reduce time again it is a good idea to put this into a translation table so the coding will be easier The markup department would only have to type the following tl SUPTTL Title BOX Text t2
39. so the art is not covering up the pages This is especially useful for the Autopage workflow where the program will place all of the images boxes and other floating ele ments in their referenced locations If you would rather work the floating el ements all stacked up on the edge of your page this wouldn t be the ideal workflow to adopt Be especially careful when creating the codes for your boxes that if you are not using the TL1 or BL1 type of correlation to your previous box that youll need the B in those as well or part of the box will be on the paste board and the remainder will end up on the page giving messy results Unanchored Lines One major Xtags advancement is the unanchored amp lbu and anchored amp lb lines feature I stumbled across this on accident one day because I m always Xtags_Cch03 62 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 62 p Xtags Maximized testing different things to see if something new was introduced when I get an Xtags update In the past the way to get a line to import with Xtags was to draw a very thin lpt box and treat it as a line instead This still works but is kind of point less unless the line needs to have relative placement At this point I cannot get relative placement to work with the lines which makes me believe it isn t supported yet If using an unanchored box to make a line keep in mind that the line will have to be at least 1pt since Quark does not support a box
40. u01x End of Caption Figures fOly Photos pOly Unnumbered uOly These markers will be used to add data based on the information scripted inside the program It is much easier for the coding department to add these e Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 197 F Chapter 9 Xtags and FileMaker Pro 197 small variables rather than actual art names Here is an example of how the text will be coded using these markers xtags tx1 This is text Unnumbered Callout u01z Photo Callout p01z and Figure Callout f012z fgn f01x Figure 3 1 This is the caption f01 y fgn f02x Figure 3 2 This is the caption f02y fgn p01x This is the first photo caption p01y fgn p02x This is the second photo caption p02y fgn u01x This is the first unnumbered caption u01y fgn u02x This is the second unnumbered caption u02y This text file will be imported into the database An AppleScript within the database is run to match against these codes The file exports out of the data base into a new BBEdit file and makes all of the replacements Here is what the file will then look like lt amp tt2 Williams ttl gt tx1 This is text Unnumbered Callout AR U01 V 2 I Y Photo Callout AR P01 V 2 and Figure Callout AR 01 V 2 fgn fg1 Chapter 04 fg_0401 eps fg2 A 01 Figure 3 1 This is the caption lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt fgn fg1 Chapter 04 fg_0402 eps Ifg2
41. 0 24p 4p R 0 1 N N 100 100 N gt Space from f93 lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt Art Maximum Depth 53p K Art to Caption 12 Images Photos com Option 2 Option3 Option 4 CD Shown here is how the opening page of the Xtags Creator database will appear This is a database I created but you can build a similar interface by creating the art through Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Illustrator There is a lot happen ing in this program I m going to give a little background about FileMaker Pro before going into the Xtags Creator Each button or place to fill in information is known as a field You need to define each field with a unique name to be used throughout This is how FileMaker Pro interprets the data Each record is like its own job You can store a job number as a record for each author you work with There are scripts that can take the field informa tion and manipulate it to do nearly anything you need There are also buttons like in the lower right of the program that can run scripts take you to other pages load images or however else you script these ae Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 196 p 196 Xtags Maximized Starting at the top of the page the first thing to notice is we re on the Art Placement Option 1 page With this checkbox clicked to the right it acti vates everything for the type of art selected I have this scripted where the pro gram will read through all of the fields and bas
42. 0 Xtags Art ch03_009 eps gt The style sheet is bringing in the DT tag and all of its attributes This can be very necessary information but if predefined it is not necessary to include all of this You need to know when you should leave this checked I m not suggesting that you need to select Dont export style sheet defini tions I find that in a lot of cases I do like to see what the style sheet infor mation is I will sometimes run an AppleScript against it to flag styles that might have errors in them For example I always like to have my Keep Lines Together 2 and 2 So I may run a script that runs through and generates a list that shows any style that has lt ktO gt or lt ktA gt applied This can also work if you want to see if any stray fonts are showing up in your styles by running a script against the font part of the tag Omit Default Elements in Xtags List Tags This option is also important depending on your comprehension level of the program When pasting the text following the Copy Xtags Text feature you will normally have this string lt amp pbu2 0 0 198 39 0 0 n 0 K n 100 100 Solid n 100 0 m 1 00 100 0 0 0 0 56 GB Disk Xtags Art ch03_009 eps gt Xtags_Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 13 p Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 13 Some people do not like all of this extra information in the path because the majority of the fields are default information These can be excluded
43. 04 fg04_011 eps f3 Relative Double Border This one is fairly easy yet it requires two rules around it The second box needs to be relative to the other picture box plus 4 pts Here s an example of how the final imported image should appear Portofino Italy is known for it s harbor that is full of boats This is one of those that can give someone trouble because they tend to overcomplicate it The first obvious thing we see is that the picture box is rounded with a 25 3 pt border around it Around that is a 45 3 pt border ae Xtags_Ccho4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 85 p Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 85 To get this effect start by approaching this systematically Let s start by dealing with the image Since the dark outer border needs to be placed second we need for this to import 3 pts from the top left of the pasteboard We also need a 3 pt rule with rounded corners and a 1p1 corner radius which for this will be set at 22 and a 25 rule shade lt amp pbu2 3 B 3 42p 5 45p 5 n 3 22 n 25 Solid K 0 m 0 3 0 3 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Chapter 04 fg04_012 eps gt The outer border needs to be 3 TL1 from the first box and an additional 6 points width and depth added to the relative placement lt amp pbu2 3 TL1 3 42p R p6 1 45p R p6 1 The text box below is very standard but is relative to the outer picture box s width The full code for this box is lt a
44. 05 fg0102 eps f2 fgc This is caption 2 f3 o2 t1 Table text goes here t2 As I pointed out this doesn t make a flawless paged document but it saves a lot of initial time in placing the images near their referenced location The Xtags string does have to be located near the referenced text For example if you have Figure 1 1 The text file should be set up like this textstyle This can be seen in Figure 1 1 o1 f1 Chapter 05 fg0101 eps f2 fgc Figure 1 1 Caption f3 The same would go for a table or box If the table is called out it should be similar to textstyle See the data in Table 1 1 o02 t1 Table text 1 1 here t2 Most coders tend to type all of the figures tables and boxes at the end of the text document I suggest following this in most cases but if trying to handle your floating elements with the Origin Tags this would not be the ideal sit uation After the initial import its important to look through Picture Usage to be sure images are not stacked on top of each other Although there are some issues with doing this it does make for a more expedited paging experience on a book with many images One definite issue ae Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 101 F Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 101 is that if the inside and outside margins are not equal the image on the verso and recto pages will position differently The idea here is to get the images close to the callout wi
45. 1 than any newer version of the program What I do if I have the program closing out on a certain page I will 1 Make sure the file is enlarged enough where the spread before or after isn t visible 2 Go to the page before the offending spread and click on the last line Then I go to the spread following the offending spread and click on the top line and select all the text between I then select Copy Xtags Text 3 Go into BBEdit create a new file and Paste This is where you really need to know your codes Upon pasting the file I hope to discover the error code in the text It is possible that it is within a floating element If this is the case then I will do a Batch Export out of Au topage and try to isolate the error this way If you know the codes well enough it s very easy to find the error but if you are still getting to know the codes an experienced Xtags user is probably your best bet Xtags_Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 39 p Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 39 Can t Select First Character of Type 32768 Error Let s take a look at some text that was exported In the paged file I couldn t select the first character in the paragraph When I exported the paged file I had this starting the paragraph CHAP_BM_FIRST lt t 32768 gt lt z 32768 gt lt f gt NOSTYLE ITC Highlander Bookltalic P 100 0 lt t0 gt lt z11 gt lt f Berkeley Medium gt CHAP_BM_FIRST lt t 32768 gt lt Z 32768 gt lt f 2
46. 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 185 p Chapter 8 Repurposing with Xtags 185 the pager will have a numbered list start off with a nll then the remaining are nl but when they get to the last one they do not put a nl2 on it because a head follows and they don t need the adjustable space This is where it is very difficult to work with the XML because it is difficult to determine where the numbered list ends Here s an example of how the numbered list may look upon export nll 1 This is the first entry nl 2 This is the second entry nl 3 This is the last entry h1 This is the new H1 head The problem here is that the numbered list in the middle will end up with a closing lt listItem gt on it but without the closing lt numberList gt on it There is a way around this by performing a Grep replacement prior to doing the actual replacement for the rest of the list Search for nl 2 r A Z d AL d _ 2 r Replaced with lt listItem gt 2 lt listIltem gt 3 lt numberList gt 3 4 5 6 7 End Result lt listltem gt 3 This is the last entry lt listltem gt lt numberList gt This is going through and finding an nl style but making sure that what ever follows is anything but an nl style The highlighted area shows the first letter of the style can be any letter or number and the L matches on any character except an L This keeps it from matching on NL b
47. 16 p Xtags Maximized Here s an example of an AppleScript with the Get Text with Xtags function I have included both quote conversion and error reporting The convert quotes is the default tell application QuarkXPress activate get text with Xtags from Macintosh HD Automation Folder Wexler Wexler_ch03 with quote conversion and error reporting end tell If you didn t want Error reporting simply write the get text line as follows get text with Xtags from Macintosh HD Automation Folder Wexler Wexler_ch03 with quote conversion This will also work for the Save Text with Xtags function Some people may argue that it is easy to just go into the file and save the text with Xtags and it might not be worth the time investment to write the AppleScript This can be a good point however you need to look at your day and it seems to me that any time you can save from having to look for folders or annoying tasks like this only ensures more profitability to your employer So it is a good practice to see wherever production time can be reduced Here is an example where I instruct the program for style definitions full list elements and containing box When selecting containing box Xtags will throw in a Xtags Unanchored text box tag lt amp tbu gt and a closing lt amp te gt around the text If you do not want this don t include this in the AppleScript tell application QuarkXPress activate save text with Xtags to Maci
48. 2 3 and so on For Grep these are tagged as 1 2 3 and so on If you have some understanding of MacPerl Grep should come fairly easy to you Learning to use Grep is power There is very little you can not change throughout a document or multi file replacement I will show you a couple of examples of some amazing code changes that can be achieved just by understanding many of the features Again it is extremely important to delimit the following characters unless you are using these as functions in the Find amp Replace window I A I amp This list is not complete but makes one aware of what will need a pre ceding it These all have functions within the Grep patterns Here are a few examples Match at the beginning of a line Used with subpatterns such as 1 2 and so on O Used for grouping subpatterns Any character Match at the end of a line Separates two functions within a subpattern amp Will replace the entire match pattern If unsure whether a character should be delimited it s always a good idea to delimit it or test to see if the results happen by not delimiting In most cases there is more than one way to achieve the results For example if needing Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 139 p Chapter 6 Custom Publishing 139 to find every occurrence of AR ID you could try to find it a couple dif ferent ways ANIAR d dI d This will find either a single
49. 27 06 6 39 PM Page 132 p 132 Xtags Maximized 4 Where things get tricky is the middle section This section needs to start at the base of the first piece of art but extend only to the top of the bot tom piece of art This is done with relative placement However because of the rigid outline of the box shape the top left corner needs to position exact just as the bottom left corner In order to do this the tag needs to have relative placement with a 12p9 6 size reduction and an F expand or shrink to fit 16 field option lt amp pbu2 3p TL2 5p3 29p6 30p R 12p9 6 0 k n n 100 n F 96 GB Disk Chapter 05 box_middle eps gt This is necessary because you want the middle piece of art to maintain 100 width but the depth will be anywhere from 10 to 150 in size but it will not be noticeable because the top and the bottom edges of the middle section line up perfectly to give the illusion that it is all one piece Here s an example of how this will look with more bullet points You can see the middle piece is still set correctly but it is scaled at 62 5 depth by using the F 16 field option New Technology Important Issues Remember the following important points The start of the ____ 7 middle section e Try to use as few boxes as possible during the set up If can use insets or First Baseline to accomplish this I ll spend a little extra time to keep the boxes as user friendly as
50. 95 In Closing 96 5 Creating Boxes and Elements Origin Tags 97 Pre paging with Origin Tags 99 Xtags_FM 11 27 06 5 38 PM Page vi vi Xtags Maximized Creating Boxes with Xtags 101 Single Column Box 101 Single Column Box with Rotation 103 Simple Box with Background Art 104 Example of a Two Box Approach with Relative 105 Rounded Corner Box with Unsupported Shape 106 More Advanced Unsupported Shape Box 107 Combining Elements 109 Side Margin Box with a Vertical Line 110 Working with Multi Column Text Boxes 111 Inline Text Elements 113 Table with Art Handling 114 Complicated Box with Art 115 Complex Box with Seven Xtags Strings 117 Complicated Box with Rotated Text 119 Side Margin Box Expandable 121 Picture Box Using Skew 123 Using Lines for Top and Bottom of Box 124 MathType Anchored with Xtags 125 Oval Text Box with Offset Shadow 127 Complicated Box with Multiple Elements 128 Expand or Shrink to Fit with Graduated Screen 130 Box with 3 Separate Parts 131 Unique Box Treatment Using Skew and Angle 133 Using Xtags for Design Element in Box 134 Using all the Placements in One Element 135 6 Custom Publishing Some Background on Grep Searches 138 Looking at the Operators 139 Custom Publishing Using Xtags 141 The Opening Page 142 Adding Autopage Codes with Grep 152 Altering Boxes to New Style 154 In Closing 156 7 Xtags Working with Autopage The Paginate Window in Autopage 158 Repurposing Content 159 e Xtag
51. Autopage tags fairly easy using Xtags and a Grep replacement In this example any occurrence of bib_ttl will be changed to begin with LC 1 M 40p A 3 and the following line will need to begin with ILC 2 M 19p A 4 To apply this to the following three paragraphs you DO NOT want the LC 2 to end up on each bib line bib_ttl Bibliography bib Michael Johnson bib Frank Wilson To get the proper results we must use complex subpatterns To apply this requires having the LC 2 only with the first bib There is more than one way to do this but the way requiring the least amount of work is have it within the same line of code as the LC 1 To achieve this the Search For and Replace With windows of the Find amp Replace will need to have this exactly Search for bib_ttl 2 r bib Replaced with 1 LC 1 M 40p A 3 2 3 LC 2 M 19p A 4 The end result in the input file will be bib_ttl LC 1 M 40p A 3 Bibliography bib LC 2 M 19p A 4 Michael Johnson bib Frank Wilson The subpatterns make this possible by using the return r as a way to put the LC 2 into the next line making this very workable for any situa tion including straddle heads The Grep feature is worth the price of the BBEdit alone Once you start applying the power of Grep your workflow will become more efficient and the need for a markup department to input sensitive A
52. Box Supression N Frame Gap Color None ffset Bg Color User Color 1 z 7 o 5 Frame Style Solid Bg Shade 0 E eoa Offsety 0 Frame Shade None Frame Color None Scale Y Placement Centered Frame Gap Shade Text Box Ca ption Advanced amp tbu2 Frame and Shade Options Columns Baseline Frame width None Rounded Columns 1 7 Corner Radius Gutter Default Box Skew 0 Runaround Text Inset Corner Type Box Skew Angle Flags Placement Color Runaround Baseline Offset None Box Angle 0 Top Top Frame Color Baseline min Ascent Flags None _ m Left Frame Color Gap Nor Vertical Align Default Top Bg Color Black Right Right Frame Style Solid Bg Shade 0 Bottom d Bottom Frame Shade EET g r Back to First Page Frame Gap Shade 100 The first page contains the fields that will need to be changed for each book The Advanced Options are primarily for additional Xtags functions such as frames runarounds offsets etc I will go through part of this to give you an idea how this should be set up and used It is a good idea to make sure you have a script that sets the default information upon making a new record This ensures that the default information will be put into the Xtags strings Autopage Reference Options Autopage Reference Options Autopage Placement VSB Positioning 2 Fost Many users would want to have Autopage re
53. Here s an example Search for Z Replaced with r lt chapter gt Based on the replacements I displayed here our original file shown at the start of the chapter would now reflect the following lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt lt chapter num 1 id ch 00 01 gt lt chapter title gt Building Picture and Text Boxes lt chapter title gt lt para gt When was first introduced to Xtags almost 10 years ago the picture and text box tags were the big sell to me had no idea how much time had wasted prior to realizing the power that lies in these tags alone A lot of automation awakenings happened for me upon learning about Xtags lt para gt lt h1 gt Xtags Fields lt h1 gt lt para gt Xtags uses comma separated fields to process the detailed information for importing boxes and images The following shows a complete string for importing art lt para gt lt figure num 02 id 03 02 gt lt ART FILE fg03_02 eps W 182 882pt H 51 539pt XS 100 YS 100 gt lt figure gt lt h2 gt Xtags Issues lt h2 gt lt para gt When using Xtags to bring in photos or boxes one of the biggest mistakes is ending up with unnecessary information When using Xtags there are two ways to get the Xtags strings One is to type the fields in manually or by grouping the boxes together going to lt italic gt Edit Copy Xtags Text lt italic gt and lt italic gt Paste lt italic gt lt para gt lt numberList gt lt l
54. Increase Your Profitability When a person looks at the limited amount of menus that Xtags has within the Quark program it appears that it might be somewhat limited but it s quite the opposite So much can be accomplished in this program that it s quite astonishing When I look back many years ago before I discovered the power of Xtags I often wonder how the projects were profitable The mindset you have to adapt is to be as profitable as possible Having worked with Xtags for over 9 years I have used the codes on hun dreds of projects and have proven to be one of the most profitable automation specialists for any company I ve worked for merely due to my ability and knowledge of streamlining the process If you manage a composition depart ment this program should be mandatory for both InDesign and Quarkx Press The tools exist within this program to generate increased profits for your company But just having the program loaded in your XTensions folder wont do anything for you It s up to you to have your staff read this book look for efficiencies and take the time to make them happen I ve always been bothered by the small percentage of pagers in a compo sition department that actually know the software to an advanced level I worked in a composition department that had 15 to 20 licenses of Xtags Only four of us really used it productively Others would make foolish claims that it was less complicated to manually import the art I
55. K 40 shading so this will be easier to locate the content lt para gt With the onset big money lies lt amp te gt lt amp lbu 0 75 0 287 0r 1 5 70 gt lt amp pbu2 138 69 12 5 12 5 0 n 100 1K 40 Myr ppp rr gt lt amp 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt lt para gt Knowing this we can break this code down quite easily to delete all of the Xtags information no longer needed but still matching on it so we can make this change Search for lt para gt lt amp te gt 2 0 2K 40 4 2 lt amp g 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt lt para gt r Replaced with 1 5 lt box gt 6 End Result lt para gt With the onset big money lies lt para gt lt box gt Here is an example of how the box would position upon export in the text file If you notice there are a few paragaphs and then the box appears Typi cally the entire text chain would be first and the floating elements would all gather at the end of the file For demonstration purposes we made this eas ier In the finished file the box needs to position right below the first para graph where the marker is lt para gt This used to be the case years ago when the big screen lt para gt bx01 lt para gt This is another paragraph of text lt para gt lt box number 03 gt lt title gt Internet Home Businesses lt title gt lt para gt With the onset of online shopping lt para gt lt box gt After the AppleScript is
56. Layouts M XML Tag Unlinked Art C Convert Link Embed Notes 1st ID v Use Styles 4 MS Word 6 Export v Delete Temporary Files WARNING When paging multiple files do not use Stars amp Stripes XT 4 The dialog Select QXP Doc in Export Hierarchy will appear Click on a doc ument in the folder you want to XML check and select Open Select QXP Doc in Export Hierarchy All Readable Documents Autopage 6 Book AP_CHO1 E AP_CHO2 E AP_CHO3 aa Xtags_Ch08 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 178 178 Xtags Maximized 5 Each chapter will open up as the Batch Export utility runs It will first run through the XML Export If you do not own XMLxt some of these export functions will not be available XMLxt Export Conversion Status Percentage Completion 98 Cancel 6 Next the AutoTag Export Conversion Status will happen If there s a prob lem with the linking of an Autopage document this will not complete to 100 7 Once the export is complete open the Autopage Export Folder within the folder you selected to run through the Batch Export If everything ran as expected and you exported with Xtags all of your chapters should contain the same name as your Quark documents followed by an xtg Xtags extension If a file doesn t export properly check the Autopage Batch Export Logfile to identify the problem B D D D D B 5 TEXT TEXT A
57. Source lt amp te gt lt amp g 3 2 1 gt When using a translation table the markup department will code the text like this fgc f1 Caption Text f2 Chapter 04 fg04_013 eps f3 fgs f4 Source Text f5 I know you are thinking this is so easy why even show this There s an extra step that is important On many images there will not be a source line You do not want Xtags bringing in an empty text box The best thing to do in this situation is to have the markup department still write up the source line but leave the text blank afterwards if a source doesn t exist Then run an AppleScript that would do the following tell application BBEdit activate replace r fgs f4 E f5 using lt amp g 1 2 gt searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive true match words false extend selection false end tell By doing this the coding department will not have to try and change the Xtags for those images After running the AppleScript the coded file will look like this fgc f1 Caption Text f2 Chapter 04 fg04_013 eps f3 lt amp g 1 2 gt Working with Blends in Captions I can hear you saying to yourselves Xtags doesn t support blends You are correct about that Well at least at press time this was a true statement but there is a way around this by using relative placement and hav
58. The first would be the H amp J if the Pre P3 wasn t defined Then it would just default to Standard It is always best to have your H amp Js ready to go ahead of time I will show you a good AppleScript way to do this later in this chapter 2 The other is to make sure the font is loaded and that you named it prop erly in the tag Otherwise it will become the default font in the normal style sheet Xtags_Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 19 p Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 19 By using this way of defining a style sheet a person can quickly reduce the time it takes to design a book I have built a FileMaker Pro database that can actually speed up the design time on a book by using pull down menus to populate these tags Omitted tags in the style sheet default to the Normal style attributes Tll break down each of these tags so you can see how these work together to form a full style sheet Be aware that spaces are allowed within the tags and they will still work the same For example lt L gt is still acceptable as lt L gt Style Sheet Definition h3 S h3 Calls in the style sheet h3 S h2 h3 Calls in the style sheet and the style based on The top example creates a style sheet named h3 The bottom example shows an h2 in the second set of quotes meaning the h3 style is based on the h2 style The h2 style would need to be defined before it any style can be based on
59. This is a little more complicated Upon finishing this box the adjustment would just be adjusting the 10 gray box and the 2 column text Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 113 Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 113 Inline Text Elements Let s break away from boxes for a little bit I ve focused a lot on these and they are really what the bulk of this chapter is all about however I feel that I d be doing you a disservice if I only showed you what is possible there I want to touch on text elements that can save time when working in the chapters If using Autopage most text elements will be in the library to be extracted during the AutoTag conversion as a side art underlay but I find that these can be imported as easily as pulled from a library Lets look at this H1 head below THE ROLE OF MARKETING ONLINE As mentioned in the previous paragraph using this as an Autopage side art underlay is probably the best way and is technically a correct answer I understand that not every reader owns Autopage so for those users I would say there is an easy way that can happen during the coding instead of rooting around for it in the library This is done by grouping this together and importing it onto the page Here is how we are going to accomplish this 1 We need to create the element When you first look at it you probably feel that the rule should be in the style but I decided to make it all one grouped element with a ve
60. This is a very pow erful exporting text tool Xtags_ChoO7 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 160 160 Xtags Maximized mm Side Art Using Reference I ve paged some extremely difficult books using Autopage that some said couldn t be done I m not declaring that they were easy because they were just the opposite but when someone says it can t be done I give it my best shot to prove them wrong I try to argue that it should be paged in Autopage unless there isn t a main text flow where each page is unique rather than following a set design Here is an example of a layout with annotations I am going to have to change my present job or I am going to be fired Yesterday I did poorly poor on my clean up procedures I had worked 12 hours at my job and hadn t eaten anything of have most off the day Yesterday when I thought I would get some downtime to get a meal the boss over made me take offer for an absent employee So I was stuck at the front desk taking care of very business That job is becoming vary tough English books with heavy use of annotations have been argued to be too com plex for Autopage I m here to tell you this opinion isn t true Annotations can be achieved by combining the power of Xtags and Autopage but the set up can be perplexing The breakdown to achieve this is as follows You ll need to be using an Xtags translation table to accomplish this Im mainly showing how to posi tion annota
61. WARS ET etc were being turned out Even horror movies like Halloween had a unique twist e Hollywood in 2004 is a grim situation Studios are less interested in what will be remem bered 10 years ago and more concerned about which movies will be remembered for about 15 minutes Hard working actresses like Catherine Mary Stewart and Cheryl Pollak rarely get starring roles because the MTV crowd would rather see Mandy Moore star in a movie because her recent video is on the 1 position on MTVs top 10 countdown ake ITIO THE REGURGATED PLOTS ARE CONSTANTLY SHOWING UP WITH ALMOST ILLEGAL STEALING FROM OTHER MOVIES Hollywood thinks people forget the plots of yesterday Just because hip hop artists can take a song like Dream On and spin a new twist on it doesn t make us forget that its a delib orate steal Such is the case with this years 13 Going on 30 which did well at the box office but does this seem almost the same as Big starring Tom Hanks If Big hadn t been a great movie then it may be okay to use the same basic plot but substituting a female in the lead isn t really pulling anything over anyone eyes STOP GOING TO THE MOVIES Maybe its time people quit going to see movies that they know aren t worth seeing If we ve already seen it don t go to the theater to see it Wait until it comes on video This will send a strong message to the studios that if they want to deliver garbage it must go straight to video E gt Ee
62. Xtags Maximized need to do is use the Fit to Width feature and let the height shrink to fit as usual The Fit to Width or Fit to Height feature is using the f inside the width or height tag in parenthesis similar to how relative placement works To do this l Write the Xtags code for the box placement as you normally would Normally it will be lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 30p 45p n n 100 c 100 100 0 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 04 fg04_006 eps gt 2 In this case we know we ll need the width to be 18p We could just put in 18p for the width but the picture could get cut off as shown below The dotted rule shows the amount of image that would be cut We want to avoid this So instead we ll put in 18p f for the width This is telling Xtags that the width is 18p we want to fit the image to that size but still have the depth shrink to fit lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 18p f 45p 3 When the image comes in it now fits the width perfectly by scaling it to 80 4 both for the depth and the width It used the width to do the fit but did a shrink to fit on the depth and maintained the 80 4 upon importing the art Computer Spotlight This book has not covered every aspect I feel intermediate and advanced users because that is not my intention My main need to work through these examples objective is to show the user how to get more out of the program by approaching the program in a different manner tha
63. Xtags text file that can be imported You can also write an AppleScript that takes the exported file and import the Xtags directly into the QuarkXPress template Additional scripting can have it run Autopage The power here is based on what you need and the ability to understand scripting The other part that I wanted to point out is by selecting the Style buttons under the chapter opening image will tell the database to use one of three dif ferent styles Style 1 Style 2 Style 3 If set up correctly this provides the user the option of having three completely different appearances for the design You can set this as high as you want to Xtags_Ch0O9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 215 F Chapter 9 Xtags and FileMaker Pro 215 depending on your needs You could have twenty different design styles but this requires extra scripting underneath What will need to be scripted will be that the design elements through out will have to match the style This makes it important to have scripts designed that will call out those elements based on which style is selected Here s an example of how a script could be set up to interact with this If StyleGenerator Style Indicator Style 1 Perform Script Style 1 Elements Else If StyleGenerator Style Indicator Style 2 Perform Script Style 2 Elements Else If StyleGenerator Style Indicator Style 3 Perform Script Style 3 Elements End If Whe
64. Yes No On A 2 amp searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 200 p 200 Xtags Maximized Xtags Creator F1 Art Name author_f0101 eps replace f d d a e X using fg1 Chapter amp Xtags Creator Chapter No amp amp Left Lower Xtags Creator Author Last Name 3 amp _f amp Xtags Creator Chapter No amp 2 eps fg2 amp If Xtags Creator F1 Autopage Yes No On A 2 amp searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false amp end tell What this is doing is saying that if the Art Name f0101 eps to go through and find the f01x f02x etc and change it to fg1 Chapter 03 f0301 eps fg2 Caption Text If Autopage is being used then a button will be clicked as shown here Autopage Usage If this button is selected it will activate this If Statement If Xtags Creator F1 Autopage Yes No On A 2 This creates the A 01 Autopage tag marker based on the figure number The author_f0101 eps is much different
65. a lot of fields to enter I ll break this down easier by going left to right left indent first line right indent leading space before space after lock to baseline grid language gt I typically leave the lock to baseline grid and the language alone This will reflect the formats window in QuarkXPress If you were working with a num bered list the paragraph parameter may reflect this lt p 18 18 0 13 9 0 g U S English gt You can also use picas in the left and right indents as well as the first line Get ting to know this tag can add functionality if you plan on making a style data base or a script to change existing styles Tabs lt t 18 0 1 gt The Tabs will not always appear in the full style definition by default If you are writing your own definitions and you want to ensure no tabs will be pres ent enter lt t0 gt Tabs are defined as follows position alignment fill The position is the ruler position where the tab sits The alignment is which type of tab it takes Here are the alignment definitions O Left alignment 4 Decimal 1 Center alignment 5 Comma 2 Right alignment Align On The fill character is a little more involved I ll try to explain this as I under stand it to be The fill isn t always going to be used In fact many times you won t want a fill in your tab By leaving this blank a 1 will appear How ever if you want to have a single digit such as a
66. a lot of overrides and manual manipulation by the pager opposed to creating character style sheets Some of this could not be helped For example in the ch_tx paragraph that shows all the lines with the kerning and tracking lt t 1 gt This lt k 2 gt lt kO gt could lt k 2 gt This was not done manually by the pager but rather by the Autopage pro gram This of course you would want to remove since the style and fonts are changing This is fairly easy to do without losing anything The method to do this is by doing a Grep search and including the following in the Search For lt t d gt lt d gt lt k d gt lt k d gt You would need to leave the replace as blank This this would also work in an AppleScript by including this line tell application BBEdit activate replace lt t d gt lt t d gt lt k d gt lt k d 5 using searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false end tell This is actually a line you would want to include in all of your AppleScripts for custom publishing If the tracking is necessary it should be in the style sheets You will want to always review your content ahead of time especially Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 149 F Chapter 6 Custom Publishing 149 in annotated English books to make sure the pager didn t
67. aligned after import ing Ungroup and choose Item Space Align The images in the example are the same depth ae Xtags_Ch0O4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 81 F Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 81 This example contains many Xtags features including TR1 BL1 relative placement rule trapping grouping alphas and so on Hawaii beaches and beautiful scenery are favorites amongst tourists 1 I first calculate the first image and then I make sure this is grouped together with the alpha below For example lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 40p 1 40p 1 n 0 5 n 100 Solid K 0 m 0 5 0 5 56 GB Disk Xtags Art Photos ha1 tif gt lt tbu2 0 BL1 10 5 35p R 0 0 2p gt ALPHA a lt te gt lt g 1 2 gt 2 Next will need to repeat this almost exactly for the second image but I ll have this 18 points TR The Xtags string is repeated exactly for the third image lt pbu2 18 TR1 0 40p 1 40p 1 n 0 5 n 100 Solid K 0 m 0 5 0 5 56 GB Disk Xtags Photos ha2 tif gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 8 35p R 0 0 2p gt ALPHA b lt te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt 3 The figure caption will need to be added This will have 0 BL7 so it reads off the bottom of the first image lt amp tbu2 0 BL7 9 5 30p 2p gt FIG_CAP Hawaii s beaches and beautiful scenery are favorites amongst tourists lt amp te gt Altogether this will need to be brought together with a grouping that will read lt amp g 1 2 5 8 gt
68. argument could be made that the design would contain too many style sheets I have found that it is much easier to ignore a style sheet than to have to add it later I don t really feel that content that may not be used is a prob lem The only time I feel that it may cause issues if it is content that requires the user to add Autopage codes or Xtags picture or text box string informa tion If it is just part of the text flow it can be disregarded if not used Additional Features You can customize a system like this as intricate as your workflow dictates If you are an Autopage user you may want to include layout changes that are scripted in and other automated possibilities This database has features that are available by clicking on the buttons at the bottom right of the database Styles Page 2 Figure Selector Box Selector Export to File These buttons include the following l An additional page for styles which would include the end matter of the chapter such as the Summary Key Terms etc 2 A Figure Selector which allows the user a chance to pick the style that the figures will be imported This requires Xtags picture box and text box tagging 3 A Box Selector allowing the user the opportunity to decide between dif ferent boxes styles By clicking on the style wanted the selected boxes will import This also requires Xtags picture and text box tagging 4 The Export to File button takes all of your choices and exports it to an
69. art writing Autopage codes creating boxes style overrides and so on It is immeasurable the amount of time a translation table will save you from doing repetitive tasks Xtags_Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 33 p Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 33 The idea of the translation table is to take your complex strings and put them in one place while a small macro identifies the string in the input text file During the Xtags import process these macros take the information within the translation table and use the longer string Typists and coders do not want to have to type these long strings in each time they occur For example if using a program like Autopage you may have a layout change that occurs at every H1 head H1 LC 1 M 30p A 4 S 5 H Cyan The H1 Head Instead of coding this each time at the H1 this string of code can be put into a translation table with a small macro I will call this layout change LCA In my translation table the following will appear LCA LC 1 M 30p A 4 S 5 H Cyan L_Change A The translation table is broken down as lst field The name of the tag macro source 2nd field The string target 3rd field Comments optional Each of these fields become delimited by using a tab between each field It s extremely important to use tabs or formats if you want to align objects in the translation table Do not use hangs Command to align objects or the trans lation tab
70. can generate the same results J jailable resources This book has not covered every aspect of this program The image covers up the type above which is unacceptable Even with a runaround it still doesn t adjust the type above However by putting in the L option we get a different result entirely My main objective is to show the user how to get more out of the program by approaching the program in a different manner than the user might be used to It is best to work with the examples and see if you can generate the same results with the available resources S This book has not covered every aspect of this program By using the L option the leading is now set at 33 pt for that paragraph It finds the proper amount of leading to accommodate the image This would pose as a problem if the anchored image fell on a paragraph with multiple lines The entire paragraph would spread out to the 33 pt There are a lot of uses for this Anchoring MathType figures is one that instantly comes to mind Other uses could be for images that fall directly after the paragraph that may be centered in the text area rather than having to man ually place them Xtags_Ccho4 76 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 76 p Xtags Maximized Additional Height Options Similar to the relative placement seen earlier in this chapter Xtags offers some additional parameters in the height options that you can use in tricky place
71. decided to do a test to see how long it would take to import 50 pieces by hand with the captions and 50 using the Xtags including figuring out the codes and building the trans lation table Here are the results Manually 18 30 With Xtags full setup 4 24 Xtags import only 0 39 Xtags_Cho1 4 11 27 06 5 41 PM Page 4 F Xtags Maximized As you can clearly see the manual import took over 18 minutes and that was including duplicating the picture and text boxes and not even making sure all of the images were snapped appropriately to the x and y coordinates of the box Xtags not only snaps to the x and y coordinates but it shrinks to fit the images as well Think about a book with 1 000 images This would be close to 8 full hours done manually To import 1 000 images including the translation table setup would take around 20 minutes This proves how much more productive this process can be once you become effective at this Add that up over a year and see how much money has been thrown out the window Although there is quite a learning curve initially for Xtags I feel I will make the functions I do on a daily basis more understandable There is always more than one way to do something I m not here to tell you to totally change your current workflow but you may find that you will gain a higher level of productivity using the many features of Xtags Once you successfully import art with Xtags chances are you will never want
72. dingbat and the letter U we get the desired effect Using Boxes and Elements To code this through Xtags using the oval in a character style sheet the code would be H1 lt H1_Oval gt lt k 60 gt 1 lt p gt Using Boxes and Elements Don t be afraid to experiment with the dingbat fonts to get the effect before you start working with floating elements The next example will show some thing similar with bullets Example 5 Rectangle numbered bullets This is something I see many times in construction or plumbing books where multiple steps are numbered They usually have each step numbered but the designer gets creative and does something like this HEME This is the first entry This can be handled two different ways and both are equally effective The first possibility is that it could be a stretched Zapf Dingbat square with a Xtags_Ch02 30 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 30 F Xtags Maximized negative tracked number or it can be set in the rules format by using tabs on the number Let s first look at the stretched Zapf Dingbats This is probably the easiest way to approach this CEE 1 We ll need to bring in a square n Zapf Dingbats and this will need to be horizontal scaled at 190 with a baseline shift of 2 2 Next we ll bring in the number on the side of this For demonstration purposes lll shade this 40 so it s visible but normally this will be white The number will need to be tracke
73. do strange track ing that was needed as a manual override There is also a font issue that needs resolved In the first line of the ch_txl line it shows lt f NewBaskerville Italic gt Xtags Manual lt f Times lItalic gt lt f NewBaskerville Roman gt This happened because of a manual override where the Times Italic font is on a space and shouldn t even be in the paragraph The way I would try to delete this is by deleting it in that line and hoping it would catch more errors like that if they would occur Search for lt f NewB 2lle Italic gt 2 lt f Times lItalic gt 2 lt f NewB 2lle Roman gt Replaced with lt I gt 2 4 lt gt This will give you this result lt I gt Xtags Manual lt gt The figure legend was originally formatted as ch_fgcp lt BK gt Figure 9 1 lt BK gt lt f gt lt z7b0 5f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z9bOf Helvetica gt lt f gt lt i gt Leisure time for couples is spent more frequently using laptops It needs to be fgc lt fgn gt Figure 9 1 lt p gt lt f gt lt f gt Leisure time for couples is spent more frequently using laptops To achieve this a Grep search needs to happen as Search for ch_fgcp lt BK gt Figure d d lt BK gt lt f gt lt z7b0 5f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z9b0f Helvetica gt lt f gt lt i gt Replaced with fgc lt fgn gt 3 5 lt p gt 7 9 The secret here is in the parenthesis
74. exact location it did with the extra space applied I find it achieves this result about 75 of the time Xtags_ChoO7 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 170 170 Xtags Maximized The Underwater Environment Bottom compositions vary in the ocean A sandy bottom can _ be found nearly everywhere with coral in the upper depths T Some areas have an abundance of coral mounds or bottom coral growth Areas with more sand have lower visibility Nearly all coastal areas have an abundance of coral in the intertidal and surf zone areas Shallow sandy bottoms are home to many stingrays searching for shells There is a significant occurrence of coral outcroppings dispersed among the sandy areas Antarctica accounts for millions of square kilometers accounting for Sea Ice due to the subzero temperatures in that region Tides affect underwater visibility significantly Tides are normally predictable along major continental coastlines Shrimp crabs and other shelled sea life use their shell as a Sea Ice due to the subzero temperatures in that region protective shield from predators Tides affect underwater visibility significantly Tides are nor mally predictable along continental coastlines and within the The advantage to this method is that you will most likely have less adjusting to do on the following pages because the page should have fallen correctly or close to the desired result The only real disadvantage can be if the ref
75. expanded from the right of the art on horizontal captions or the bottom of the art on vertical captions 4th field This is the minimum inch width or depth depending on if horizontal or vertical the caption must be In this case I m putting in 1 inch Xtags_Ch0O4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 69 p Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 69 For this example I put a gray screen on the box to show the length of the cap tion against the image above it This is the proper placement for a relative horizontal caption placement lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 28p 48p4 n K W 100 100 K 0 c 56 GB Disk Art waterfall eps gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 10 5 28p R 0 1 3p p2 0 100 K 15 gt Label This is the proper placement for a relative horizontal caption placement lt amp te gt lt amp g 2 1 gt Indented Relative Placement There might be an example where you ll need the caption to be indented 1p from the left and then you ll need to have the right side pull in 1 pica The indented relative caption ae Xtags_Ccho4 70 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 70 Xtags Maximized In this instance the code would look like this lt amp tbu2 12 BL1 10 5 28p R 2p 1 The reason I need 2p in the 3rd field is that I ve already pulled the text over p12 BL1 when the caption started Vertical Relative Placement Vertical Relative Placement works great when you have a photo that needs the
76. for demonstration purposes h1 What is Second Party Software tx1 One of the prerequisites to be successful with this book is that you have used lt n gt lt kt gt Xtags lt p gt before preferably on an actual project Also I feel it s necessary that you have read through the lt I gt Xtags Manual lt gt by See Figure 9 1 tx This could be seen as Xtags mnkt Xtags mn A valuable QuarkXPress XTension that works with the code underneath that you cannot visibly see It works for both text and images fgc lt fgn gt Figure 9 1 lt p gt lt f gt lt f gt Leisure time for couples is spent more frequently using laptops The chapter now is taking the form of the new book While all these steps may make you think that you could have achieved this faster by just manu ally doing it you ll find that if you have 7 more chapters that need adjusting Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 151 Chapter 6 Custom Publishing 151 that the hard part is finished The paging part will be left You can also add Autopage codes to the text easily as well using Grep searches As seen below we see the original version of the chapter opening spread and the new ver sion of how it matches the original book Can Second Party Software be the Best vestement 141 Intro to Second Party Xtensions Second party Xtension have revolutionized QuarkXPress and may be a big Can Second Party Software be the sanitaire Best Investe
77. have a task needing accomplished the easiest way to learn this is reviewing someone else s AppleScript It is helpful to the learning process by how many sample scripts are posted online for you to borrow and use You can usually find what you are looking for or something close enough Once you have it you can amend it to fit your needs This book will show many AppleScripts and how to increase automation by using these examples Many of these functions are through BBEdit while others are specific to QuarkXPress My purpose for including them is that they are part of my current workflow I feel that it is important to script as much as possible Do not be afraid if what you have written is not the most proficient method I am frequently finding more effective methods but that is part of the growing process in any workflow Just do what you can to achieve the results You can always streamline your code later when your understanding develops Xtags_Cho1 10 11 27 06 5 41 PM Page 10 Xtags Maximized Final Note Before Starting Over the years I have been employed at different companies and I ve observed many people excel at different programs but you should not get discouraged if you do not gain an understanding as quickly as someone else Not everyone who sits down with a guitar becomes a virtuoso but I think if you follow along step by step and experiment with the examples I am show ing you you will be above where you expec
78. is to bring in the text box This is just standard text box handling with a slight pasteboard offset and a 2p4 y coordinate 2 Once the text depth is established we ll need to bring the first part of the art element relative to the depth of the text plus 2 points with the box posi tioning to the top left minus the x and y coordinates of the text box start lt pbu2 15 TL1 2p4 10p6 25p R 30 0 k n n 100 n m 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Chalkboard eps gt This imports this amount of the image with the text Here La perfect exam ple of a margin note lgpially Yuu would use a fort that books the handariting Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 122 F 122 Xtags Maximized 3 We ll then want the bottom of the box to close this off The way to do that is by having the end of the box in a 1p6 depth box that only contains the bottom of the element This will be offset by 42p3 5 and positioned to the bottom left of the top portion of the art lt amp pbu2 0 BL1 1 10p6 1p6 n n 100 n m 0 42p3 5 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 05 Chalkboard eps gt lt g 3 2 1 gt This string brings in this small piece of art to close off the bottom of the margin note ee 4 The entire tag put together will then reflect the following lt amp tbu2 15 B 28 8p 25p n n 100 n gt mn margin note text here lt te gt lt pbu2 15 TL1 28 10p6 25p R 30 0 k n Gn
79. ix Brief Introduction xi Introduction to Xtags Why Use Xtags 1 Increase Your Profitability 3 Misconceptions 4 Increase Your Value as a Pager 5 Step by Step Analysis 6 Create an Effective Coded Sample 7 How to Use This Book 8 Written for QuarkXPress 9 Knowledge of Scripting 9 Final Note Before Starting 10 Getting to Know Xtags Setting the Preferences 11 Don t Export Style Sheet Definitions 11 Omit Default Elements in Xtags List Tags 12 Output separate tags e g lt B gt lt I gt vs lt BI gt 13 Delimiters 13 Get Text and Save Text with Xtags 13 Get Text with Xtags 13 Importing with Autopage 15 iii ae Xtags_FM 11 27 06 5 38 PM Page iv iv Xtags Maximized Save Text with Xtags 15 Exporting with Autopage 15 AppleScript Get and Save Text 15 Copy and Paste Xtags 16 Copy Xtags Text 16 Paste Xtags Text 17 Style Sheet Tag Attributes 18 Character Information in the Style Sheet Definition 24 Creating Character Styles 26 Style Sheet Overrides 26 Paragraph Style Sheet Examples 27 Xtags Export Issue 31 Changing the Inset for Autopage 5 8 32 French Quotes vs Brackets 32 Translation Tables 32 Translation Table Start Tag 33 Start with a Template 34 Translation Table Codes 35 Translation Table Format 35 Translation Table Issue 36 Test the Codes Before the Translation Table 36 Master Pages 37 Troubleshooting Tips 38 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes Xtags Fields 41 Xtags Issues 42 Unanchored Picture Box Tags
80. lt gt searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false find lt z9 5c Red01 f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z11cKf NewBaskerville Roman gt searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false with selecting match grep substitution of 1 t set selection of window 1 to 1 try find lt z9 5c Red01 f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z11cKf NewBaskerville Roman gt t searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top false wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false with selecting match grep substitution of 2 t set selection of window 1 to 2 end try Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 145 F try end try try end try try end try end tell Chapter 6 Custom Publishing 145 find lt z9 5c Red01 f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z11cKf NewBaskerville Roman gt t searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top false wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false with selecting match grep substitution of 3 t
81. lt L gt lt h 4 gt lt kn1 gt lt kt0 gt lt ra0 gt lt rb0 gt lt d0 gt lt p 7 0 6 12 0 0 g U S English gt lt P gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z16 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Futura Bold gt 2 The duplicate H1 head will need to have 2 points leading with a baseline shift of 3 The color needs to be white The left indent is set at only p6 on the duplicate head This will give the slight offset ve highlighted those tags that need to be changed compared to the original H1 S H1 lt L gt lt h 4 gt lt kn0 gt lt kt0 gt lt ra0 gt lt rb0 gt lt d0 gt lt p 6 0 7 2 0 0 g U S English gt lt P gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z16 gt lt k0 gt lt b3 gt lt cW gt lt f Futura Bold gt 3 The two of them will now come together with a slight offset This is much quicker than setting it up as side art or adding a second box Use the power of the Xtags style sheets for creating faster workarounds like this End Result jH Head Example e Xtags_Ch02 28 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 28 F Xtags Maximized Example 2 Screen behind a box head MAKING A CHECKLIST Certain projects will need to vary from one to the next however it is important to come up with standards Look at a previous book and start there Here is a good example of a screen behind a box head When setting up the Xtags boxes lve observed people putting the screen as its own separate box
82. lt gQ 1 gt Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6239 PM Page 111 a Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 111 Working with Multi Column Text Boxes When working with two or three columns it s important to realize that the text will fill the first column then if there s any text remaining it will popu late the second column Xtags does not separate the columns into their own text boxes but uses the columns and gutter for multi columns Columns Gutter Width 1p6 The tag for two columns would be written as follows with the 2 for the number of columns and the 1p6 for the gutter width lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 26p 14p8 n Gn 100 2 1p6 gt Here s an example of how the text boxes would fill if there wasn t enough type to fill the 2 column text box With the onset of online shopping auction companies and the ease of use through wireless Internet home just to keep the business going strong Once established setting pri orities and hours are easier but still business ventures are growing to be where some of the big money lies Unlike the commercials that you see where it shows the entrepreneur sit ting by his pool sipping a mixed drink a home business does require a lot of extra time A normal 40 hour work week can easily become an endless 65 to 70 hours a week job require a lot of push It s very difficult to get a 2 column or 3 column layout where it will shrin
83. n n 100 n m 40 gt Macintosh HD Users Xtags Book 0700 psd gt lt g 3 2 1 gt By turning off several layers or altering the effects the border effect can look different each time you use it The text box opacity could also be changed in Quark to have a 75 opacity Changing the opacity of the text box is currently not an option with Xtags but I m very hopeful it will show up in a future update If altered to 75 it would give this appearance DN u LARI T D The purpose for working through these examples in the book is to get more familiar with the different aspects of the program It seems that many people work with software like this for years but fail to break new ground out of not having proper direction i i mM E In Closing While there are features I would like to see added to a future update of Xtags such as box line and picture opacity Quark blends applying the new Drop Shadow feature directly to imported images and change case I can get so much mileage on what is already available Workarounds for drop shadows and blends are shown in Chapter 4 Tm also working with the Xtags version for Adobe InDesign to see the dif ferences within the program As mentioned earlier if enough interest is out there I may write a book focusing on Xtags for InDesign I would like to see Copy Xtags Text and Save Text with Xtags added to the InDesign version These are invaluable for repurposing content and figu
84. only needing the first two This is acceptable If you needed to just change the leading it could be written as lt PC 18 gt All of the other non specified fields will take on the style sheets attributes Xtags_Ch0O2 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 27 Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 27 m Paragraph Style Sheet Examples Just in case the paragraph and character style definitions need a little more verification I thought I would spend the next couple of pages showing ex amples of how building these styles can save you production time Example 1 Drop Shadow on Head Let s say you wanted to have a drop shadow on a head that looks like this F Bi lt he ADG Typically most people would take the shadowed H1 Head Example and put the shadow in a different text box and try to align it by hand or by the x and y coordinates This requires additional work It could be handled this way but it will only make the design that much harder to deal with If using Autopage it would tend to be very difficult The following steps are much easier l Bring in the H1 head twice The type size on this example is 16 12 The indent is p7 Keep with Next will need to be selected for the top H1 head I shaded the bottom example for visibility only H1 Head Example The H1_Shade style is the first line that comes in since it will be the shadow Pay attention to the highlighted tags Here are the definitions H1_SHADE S H1_SHADE
85. or double digit in the second subpattern AR d This will find any number until reaching the closing MAR This finds any character between the AR and the closing Any of these would work in this situation however I find that the second example is generally the best for my needs Looking at the Operators Grep searches provide so many different ways of matching on content through the wildcards and characters It is important to learn what these operators are to make the experience one that can speed up the project s production time Let s look at a few ways to match on something Lets say we need to find the callouts for all tables in Chapter 10 such as Table 10 1 and change them to be tables for Chapter 9 such as Table 9 1 This is accomplished by look ing for finding the 9 We do not want to match on every 9 in the chapter There could be different scenarios where we have text like 9 miles to town or 394 or She is 19 years old The match needs to be more specific To match on a number there are several different options d Any single digit number d Any number infinitely 0 9 Any single digit number 0 9 Any number infinitely digit Any single digit number digit Any number infinitely w Any word character 0 9 a z A Z etc S Any non whitespace character except space tab etc This leaves us with a number of options I typ
86. outcroppings dispersed among the sandy areas r millions of square kilometers accounting for Sea Ice due to the in that region Tides affect underwater visibility significantly Tides are normally predictable along major continental coastlines Shrimp crabs and other shelled sea life ugeahpiestiel a the subzero temperatures in that region Tides affect underwater a protective shield from predators visibility significantly Tides are normally predictable along continental coastlines and This can be inserted in the input ASCII file two different ways a Itcan be added as a macro by the markup department with something simple like an sp that is part of the translation table The ASCII markup will be added as AR P sp The translation table will contain Isp lt p 48 gt b It could also be added using MacPerl or through an AppleScript For MacPerl this would be entered s IMAR P d 1 1 2 3 M sp g or I could add the code in MacPerl itself and avoid the translation table altogether by coding sp lt p 48 gt 5 s IMAR P d 1 D 1 2 3 sp g Once the runaround is applied the text will probably move forward 4 lines Since the extra space has been added after the referenced para graph manually go into the paragraph and remove the extra space Your page should break the same as it did prior to the runaround being applied In this case the second paragraph ends in the
87. plots are constantly showing up everywhere with almost illegal stealing from other movies Hollywood thinks people forget the plots of yesterday Such is the case with 13 Going on 30 which did well at the box office but does this seem almost the same as Big starring Tom Hanks If Big hadn t been a great movie then it may be okay to use the same basic plot but substituting a female in the lead actresses like Catherine Mary Stewart and Cheryl Pollak rarely get starring roles because the MTV crowd would rather see Mandy Moore star in a movie because her recent video is on the 1 position on MTVs top 10 countdown The code that makes up this box is reasonably simple with only some relative placement to deal with The only real new thing here is the 2 columns and the gutter Here is the full code lt amp pbu2 0 0 27p8 24 2 n n 100 K 60 m J gt lt tbu2 10 5 26p 7p9 n n 100 n gt TTL Title and subtitle lt te gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 1p 26p 25p p 5 n n 100 n 2 1p3 gt All of the 2 column box text here lt te gt lt pbu2 10 TL1 30 27p8 40p R 26 0 k n n 100 K 10 m gt lt g 1 2 3 4 gt The translation table would be a little more complicated here because we would need to break the text after the subtitle and start the two column text The coded file would read TTL b1 Title Subtl Subtitle b2 boxtxt b3 AIl of the 2 column box text b4
88. represents the Size of the type Kerning lt k0 gt This is the Kerning of the type The only problem I ve found with setting this in the style sheet definition is that there is nowhere to control it in the style sheet If necessary use it The tracking can work similar if you play with it and find the proper look The range is from 500 through 500 Baseline Shift lt b0 gt This is used for baseline shifting It can be positive or negative The range depends on the size of the type Color lt cK gt To add a custom color into an Xtags string it is critical to have the color already created in the QuarkXPress document template If the color is not included Xtags will substitute the defined normal style color for the missing color however it will not add it to the color def initions If the Report Errors is clicked it will generate this error Xtags error No such color tag c Xtags_Ch02 26 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 26 p Xtags Maximized Coloring type with Xtags is as simple as having the color defined in the document and then typing the following tags lt c Color A gt words needing colored lt cK gt The lt cK gt returns the type to black Font Definition lt f Font gt This is where the font definition goes It is very important to have this defined correctly or the font will default to the font used in the Normal style sheet For example if the style sheet needed lt f Bembo Bold
89. run against the text file it will pull the entire box from its current position in the text and move it to the line following the para graph Here is the result lt para gt This used to be the case years ago when the big screen lt para gt lt box number 03 gt lt title gt Internet Home Businesses lt title gt lt para gt With the onset of online shopping lt para gt lt box gt lt para gt This is another paragraph of text lt para gt Xtags_Ch08 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 192 p 192 Xtags Maximized This treatment will work for tables figures side elements or any floating objects that you need a marker for I realize it takes time to go through and mark these initially but it is much easier when running the scripts to just let them do their magic instead of cutting and pasting by hand This is where the time savings will come in Hyperlinks Quark 6 5 and higher makes great use of hyperlinks If used correctly in the paging file this will save time later I would insist on the URLs being either treated with a character style such as lt URL gt web address lt p gt or using the style hyperlink option If using a character style the process is similar to what has been shown in this chapter If using a hyperlink Xtags will export this as lt A 3 HYPB 002 000 000 000 2 gt www highvolumepress com lt A 3 HYP 034 000 001 1 gt This can be repurposed by writing a script that finds th
90. seem convoluted but it will save time It may seem very complex to get someone to code these properly If explained the coding department should have no problem If using a translator you can code this in Using MacPerl can make this come together very easily Writing an AppleScript can also be achieved to get this result Regardless of which method is used it s critical that the coder types the ANNO term right before the term or word it is going to be placed above once paginated This makes all the difference when using this method Any devia tion will cause errors 7 8 The Side Element Placement parameter will use Art 3 and will need to be set up with 6 pts in the Side Element Offset from Margin and Baseline for the vertical alignment Baseline Since the side art will always need to be left in the Horizontal Alignment place the Side Art 3 text alignment as Left This can also be accom plished by putting a lt L gt in the Xtags Xtags_ChO7 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 162 162 Xtags Maximized E Rotated Tables Rotated tables are one of the easiest items to work with in Autopage but these require being set ahead of running the AutoTag conversion or with Xtags Autopage only reads unrotated tags so its very important that the tag be unrotated although the remainder of the table can be set at any angle Add Tag Here DAKNnDANN DAAKRNMDA NN SG WD PS Ney Ke WS CONOR O O
91. text box with the New Technology title will need 90 for the degrees in the rotation field 5 You may have to play a little with the x and y coordinates to get this to position where you want it lt tbu2 24 5 B 10p 10p9 27 90 n n 100 555555 gt The last step is getting the boxes and lines to fall in their proper posi tioning The lines are important to make sure they intersect properly It is also important to note that you can use 4 to bring in the dotted line or the All Dots definition that needs to be within quotations Also in the color make sure that the Wn is on so the dotted rule doesn t pick up the gap color as white also This will give the appearance of a straight line if this isn t specified lt amp lbu 7p B 1p2 0 306 or 2 W n 4 gt lt amp lbu 7p B 1p2 90 49 or 2 W n All Dots gt The complete code is as follows lt amp tbu2 9p B 5p4 23p6 35p n n 100 K 15 9 9 9 7 gt Text box material lt te gt lt pbu2 4p TL1 5p4 27p6 35p R 5p4 0 kn n 100 n 0 m 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 05 ch05_009 eps gt lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 9p B 2p9 19p6 2p2 p 5 n n 100 N 555599 gt Litle lt te gt lt tbu2 24 5 B 10p 10p9 27 90 n n 100 N 55555 2 gt New Technology lt amp te gt lt amp lbu 7p B 1p2 0 306 or 2 W n 4 gt lt lbu 7p B 1p2 90 49 or 2 Wyn All Dots
92. think some pagers miss the connection that if they use Xtags to gain productivity that they should also look at Autopage to gain even more efficiencies Here is an example with decorative circles around the figure for this type of placement as well as an Autopage tag within To achieve this follow these steps l Start out by getting the code for the main image Either write the string or do an Edit Copy Xtags Text At first you ll only receive the string for the image which after adjustments will be something like lt pbu2 2p9 3p3 30p 30p n n 100 K 0 m 56 GB Disk Book Photos flowers3 tif gt The relative placement needs to be both the width and the height There fore you ll need to start top left of the picture box with the text box over the photo I use the relative maximum column width 30p4 R 0 1 and maximum depth 50p4 R 0p 1 This code will need to include the lt amp te gt to close off the text box lt amp tbu2 0p TL1 0 30p4 R 0 1 60p4 R 0p 1 n G wn gt FIG SR A C O lt amp te gt The circles are a little more of a challenge because of their positioning Xtags has the ability to include corner radius by using parentheses in the frame width field separated by a comma In this case the frame width is 1 point followed by a comma then place two times the amount of the ae Xtags_Ccho4 72 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 72 p Xtags Maximized needed corn
93. this Search for V NL1 A t 1 C ADC 9 Ar Replaced with lt numberList gt 6 lt listltem gt 5 lt listltem gt 6 End result of all three examples lt numberList gt lt listltem gt lt italic gt height lt italic gt This is the depth height of the text box By typing in the maximum depth of the art can be and adding a question mark the box will lt keyterm gt shrink to fit lt keyterm gt to the depth of the art lt listItem gt Each additional list item would just be lt listItem gt text lt listItem gt It is very important that the pager uses a style like NL2 for the closing line of the numbered list or errors will occur during the XML validation because it can not locate the ending numbered list code If the document was handled cor rectly to start with the search and replacement would be Search for V NL2 t d t 2 r Replaced with lt listltem gt 5 lt listltem gt 6 lt numberList gt Keep in mind that whatever tag starts in XML must always close If you have a starting lt numberlist gt you need to close it with a lt numberlist gt The same works with HTML and actually makes the entire process fairly easy to keep track of You could also be tricky in your searches and use the power of Grep to find any list items that were incorrectly handled throughout the process I find this to be a good method of error checking There are many times when Xtags_Ch0s8
94. want to paste this object or text string Go to Edit Paste Xtags Text 6 See 3 This will display the text to see if any adjustments need to be made 4 You can also Copy and Paste Xtags Text the entire text file instead of using Get Text with Xtags if you so desire My goal here was to get you familiar with these concepts since they will be mentioned in more detail later throughout other chapters Style Sheet Tag Attributes One of the features that I work with in great detail is the Paragraph and Char acter Style Sheet Tag Attributes Many users I know don t pay enough atten tion to these but a whole new world can open up if you take these and find quicker ways to improve your current workflow One of the most incredible features of Xtags is in its ability to define a style sheet before its defined in QuarkXPress The style sheet definition ap pears as follows h3 S h3 lt L gt lt h P3 gt lt kn0 gt lt kt 2 2 gt lt ra 1 Solid K 60 0 0 9 gt lt rb0 gt lt d0 gt lt p 0 0 0 14 0 0 g U S English gt lt t 18 0 1 gt lt P gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z12 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Bembo Bold gt This is the way a style sheet is created from scratch If you were to copy the text above and then select Paste Xtags Text into a new document this style sheet would be defined above Two parts of this would not work properly if you didn t have these figured out ahead of time 1
95. waterways cut through the city The method to get this effect is as follows 1 The text box with the caption is standard with the image falling to the top right of the caption 2 The shadowed box will need to be the exact width and depth of the image with a 4 rotation This also needs to be sent to back lt amp pbu2 0 TL1 0 25p R 0 0 40p R 0 0 4 k 3 The full code will be lt amp tbu2 10 B 10 82 61 379 n 1 100 555599 gt fgn Caption lt te gt lt amp pbu2 12 TR1 0 25p 40p n n 100 1 5 5 56 GB Disk Xtags Chapter 04 fg04_016 eps gt lt pbu2 0 TL1 0 25p R 0 0 40p R 0 0 4 k n n 100 K 85 m gt lt g 3 2 1 gt Shadow on Images Shrinking to Fit Both Dimensions Here is a very advanced approach but it is something I figured out and I really think it can be a time saver There are several shadow creating XTensions on the market that will create an image to the size of your image then saves the shadow out as a Photoshop file This can sometimes be a timely process especially if you are working on a marketing book with 40 to 50 images What if you could have the shadow that would appear on every image without having to do the manual work after the import I have discovered a way to do this The main question is if you can work with shadows with a dif ferent aspect ratio For example would it be acceptable for the x to be 55 and the y to be 67 This is ver
96. will default to Black K ll frame shade If the frame needs a shade the percentage of the frame 80 is placed here as 80 for example An optional param eter is available for shade similar to the Frame Color This is where the Frame Gap is in the next field to be used with frames such as Thin Thick Thin that can have an additional highlighted color Xtags_Ch03 46 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 46 p Xtags Maximized Here s an example of this being used where the Frame is 80 and the Frame Gap is 50 80 50 12 frame style If needing a different rule than the standard solid rule 13 14 you can apply any of the others by typing in the name from the frame pull down menu If you need the dotted rule type in a All Dots The list below shows a portion of the frame names eececeseses Al Dots wees somes Dash Dot Dotted m m m m Dotted 2 S m S0 Double x T hjck Thin bg color This is the background color hue of the box It will default to white but if you want a none background type in n If color type in the color such as Cyan1 or 50M70Y Be sure that the color is defined in the Quark document before trying to bring in a box with an undefined color If Report errors is checked this error will occur Xtags error No such color tag amp pbu2 param 10 If Report errors is not checked the import will not produce the picture or te
97. with Xtags open the Quark file place the cursor in a story and go to Edit Save Text with Xtags All anchored text and picture elements of that story will save out with Xtags strings as well Any floating elements will not export which can pose a problem This is where the Batch Export with Autopage is very useful Exporting with Autopage If you are a user of Autopage you can go to the Paginate window and through the 11 and 12 options all of the text and floating element in all stories will export This is a big savings of time and enhances the Xtags experience Mi 12 Export with Xtags ps O lt gt Of Oo 1 v Convert Tags _ Delete Tags Del Numbers _ Ignore Missing Link M Captions M Notes C All M Layouts C XML M Tag Unlinked Art C Convert _ Link l Embed Notes ist ID 1 v Use Styles This also works in Autopage when using Batch Export where you can export the text of all chapters in a folder This is the preferred method when using this feature If using an XML workflow with an XTension like XMLxt you an actually get the art to fall in the location where it was called out AppleScript Get and Save Text Tm a major user of AppleScript with Xtags and it s a fairly easy process to get working with I m not one to waste production time while searching for files If I know their location I will have an AppleScript built and just change the chapter number Xtags_Ch02 16 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page
98. would be found later You would then run into issues I know this Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 146 p 146 Xtags Maximized particular book only has up to five bullets per chapter so this keeps it from going beyond the fifth bullet if one exist elsewhere After running the AppleScript against this text the text file will now be converted to the following cn 9 ct Can Second Party Software be the Best Investment objt Chapter Objectives obj_tx After studying this chapter you will be able to obj 1 Understand the relationship between lt l gt computer software lt gt and how it impacts our daily lives from commuting to leisure time The differences between software and hardware 3 How the Internet and other forms of communication such as Instant Messaging has changed the way we communicate internally within businesses 4 Describe some methods companies can use to strengthen their business using the Internet and email 5 Appreciate the important ways in which we look for new ways to take software to quicken tasks by using scripts and other automation methods N I also made a change on the opening image by importing it already rotated with the fit to width additional parameter in the 3 field The sizing will be completed for me with the proper size reduction Here are the changes lt amp pbu2 0 0 31p9 f 26p2 5 n K n 100 100 Solid W 100 0 m 1 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images chO9_image1
99. yoo 555 gt lt amp pbu2 1p4 TL2 2p 32p R 2p8 0 8 n n 100 K 15 m 5 gt lt pbu2 1p4 TR3 2p 8 8 n n 100 K 80 m 533 gt lt pbu2 2p TL4 1p4 8 30p R 2p6 5 0 n n 100 K 30 M 5555 gt lt pbu2 2p BL5 1p2 5 8 8 n n 100 K 80 M 55 gt lt pbu2 1p4 BL6 1p2 5 32p R 2p8 0 8 n n 100 K 15 M 555 gt lt pbu2 1p4 BR7 1p2 5 8 8 n n 100 K 80 M 555 5 gt lt pbu2 1p4 TR8 1p4 8 30p R 2p6 5 0 n Gn 100 K 30 m J gt lt g 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 gt 8 The coded file for this will be very simple using only two tags b1 Box text b2 9 The relative placement for each box was necessary so if we change the text width from 14p to 23p the other boxes will not have to be adjusted throughout This is the box importing with a 23p text width Internet Home Businesses With the onset of online shopping auction companies and the ease of use through wireless Internet home business ventures are growing to be where some of the big money lies Unlike the commercials where it shows the entrepreneur sitting by his pool sipping a mixed drink a home business does require a lot of extra time Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 137 Yr blishin J CHAPTER In the changing college textbook environment custom publishing has become a big market Authors are now letting professors pick and choose wh
100. your machine Start with a Template I feel that it is always a good idea to have a translation table template some where on your server that you would use at the beginning of any project It is best to use this as a shell You may even have a couple figure options in it Xtags_Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 35 p Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 35 I find that this speeds up the process and keeps you from having repeated steps and errors The best start is to have a figure caption and the grouping code in Here is an example of where I would normally start a translation table with bookname ttl art1 lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 35p 55p n n 100 K 0 m 56 GB Disk Xtags Book art2 gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 2 35p 5p3 0 n 1 00 N 0 2117 gt art3 lt amp te gt lt amp 9 1 2 gt The highlighted areas are where you would have to adjust in most cases Even though we haven t covered the picture and text box tags I will at least touch on this quickly You would want the maximum width and depth of the art to change The main changes will be the spacing between the art and caption and the path to the book As you can see the path to the art is not complete This is where I d have a database like FileMaker Pro add the images or have an AppleScript do this There are many ways to accomplish this including having a markup depart ment just type it in I find it the best to use scrip
101. 1 The element is comprised of five different picture boxes The line tags could be used for this as well This needs to be broken down by starting with the outside 15 screened horizontal and vertical boxes These are 5p in length and 5 points in width The inside lines are 3p6 in length and 5 points width The small square box in the upper left corner is 5 points length and width 2 The text box needs to have the Send to Back flag and begins at an x and y coordinate where the outer rule splits the outside design boxes This is done by using a 1 5 x and 1 5 y offset 3 The x and y coordinates need to be precise because you do not want any white space between the design element lines Pay attention at how each of the first five boxes position on the x and y of either 0 5 or 10 points Here is an example of the strings put together lt amp pbu2 0 0 60 5 n n 100 K 15 m gt lt pbu2 10 5 42 5 yoo 100 K 25 m gt lt pbu2 5 10 5 42 n n 100 K 25 M 55555 55 gt lt pbu2 0 0 5 60 n n 100 K 15 m gt lt amp pbu2 5 5 5 5 n 100 K 50 m J gt lt tbu2 1 5 1 5 24p 30p k n 2 n 20 100 n 14 12 8 9 gt All box text here lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt 4 The markup using a translation table will be broken down to 2 tags t1 The box text goes here t2 Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6239 PM Page 13
102. 1 point from the width and depth of the image but have the offset x and offset y be 5 as shown below lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 30p p1 40p pl 0 5 n 100 1 1 1 m 1 1 56 GB Disk Xtags Images Chapter 06 fg06_010 eps gt Adding additional space to an unanchored box can be necessary if you don t want to use the insets and have a First Baseline instead At the bottom you ll do a shrink to fit but will need to add extra space so there is a proper inset all around the text The code would look like this lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 30p 40p p4 5 This will add that extra spacing that is necessary It is good to play with this feature to see what the best workflow will be Relative Caption Placement Relative placement is one of the defining options in Xtags picture and caption placement that gives the program greater control over the art Relative place ment will shrink to fit the caption to the width of the art for a horizontal photo For a vertical photo it has the capability to shrink to fit the caption s depth to the depth of the photo This is invaluable because it reduces the need to manually have to adjust the art The coding for this is as follows 30p R 0 1 This means lst field The caption will shrink to fit starting at 30p or whatever value you place here and shrink down to any art Op1 to 30p 2nd field R for Relative placement 3rd field This is the amount the caption can be reduced or
103. 100 100 Solid K M 96 GB Disk Xtags blend tif gt lt g 1 2 3 gt If the caption is needed on the opposite side of the image remember to rotate the image blend tif 180 in the fifth field You also need 13p TL1 for the caption start to account for the lp space between the image and the caption The full code will be lt amp pbu2 14p B 0 34p 26p n n 100 Solid K 0 m 56 GB Disk Xtags fg04_015 eps gt lt tbu2 13p TL1 0 12p 15p p3 n n 100 n 0 14 gt FIG lt FIGN gt Figure 2 lt p gt lt f gt Caption lt amp te gt lt pbu2 0p TL1 0 12p 20p R 0 25 180 k n K n 100 Solid K m 56 GB Disk Xtags blend tif gt lt amp g 1 2 3 gt Xtags_Ch04 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 88 p 88 Xtags Maximized 6 The image and caption would appear as seen below Figure 2 This is the caption with the upper right blend behind it that will need to shrink to fit with the blend Even if it goes to more lines 7 When using a translation table the markup department will code the text like this FIG f1 Chapter 04 fg04_015 eps f2 Figure caption f3 If needing both a verso and recto version you could have a script duplicate each figure By having the verso and recto translation table definitions the verso figure could be coded as FIG f4 Chapter 04 fg04_015 eps f5 Figure caption f6 Adding a Number on the Figure This is seen
104. 194 C O Caption Option 71 72 Exporting 15 Handling After Import 172 Horizontal Alignment 54 160 161 163 167 168 Importing 15 I T Option 167 Left and Right Art Placement Option 163 Left and Right Table Placement 164 Oversized Two Column Inline Art 172 Paginate Window 158 159 Quality Control 6 Reference Options 205 Rotated Tables 162 Short Line Elimination 7 Side Art Using Reference 160 Side Element Placement 161 T E Code 67 101 115 166 Text Wraps Runaround 168 X O Option 167 Background Color 46 Background Shade 46 Baseline Minimum 51 Baseline Shift 25 BBEdit 17 18 31 138 140 142 144 175 Find and Replace 175 180 182 Grep 20 22 31 138 140 142 144 148 154 175 178 180 182 185 190 193 197 211 Operators 139 Search Results 38 51 Subpatterns 138 Bottom Caption 54 225 ae Xtags_Index 11 27 06 6 50 PM Page 226 226 Xtags Maximized Boxangle 43 133 Box Name 50 Boxskew 43 133 Box with 3 Separate Parts 131 Bringing in Multi Piece Figures Together 80 Caption Positioning 51 Caption Top Source Line Bottom 85 Changing the Inset for Autopage 5 8 32 Character Information in the Style Sheet Definition 24 Character Styles 2 7 25 26 Coded File 118 Collect For Output 39 Color 20 22 25 26 42 65 Combining Elements 109 Complex Box with Seven Xtags Strings 117 Complicated Boxes Art 115 Multiple Elements 128 Box with Rota
105. 2 here If you need 12 around all sides but the bottom needs 9 pts put in 12 12 9 12 The settings are top left bottom right baseline offset If an 18 points drop is needed for the text type in 18 in this field This affects the First Baseline in the Modify window First Baseline Minimum Ascent hy Offset 0p14 Xtags_Cch03 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 51 p Chapter 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes 51 20 baseline min I rarely have a need to change this This is where you direct Xtags to the amount of the First Baseline Ideally this is set on Ascent which is a blank field but if you need one of the others your options are below a Cap Ascent c Cap Height 21 vert align Used if you need a different alignment other than top aligned which is the default The options are b for bottom aligned j for vertically justified and c for vertically centered 22 interparagraph max This is only needed if you use vertical justifi cation in field 21 I typically have not needed to use this because the leading and spacing is specified in my workflow Be sure to always end any text box with the closing lt amp te gt or the text box will continue to pick up unnecessary content and either make Quark close down or will generate errors This is probably one of the errors that most coders consistently make I wrote an AppleScript that would look through an lt amp tbu2 code
106. 3 tables Et1 t2 lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 28p 48p4 0 0 n 0 K W 100 100 Solid K 0 c 100 100 0 0 0 0 1 gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 10 5 28p 6p6 0 0 n 0 K W 100 100 Solid n 0 0 1 0 0 0 t 0 gt lt amp te gt lt amp g 2 1 gt lt amp tbu2 0 0 30p 45p 0 0 n 0 K W 100 100 Solid W 0 0 1 0 0 0 a t 0 gt lt amp te gt figures w a left upper caption f4 f5 f71 f8 lt amp pbu2 14p B 0 30p 46p4 0 0 n 0 K W 100 100 Solid K 0 m 100 100 0 0 0 0 gt lt amp tbu2 13p TL1 0 12p 6p6 0 0 n 0 K W 100 100 Solid n 0 0 1 0 0 0 t 0 gt lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 34p 48p4 0 0 n 0 K W 100 100 Solid K 0 c 100 100 0 0 0 0 gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 10 5 34p 6p6 0 0 n 0 K W 100 100 Solid n 0 0 1 0 0 0 t 0 gt starting tag s I lt lt gt s2 gt ending tag fel lt lt gt e2 gt ending tag il lt lt gt i2 gt layout change LCA LC 1 M 30p A 4 S 5 H Cyan Layout Change A with this file For archiving it s much easier to have all the items together Keeping it in the same folder as the template is similar to OS X putting every thing in your user folder The translation table can also be saved in the Xtags Preferences within the Library of the System as well but this requires a longer string to find the pa rameters and it s limited to
107. 43 Unanchored Text Box Tags 50 Xtags Caption Positioning 51 Side Caption Top Left 52 Side Caption Top Right 52 Top Caption 53 Bottom Caption 54 Side Caption Bottom Left 54 Side Caption Bottom Right 55 Grouping 56 Anchored Picture and Text Boxes 56 Anchored Picture Boxes 56 Anchored Text Boxes 57 Xtags_FM 11 27 06 5 38 PM Page v F Contents v Anchored Picture Box Examples 57 Anchored Text Fxamples 58 Don t Exceed the Page Size of Document 61 Importing on the Pasteboard 61 Unanchored Lines 61 Unanchored Line Example 64 Anchored Lines 65 Anchored Line Example 1 65 4 Image and Caption Building Shrink to Fit Capabilities 67 Relative Caption Placement 68 Indented Relative Placement 69 Vertical Relative Placement 70 Vertical and Horizontal Mixed Relative Placement 70 Fit to Height Fit to Width 73 Forced Anchored Leading 75 Additional Height Options 76 Working with Figures 76 Space Between Rule and Figure 76 Rule Around Picture and Caption 77 Labels Below Art Alphas 79 Bringing in Multi Piece Figures Together 80 Complicated Figure Caption Usage 82 Side Element with 5 Grouped Boxes 82 Relative Double Border 84 Caption Top Source Line Bottom 85 Working with Blends in Captions 86 Adding a Number on the Figure 88 Rotated Solid Shadow on Image 89 Shadow on Images Shrinking to Fit Both Dimensions 90 Screened Caption Under Image 93 Screened Caption Below Image 94 Fit to Height and Fit to Width Multi Piece Example
108. 5 Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 135 Using all the Placements in One Element Wh en first looking at the box below it may not seem all that complicated but I assure you that if you build this properly you will get to use BLI BR1 TLL TRI and relative placement on each side This is a great test to see if you can figure it all out Internet Home Businesses With the onset of online shopping auc tion companies and the ease of use through wireless Internet home busi ness ventures are growing to be where some of the big money lies Unlike the commercials where it shows the entre preneur sitting by his pool sipping a mixed drink a home business does require a lot of extra time This box requires a lot of planning to be correct Here are the steps 1 The text area will start on the coordinates of 2p x and 2p y This makes figuring out the positioning of the other boxes much easier The next box I will concentrate on will be the top left 8 point square This will be 2p TL1 x and 2p y The 15 box to the right will be handled with relative placement to the text box Since we know the width of the text it would seem more obvious to just make this a standard size but we are going to pretend that the text width is flexible where it can be marginal or in the text area That makes this easier to keep this adjustable The text area has a maximum width of 32p so the relative placement width will be 28p R 2p8 0 wi
109. 52p 3 The full tag will be lt amp o0 4p9 14p7 gt lt amp pbu2 0 0 40p 52p n 1 n 100 m 56 GB Disk Xtags Images Chapter 05 ch05_001 eps gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 9 40p 7p n n 100 n gt fgc Caption lt te gt lt amp g 2 1 gt Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 99 p Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 99 3 As long as the art tags are called out on this page the image will place in that exact location with each chapter This example proves that the Origin Tags can be used to save from doing man ual tasks If you can think of something that you know needs to be on a cer tain page in a certain position this will make that task easier to accomplish Pre paging with Origin Tags The Origin Tags can serve another purpose that I find very useful when first importing the text and images For Xtags users who do not currently use Autopage the Origin Tags can serve as a way to place the images throughout the document where they are referenced This can be accomplished by just specifying the first image s x and y Origin Tag and having the coder type the Xtags string at the reference point The remaining Origin Tags would need to be set at 0 x 0 y Here s an example of how the translation table would need to be set Notice the runarounds on the f1 f2 and t1 tags lol lt amp o0 5p3 5p6 gt o2 lt amp 0 0 0 gt f1 lt pbu2 0 0 31p6 F 35p
110. 6 w by 2p6 h to follow along with this exercise normally it can be any size It s criti cal to know the necessary white space above and below the equation For this example I will need 6 points of white space above and below the equation Go to Item Modify in the Quark pull down menus In the Align with Text section select Baseline and put the Offset to p3 Align with Text O Ascent Baseline Offset p3 There s generally around 3 points of white space padded in a buildup MathType equation so this will make sure my base to base space stays in the proper range I always let my equations flex at least a point so you ll still be within the specs Set your space above in the Paragraph Attributes of the Formats to 6 points Do not use a hard return above and below the equation Next cen ter the equation making sure there are no indents Set your leading to auto This is the only time I would suggest auto Your format window should be set as follows Update your equation spec to reflect these settings in the Paragraph At tributes I have refrained from using an Autopage H amp J in this because I feel there will be enough flexibility with the varying sizes of the equa tions If you do use one use it sparingly for variability or the pages could look unbalanced Select the equation and change the Runaround values to 0 Because this is anchored you ll have to have at least this value
111. AR 1 X O whichever you prefer My best advice if using the parameters for the outside placement is to use V 2 so other art will not be affected by the outside placement I suggest setting the placement to I T float top for all these pieces when first coded This forces the art to sit at the top of the page so the bar can snap in place without having to position with the x and y coordinates The ideal coding structure for these pieces will be AR 1 I T X O After pagination group the art and caption with the bar Here s the same image with the bar included Construction is a constant process with year round employment This process achieves the results without working with the palette Don t group the bar rule with the figure until paging is finished Once the bar is part of the images the captions will no longer go to the out side during pagination This method reserves space for this function ae Xtags_ChoO7 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 168 p 168 Xtags Maximized E Text Wraps Runarounds in Autopage Text wraps are heavily implemented in complicated designs Its something that can give a title more content while conserving space There are a couple of ways to handle wrapping images using Autopage At this time Autopage doesn t support wraps however it s a critical function of paging so working around it is in your best interest There are plans for this in the near future Ive heard pagers declare this b
112. Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 21 Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 21 this deselected the pages will sometimes have some very unfavorable results There will be times when a single line will sit on at the bottom of the page af ter a head This is not acceptable for the majority of textbooks I make it a habit to have the Start 2 End 2 selected Here are the different options lt kt0 gt Keep Lines Together deselected lt kt 2 2 gt Start 2 End 2 Selected lt kt A gt All Lines in Paragraph The All Lines in Paragraph together is something I normally don t get in the habit of doing because it can give unpredictable results where big blocks of text end up together It works well if you have a small box of a few lines that you do not want breaking across pages For this option I try to stick to float ing elements or heads with multiple lines Rule Above and Below lt ra 0 5 Solid K 100 0 0 11 gt The Rule Above and Rule Below has a lot of possibilities in one tag The Rule Above is ra a Rule Below is rb If not defining a rule above or below a sim ple lt ra0 gt and lt rb0 gt tag is inserted Rules added to override defined style sheet settings are necessary when paging The structure for the rule tag is bro ken down as follows thickness style color shade left indent right indent offset Most of these are self explanatory by looking at the Rules Paragraph Attrib utes window in QuarkXPr
113. Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 133 Unique Box Treatment Using Skew and Angle With some inventiveness a person can really do some surprising things with Xtags and try to go beyond the normal limitations Here s an example of a box that most pagers would look at and most likely make a two part piece of art Kids play too many video games and watch too much television They don t know what it s like to just be bored anymore william R Mckinley Some would think this would have to be a two part Xtags picture box using an Illustrator file where the top half would accommodate the longest quote and the bottom will import with relative placement based on the length and close it off similar to the Side Margin Box Expandable example That will work but surprisingly this can be built in Quark without the assistance of art programs To do this l1 The text box will be a standard shaded text box with rounded corners and a First Baseline of 2p Additional depth will need to be added to the shrink to fit on field 4 2 The bottom triangular shaped box is a combination of two fields the boxangle 5 field and the boxskew 6 field but also with the Send to Back flag Combining the two creates the following shape The code for this rotated and skewed box is lt amp pbu2 47 BL1 28 8p 2p6 31 24 k n n 100 K 15 m gt 3 Upon the shrink to fit this will need to position exact to give this im
114. E gt gt E gt gt gt E gt gt E gt gt E How the coded sample and the translation table need to be set is shown be low To have this become second nature my suggestion is to practice creating functional boxes whenever time allows Coded File hw1 hw2 hw3 hw4 BOX_STTL Hollywood Clich s BOX_TTL The Hollywood Wheel PP lt PP_TTL gt Problem Point 1 lt p gt lt i gt Creative movies are BOX_COL Identifying the Problems and Creating a Solution hw5 i ll a al bea Translation Table hw1 lt amp tbu2 0 0 14p 1p4 n S82 8 gt hw2 lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 13p11 5 0 28p6 5 1p4 k n 520 11 5 gt hw3 lt amp pbu2 13p11 5 1p2 28p6 25 p2 n S82 555555 gt lt amp tbu2 Op 3p2 8 42p6 56p 7 k n S10 18 8 gt lt amp te gt hw4 lt amp te gt lt amp pbu2 0p BLL1 p 5 42p6 p2 0 S82 gt lt amp pbu2 8 BR1 8 p8 p8 n 1 S82 m gt lt tbu2Op 2p 42p6 1p5 n 1 S82 K 0 1 1 gt hw5 lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 gt Xtags_ChO5 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 119 F Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 119 Complicated Box with Rotated Text Rotated text is something we really haven t touched on much yet but is eas ier than most of the other concepts in this box The other issues in this box have been dealt with in previous examples That doesn t mean that th
115. It s clear to me that everyone uses the program differently If I have my style sheets set up ahead of time I wouldn t want the style sheet information 11 ae Xtags_Ch02 12 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 12 F Xtags Maximized to export when I do a Copy Xtags Text Paste combination I make sure I check the Dont export style sheet definitions in the preferences When this is checked during the Copy Xtags Text the code appears as lt amp 0 0 0 gt lt amp pbu2 0 0 198 39 0 0 n 0 K n 100 100 Solid n 100 0 m 100 100 0 0 0 0 56 GB Disk AP_6 0 AP_Book Art ch03_009 eps gt If this is unchecked the code will contain extra style sheet information that isn t pertinent to the tag unless you have some local style information that you want to use or if the style is undefined Before putting this in the translation table you will have to delete the un needed information so it s a good practice to leave this checked unless you have a system that formats your style sheets I will talk more about this later in the chapter Here is the same Xtags information with Don t export style sheet definitions unchecked Normal lt Ps100t0h100z12kO0b0cKf Helvetica gt DT S DT lt J h Standard kn0 kt 2 2 ra0 rb0 d0 p 24 0 24 12 5 12 12 g U S English Ps100t0h100z10 5k0b0cKf Berkeley Medium gt lt amp 0 0 0 gt lt amp pbu2 0 0 198 39 0 0 n 0 K n 100 100 Solid n 100 0 m 100 100 0 0 0 0 56 GB Disk AP_6
116. Ligatures option in Character Attributes lt G1 gt for selecting Enable Ligatures and lt GO gt when turned off Text Opacity One new important feature in QuarkXPress 7 is that opacity has been added for boxes pictures text lines rules and other features Xtags supports the opacity for text and rules At press time opacity doesn t seem to work with Xtags on boxes lines pictures etc Xtags_Cho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 223 p Xtags 7 3 and Beyond 223 The text opacity uses a lt p gt opacity text tag that works like this Title lt p40 gt San Francisco lt p gt This will make the type San Francisco have a 40 opacity and the image is transparent below Prior to this edition this would have to be completed in a program like Adobe Photoshop Example Using Text Opacity and PSD Import I thought it would be a good idea to show a few new features in one example In this box we are importing a PSD image with active layers and bringing in the type using text and rule opacity ALLL Soe LAUIN P The purpose for working through these examples in the book is to get more familiar with the different aspects of the program It seems that many people work with software like this for years but fail to break new ground out of not having proper direction i ne This also illustrates how you can use a background to create a unique border Using certain image effects this can take on many differen
117. MacPerl XTensions Xtags Autopage and Headers amp Contents Ordering Information To order any of the software covered in this book go to Xtags www emsoftware com Autopage www kytek com XMLxt www kytek com QuarkXPress 7 www quark com FileMaker Pro www filemaker com BBEdit 8 5 www barebonessoftware com Special Thanks to Chris Ryland and Em Software Chris Roueche Keith Erf and KyTek Inc Benjamin Ko Joe Fuentes and Quark Inc Ramona Percelle and FileMaker Inc Sara Niki Thomas Patrick Woolsey and Bare Bones Software John Ferguson and Kinetic Publishing Services Ronni Burnett and McGraw Hill Pearson Education Paula Brandon and Chandler Keck Xtags_FM 11 27 06 5 38 PM Page ix F W have been in the publishing industry for nearly 20 years My first experi ence with Macintosh was working with the Tucson Entertainment Magazine in the evenings I quickly learned a few things about the Macintosh and how it was a time saver compared to traditional paste up Within a year I started my own internationally distributed music magazine which I decided early on would be driven by the Macintosh Although the software was quite primi tive I knew this computer system would quickly develop and I would grow with it I began my magazine using PageMaker and quickly moved to QuarkXPress upon the introduction of the 2 12 version I spent time producing music publications until the early 90s and then moved o
118. Maximum Width 24p Art Maximum Depth 53p XK The Image Width and Depth section is the maximum art width and art depth which are represent in the 3 and 4 fields in the Xtags string This also has a Shrink to fit button for the width and depth which is equivalent to the Here is an example of the generated string based on the field information lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 24p 53p Always be sure that the depth of the art and the depth of the caption do not exceed the total pasteboard depth Caption Width and Depth Caption Width and Depth Relative Caption Width 24p a Caption Depth 4p Space from 12 Art to Caption The Caption Width and Depth is the maximum caption width and maximum caption depth allowable for the caption The Space from Art to Caption is the white space between the text box and the image This is handled with BL1 TL1 etc spacing I wrote this where it would be done in points to make things less complicated The caption depth has an automatic shrink to fit built in Here is an example showing where that information goes in the Xtags string lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 12 24p 4p The Relative button is if you have a caption that needs to be the same width as the the art when it shrinks to fit Many designs require this When this happens the 3 field will look like lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 12 24 R 0 0 4p It is significant to pay the most attention to these Image Width and Depth as well as the Ca
119. P_CHO1 xtg AP_CHO2 xtg AP_CHO3 xtg aia aa ri Export ogfile D D Text AP_CH04 xtg AP_CHOS xtg AP_CHO6 xtg 8 Once the Xtags file xtg generates the files are now ready to run through a script to become XML files Otherwise they are similar to a marked up file ready for import complete with all style information overrides etc This is where your knowledge of BBEdit s Grep and AppleScript comes into play If you do not own a copy of BBEdit I would suggest purchasing this This is one of those programs I cannot live without The price tag is very affordable and the power it gives to your text files is comparable to the power Xtags adds to QuarkXPress Xtags_Ch08 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 179 F Chapter 8 Repurposing with Xtags 179 The text document will look like this when it exports Remember this doc ument was not through any XML pre tagged formatting lt v2 00 gt lt e0 gt NLN lt P gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z12 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Futura Bold gt H1 S H1 lt L gt lt h H1 gt lt kn0 gt lt kt0 gt lt ra0 gt lt rb0 gt lt d0 gt lt p 0 0 6 12 21 6 g U S English gt lt P gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z16 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Futura Bold gt NL1 S NL1 lt J gt lt h Pre P1 gt lt kn0 gt lt kt 2 2 gt lt ra0 gt lt rb0 gt lt d0 gt lt p 18 18 0 13 9 0 g U S English gt lt t 18 0 1_ gt lt P gt lt s100 gt
120. This is not necessary Although Xtags has the power to do things like this with picture box tags I feel it is best to keep this simple and defined in Quark in stead A style sheet can be created ahead of time to handle this This can be done in QuarkXPress style sheets or through Xtags by using a rule above and rule below Here is the Xtags handling of this BXHD S BXHD lt C gt lt h 4 gt lt kn0 gt lt kt0 gt lt ra 21 Solid K 20 0 0 5 gt lt rb 0 5 Solid K 100 0 0 7 gt lt d0 gt lt p 0 0 0 15 0 9 g U S English gt lt K gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt hl00 gt lt z12 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Futura Bold gt Example 3 Mathematical Overbar With math programs available like MathType it is very difficult to work with math equations the old fashioned way However some people do not work enough with math books to make it worth the investment Using Xtags and overriding the paragraph style can lend a hand in creating these and coding them as well A good example is the need for an overbar as seen here 15 The code for this will be as follows EQ 1 lt k 193 gt 5 lt k0 gt lt b7 4 gt lt m gt The kerning would need to be 193 and the baseline shift before the em dash would be 7 4 This will give this effect The great part of this is it can be then broken down in the translation table into two parts to save coding time You could have leq lt k 193 gt leq2 lt k0O gt lt b7 4 gt The tagg
121. a 1p6 corner ra dius The only other special handling here is that it needs the Send to Back flag Here is the Xtags string that makes up this box lt amp pbu2 0 B 21 24p 1p6 k n 36 s Gn G100 K m gt This gives us a box that looks like this Since the box is sent to back and positioned with a 1p9 y coordinate it will fall behind the title bar as shown below 4 The picture box around the text area is a little complicated because it needs to be offset 6 TL1 and drop 29 4 points from the start of the text It also includes relative placement with 2p5 depth reduction to accom modate the 2p5 spacing from the title to the stop of the rule See example below It also needs a Send to Back flag and a 0 5 point rule lt amp pbu2 6 TL1 29 4 270 35p R 2p5 0 k n 0 5 n 100 K 0 m gt LEARNING PICTURE BOX TAGS 2p5 space The purpose for worthing through all of these examples is to get the user more familiar with the different aspects of the pro 5 The complete code for this is lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 24p 2p6 n 5 n 100 K 15 m J gt lt pbu2 0 B 21 24p 1p6 k n 36 s n 100 K m J gt lt tbu2 15 B 9 1 21p6 35p p3 n n 100 n 0 gt ttl Title tx Complete text here lt amp te gt lt pbu2 6 TL1 29 4 270 35p R 2p5 0 k n 0 5 n 100 K 0 m gt lt g 4 3 2 1 gt Xtags_Ch05
122. ackground However how do we know how deep it will be This will not be known until after the text comes in and we can put relative placement on it This is the difficult part of the box 2 Instead of dealing with the image I will start positioning what will be standard This will be the rotated super title the title the two dotted lines and the text box 3 The first box I am going to bring in is the text box with the 15 shad ing and the multiple inset I am bringing this in at a 9p x positioning on the pasteboard This gives the rotated text room to rotate lt amp tbu2 9p B 5p4 23p6 35p n n 100 K 15 9 9 9 7 gt Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 129 6 39 PM Page 120 F Xtags Maximized 4 Due to the text box being positioned I need to calculate where the back ground art will position This requires a relative placement and will be positioned 4p TL1 with a 5p4 y coordinate because the 15 gray text box begins on 4p x and 5p4 y coordinates The depth will be relative with an additional 5p4 This box also needs to have the Send to Back flag lt amp pbu2 4p TL1 5p4 27p6 35p R 5p4 0 k n n 100 n 0 m 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 05 ch05_009 eps gt The piece of art will need to be created for the full page depth in case the text box takes up the majority of the page depth To avoid running into problems later don t make the art only half the page size The rotated
123. ad assumption What can happen when you are doing a Copy Xtags Text is that the tags will work on that particular box but it isn t taking into account any shrink to fit capabilities relative placement and other important aspects to make the object ready for paging Once the box is brought in during the import it will remain the same size as the original tested box and you would have to manually adjust all of these during the paging process It is always best to test these with new text and then separate the different text and picture box strings into what will be your translation table This will save you time during the paging process Spend ing a few minutes ahead of time to really test your file may save you or the pager hours of frustration later Xtags_Ch0O2 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 37 Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 37 E Master Pages Xtags has the ability to bring in different Master Pages when called out in the text flow This is particularly useful during the import of the text to save man ual handwork There are four supported tags for Master Pages These are lt m masterpage gt apply to current page spread lt amp mf masterpage gt apply to current page spread first lt mp masterpage gt apply to current page only lt amp mpf masterpage gt apply to current page only first On certain projects I discovered a multitude of uses for the Master Page tags Workbooks are a good candidate because there is little art a
124. age 219 p Xtags 7 3 and Beyond 219 PSD Importing Quark 7 has made PSD importing possible Xtags also has the capability to import these as well without any special handling outside of calling in the piece of art such as lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 289 210 5 n n 100 n m Macintosh HD Xtags Book Desktop fg09_033 psd gt From working with these images during import certain filters used in Adobe Photoshop are not supported by the PSD Import resulting in the image being handled as a composite without the layers being active If you import an image with Xtags and this occurs an error message will appear stating This image contains layers with effects or color adjustment modes that PSD Import currently does not support PSD Import will use the embedded composite image At this point you could either change your image to be compatible or just work with it as is At a minimum the PSD file is still available in the docu ment When a PSD image does import without becoming a composite image the palette offers the ability to work with image layers channels and paths as seen in the screen capture below 000 PSD Import f tayers Channels Paths P Dissolve rey Opacity 50 M It also offers the ability to work with opacity on separate layers as well as effects such as dissolve multiply overlay etc The ability to work with PSD files is an excellent feature within Quark 7 that is worth upgrading to this ver
125. ags as well as Au xi ae Xtags_FM 11 27 06 5 38 PM Page xii F xii Xtags Maximized topage The more ways you find to automate the higher the profits you can po tentially generate By investing in Headers amp Contents the overall process gets even more streamlined Most people will feel that statement isn t correct but using many XTensions to automate previously manual tasks ensures more profitability I guarantee that the prepress dollar will continue to shrink as work is farmed out of the country One of my goals for this book is to expand on the uses of Xtags and to take away the apprehension some feel when using the program This book does not re place the Xtags User Guide that Em Software provides when purchasing the pro gram Although I obviously cover aspects of the program that reside in the Xtags User Guide by Em Software I feel that my presentation takes a different approach to the same material Where this book differs in my opinion is that it not only contains a multitude of examples screen captures and so on but also contains information from the hands on set up paging or repurposing of approximately 450 books I have run into almost every scenario imaginable I m trying to in form the reader in a way that a pager or setup person will understand If nothing else I want to take the guesswork out of Xtags and help others get the results I do with this great software as well as some unique workarounds for t
126. ags for someone else when the slightest vari ance has been made in the figure caption combinations If you happen to already know how to achieve some of the examples don t feel like you need to change your approach I have found that there is always more than one way to do things but sometimes it s worth investigat ing how another person is achieving the results I have found that I have saved much time in the past just seeing anothers approach It sometimes opened the door to other options I hadn t thought of Space Between Rule and Figure I ve seen a great number of designs needing 12 points white space between the figure and the rule around it Some pagers may feel they need the art department to change the images to include the rule and the space but Xtags Xtags_Ch0O4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 77 Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 77 can handle this quite well For demonstration purposes I ve shown a photo but typically this is used for line art 1 The figure will need to have an x and y offset of 12 and 12 2 Add 12 points to the height and the width following the shrink to fit There is actually 24 points extra needed but you take half of that amount lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 35p 1p 50p Ip n 0 5 n 100 Solid K 0 m 12 12 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 04 fg04_008 eps gt 3 By doing this all the images will import with this space Rule Around Picture and Caption I h
127. and j spec at beginning of document 1 with properties name H1 auto hyphenation false single word justify true make new h and j spec at beginning of document 1 with properties name Post P1 auto hyphenation true minimum before 3 minimum after 3 break capitalized words false flush zone p3 single word justify true space justification minimum 85 maximum 200 optimum 110 character justification minimum 0 maximum 3 optimum 0 end tell This AppleScript just shows how to write it that will work To add more just change the names that are highlighted The H1 has no justification and the Post P1 has hyphenation Keep with Next lt kn0 gt Keep with Next has only two selections Either lt kn0 gt which means the Keep with Next is unselected or lt kn1 gt which means it is selected Having the lt kn0 gt is great to incorporate on paragraphs in Autopage where you do not want an inline paragraph to be with the next A Grep or MacPerl replace ment could be run against the text that could specify s 4 AI 2N Y 1 lt kn0 gt 2 g This is telling the paragraph that if it sees the I Y Autopage tag to remove the Keep with Next selection on that paragraph Keep Lines Together lt kt 2 2 gt Keep Lines Together is extremely important to the paged file The above ex ample is showing that this feature has the Start 2 End 2 selected If you have Xtags_
128. and putting just enough in them to make them unique You don t want to include too much The more you put in the more difficult it will get to figure out exactly what content needs changing Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 150 p 150 Xtags Maximized You don t want to leave out content either If you don t make sure its unique it could go through the chapter and replace lines that you don t want to touch The style sheet changes were covered before but one of the largest issues seen here is in the figure caption The figure caption for this original book is much different than the one we are going to You will also want to address the fact that the callouts are using en dashes rather than periods These will need to be changed You can do this by writing a Grep search as Search for Figure d d Replaced with 1 2 4 This is keeping the first second and fourth sets of parenthesis while remov ing the third set which is the en dash and replacing it with a literal period The d is saying any number single digit or higher The margin note also needs adjusting In the original chapter it was running in where the new book has this on its own line To do this the search will be Search for ch_mn lt ch_mnkt gt 2 lt f gt lt p gt 2 r Replaced with mnkt 3 r mn 5 6 The final result of this page of text will appear as follows I put to cut out some of the actual text
129. angular picture boxes a curved pic ture box a rotated picture box two text boxes a line and a picture box re sembling a lpt rule That is a lot of material to get put together but it is not as difficult as you might think How I start this box is with the rounded cor ner box I have these 50 shaded for demonstration purposes that will come in like Following this I will add a 4p square box to start at the top left edge of the first box And I will also bring in a rotated 45 box over the top of the two boxes to give the triangle cut into the side The long rectangle just overlaps the first box The first box needs to have the Send to Back flag lt amp pbu2 10 6 B 0 11p6 2p6 k n 18 n 100 K m gt lt pbu2 10 6 B 0 4p 2p6 n Gn 100 K m gt lt amp pbu2 0 B 4 5 21 15 21 15 45 n n 100 K 0 m gt lt amp pbu2 84 6 B 18 273 12 n Gn 100 K m gt Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 129 Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 129 For this example I put shading on the boxes and around the rule of the rotated box for demonstration purposes The four boxes together will appear as As you can see from the code none of the top bars have any top left or bottom left placement They will come into this position exactly Next we need to deal with the line that is running below the entire group ing This will need to read off the b
130. answer on how these errors get into the files to start with Stray Colors in the Paged File There are times when you will run a Collect For Output report against a paged document to discover stray colors throughout the file One way this happens is if the pager is using an XTension like XMLxt to embed hidden XML codes Xtags_Ch02 40 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 40 F Xtags Maximized If the pager decides to have their Normal style set to Cyan and then imports the text file and a few new undefined styles import into the file Upon import they will be in the Cyan color The pager then does the Convert to Hidden Tags while they are in Cyan and the style is still undefined They then cre ate the styles and apply them This may seem acceptable but here is what hap pens to the file underneath t1 lt cK gt The teacher lt cC gt lt A 3 A1C 003 000 007 lt ITAL gt 474 gt lt cK gt The hidden tag is still in the Cyan color while the rest of the style sheet is in black If this is a 4 color title this is not an issue but in a 1l or 2 color book this is a major issue The problem with using Cyan is that it cannot be deleted out of the color palette My suggestion for not having this problem is if you want your normal to reflect a color make it a duplicate like Cyan1 and then delete it after fixing all of the newly imported styles To fix this in the current file you would have t
131. arctica accounts for millions of square kilometers accounting for Sea Ice due to the subzero temperatures in that Antarctic and polar regions Tides affect underwater visibility significantly Tides are normally predictable along major continental coastlines Sea Ice due to the subzero temperatures in that region Tides affect underwater visibil ity significantly Tides are normally predictable along continental coastlines and within the Once the paginator is run the photo will fall into place or very close to this location as shown in the example below There should be minimal adjustment however you would need to adjust the depth of the anchored box depending on the depth of the art The effects of the receeding shoreline The Receeding Shoreline Sea level will cause exposure of the coastal plain and erosion by rivers draining out to the receeding shoreline On the shelf deep water sediments shallow water sediments The example is shown in Photo 2 If sea level fall is extensive enough the entire shelf will develop a sequence boundary The shelf edge will correlate to a stratigraphic horizon in the more continuous sequence of deep water sediments This horizon is the correlative conformity of the shoreline Shallow sandy bottoms are home to many stingrays search ing for shells There is a significant occurrence of coral outcrop pings dispersed among the sandy areas Antarctica accounts for millions of square kilomete
132. art changing information on a page that shouldn t be altered Caption Positioning The caption positioning is user defined by clicking Side Caption Bottom Caption or Top Caption Below is an example of how the end result of the image and caption will import using Xtags This makes it less confusing for the user to know how their image should import You can only select one of the three because the script will calculate based on this information Side Caption ia Bottom Caption Top Caption E Figure 1 3 A skyline city view Figure 1 2 A view of New York pre 911 On the second page Art Placement Option 2 you can select a different caption placement It is a good practice to use different images on the other option pages The purpose of this selection is to keep from having to figure out the BL1 TL1 etc placement that goes with picture and text boxes The idea here is to select one of the caption placement options and then let the scripts take over You will have to know the width depth space to art and other information about the image and caption What you will not need to be concerned with is the coding of the Xtags fields order of commas etc You will need that when setting up the database initially but not when setting up the jobs Xtags_Cho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 203 p Chapter 9 Xtags and FileMaker Pro 203 Image Width and Depth Image Width and Depth Shrink to fit Art
133. art with the key term Search for lt KT gt 2 lt p gt Replaced with lt term gt 2 lt term gt End Result lt term gt automation lt term gt You do not want to just delete font information without looking closer at your content This is why it is important to really study your document before commencing This could be a very costly mistake if you fail to do this For starters you ll want any lt italic gt and lt bold gt content to have the proper codes surrounding the words You do not want to just go through and delete these so its very important to look through the Font Usage to see what fonts are being used throughout the document Be aware that the pager can sometimes be careless I find it best to do the font substitutions after all the general deletions are made but prior to doing the style sheet information In the example below I make sure I am only covering the fonts that will close off the italics bold etc such as Times Optima and Xtags_Ch08 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 184 F 184 Xtags Maximized Helvetica I don t want it to pick up on Symbol or Mathematical Pi That is why I handle them like this Search for lt f Berkeley Italic gt lt f Berk Helv Opti 2 gt Replaced with lt italic gt 2 lt italic gt The numbered list can be handled a number of different ways depending on the DTD For this example we will handle it like
134. asks normally handled manually I want to show users how Xtags will totally change their workflow and give them an edge Its very important to find ways to make the paging process more ef ficient Xtags is an important solution to that problem Using Xtags to import art into your file is one of the biggest time savers I ve encountered What normally would take a person a half hour can be reduced to about 30 seconds with the pro gram s shrink to fit and relative placement capabilities While this book is very comprehensive it does not cover every aspect of the program Several things will only briefly be touched on but for more detailed de scriptions the Xtags User Guide will be the best place for that information This book is geared more for those who use the program on a daily basis and want to find effective ways to add functionality to their paging workflow I feel that between this book and the Xtags User Guide all the bases should be covered I m not claiming that every Xtags scenario is in this book Ideally I would like to have caught everything but chances are good that I didn t because the com binations are so vast when designing I do feel like P ve put forth a multitude of step by step examples that should improve your knowledge of Xtags and offer new possibilities you may not have thought of If I get feedback from a few pagers telling me this book has helped them it will be worth all the effort that went into writing i
135. atment Search for H3 lt h3 gt 2 lt p gt lt f gt lt f gt 2 r Replaced with lt h3 gt 3 lt h3 gt r lt para gt 6 lt para gt 7 End result lt h3 gt Roundtripping lt h3 gt lt para gt The conversion of data into a different configuration and back to original structure without loss of content lt para gt Images This is where Xtags really comes into action with the export It will export the entire path to the art which makes the repurposing that much easier Based on the information below I can tell this piece of art is a numbered figure and it is the second image lt lt gt ART FILE 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Ilmages Chapter 03 fg03_02 eps W 182 882pt H 51 539pt XS 100 YS 100 lt gt gt Xtags_Ch0s8 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 187 F Chapter 8 Repurposing with Xtags 187 As a result my search and replacement is that much easier Search for lt lt gt ART FILE 56 GB Chapter 03 fg d _ d eps W 182 882pt H 51 539pt XS 42 YS V 42 V lt gt gt Replaced with lt figure num 6 id 4 6 gt lt ART FILE 3 4 5 6 7 8 gt lt figure gt End result lt figure num 02 id 03 02 gt lt ART FILE fg03_02 eps W 182 882pt H 51 539pt XS 100 YS 100 gt lt figure gt Typically images will match on the style name such as fgn but for this example I wanted to show how the figur
136. ave actually witnessed a pager set up the figure and the caption with Xtags but left the surrounding border off I asked them why they refrained from adding the code for the border and they said Well it can t be done with Xtags I m here to say that this can Here s an example of how it appears Figure 2 3 It is very important in photography to pay careful attention to the small details Xtags_Ccho4 78 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 78 F Xtags Maximized This all comes down to knowing how to properly use relative placement I m going to show you two ways to achieve this The first is with relative placement This would pose a problem if you were using Autopage and this was a symmetrical design In this case you would need to have the caption positioned on the outside of the page Anytime you have a grouping of 3 boxes this won t work correctly in Autopage for that feature Example 1 Using Relative Placement For the example at the bottom of the previous page to import correctly fol low these steps 1 The maximum figure width and depth is 31p x 45p 2 Knowing this maximum width and depth information we ll want the image to begin with a 10pt inset from the top and left of the pasteboard lt amp pbu2 10 B 10 31p 45p 3 Determine the caption size which for this example is 6p6 with 9pts between the art and the caption We will need to use 9 TRI lt amp tbu2 p9 TR1 0 6p6 15p 4 The rule w
137. ay and you ll be expected to answer the phones and be available through those hours and many times even later Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 155 p Chapter 6 Custom Publishing 155 The secret here is to first export the original box and then figure out what the new box will need to be For the original box the Xtags strings are lt amp pbu2 189 14 142 107 100 n 9 14 7 6 m 56Disk Chapter 06 bx1 eps gt lt amp tbu2 0 0 348 165 989 n 0 5 n 100 K 30 12 9 6 9 gt bxt Wireless Internet bx1f Box text first paragraph bx1 Box text 2nd paragraph lt amp te gt lt amp g 2 1 gt By looking at this it is apparent that there will be quite a few things that need to be taken care of The style names will change the Xtags fields will change but these can be removed and made into small macros that need to be in the translation table That will be the easiest method here Here is how the destination box will need to be coded for the same box content lt amp pbu2 189 14 142 107 n 100 n 9 14 7 6 m 96 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 06 fg06_004 eps gt lt amp tbu2 0 0 29p 35p 1p9 k n 0 5 n 100 n 30 12 12 9 12 gt bx2t lt Bt 10k 88f Optima gt lt k0 gt lt Bf StoneSans Bold gt lt t0 gt Wireless Internet bx2f Box text first paragraph bx2 Box text 2nd paragraph lt amp te gt lt amp pbu2 0 0 29p 11p k n n
138. basic box but there is something in this that Xtags does not currently support The title has a box behind it that has rounded cor ners at the upper left and right but the bottom left and right are squared off Most intermediate level users may feel that they cannot accomplish this because Xtags does not support this shape However this is where you need to use some ingenuity Where you need to start is by first realizing that the power here lies in the Send to Back feature The question is how do we do this The answer surprisingly is much easier than you would think Here is how the finished box should look e N For Discussion Only Automating Using Databases When the average computer enthusiast thinks of a database typically they picture an art log timesheets or something more basic The truth is that programs like FileMaker Pro can take scripting and data entry and combine the two making one of the best programs to work out of XS S Your text area will need to be by 23p You ll need a p9 corner radius on the text box There will also need to be a 2p1 First Baseline An addi tional 8 points will be needed on the depth Here s an example of the text box code Pay attention to the highlighted areas lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 23p 30p p4 n 0 5 18 n 100 n 1 2p1 gt The next box we want to think about is the 50 gray bar behind the For Discussion Only title This does not need any
139. be solid Below is an example of a line that is anchored in the text flow What was the price of the software ___ The code for the anchored line is lt amp lb 0 64 919 or b 0 5 K 100 Solid 1 Plain gt Anchored Line Example 2 Here is another anchored line example This is actually something I ve seen quite often in college textbooks Its when you have an example or a vignette that has a vertical line running the length of it This would be great for an an chored line Here s the way it appears EXAMPLE 2 Hollywood has always had it s share of celebrities who become famous merely because of the success of one movie Julia Roberts had been roughing it in movies like Satisfaction Mystic Pizza but once she landed the role in Pretty Woman suddenly she was the a list actress The next two years saw her appearing in one film after another most without leaving any lasting impres sion It wasn t until she backed off for a couple of years before she found returned box office success in movies like Notting Hill and the academy award winning Erin Brockovich By looking at the example we see a vertical line and a small horizontal rule where the example ends The small horizontal rule is done in the style sheet on the last style for the example The vertical line is an anchored line with as cent selected and a baseline shift of 2 The length of the line can be coded at any length and just pulled down to
140. because it is going to take the first 3 letters of the author s last name and make it lowercase This is executed by using this tag which says Left text 3 which is the first 3 left characters of the field and using lowercase on that match Left Lower Xtags Creator Author Last Name 3 This will produce this result wil_f0301 eps It is very important that the art department names your art consistently for this to work The eps or tif is not as much of a concern because we can run a script to determine this but it is important that they do not add spaces hyphens etc Anytime you are importing art this is important but if you provide markup with a list of names it is easy to get the correct naming We are letting the script generate the name so it s essential that it is accurate from the start I wanted to show one last example of naming by using the ISBN field that I created Here is the ISBN field E E 097620410X Xtags_Cho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 201 p Chapter 9 Xtags and FileMaker Pro 201 This field displays only 10 digits where this will be changing to 13 You ll want to consider that when making this field What we want to achieve here is to make a script step that will take the last 5 digits of the ISBN This is very similar to the Left example above but instead we will be using Right and 5 characters to pick up the 0410X for this art name Right Xtags Cr
141. bl T 1 lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 80 B 80 30p 25p k n 0 5 n 100 K 10 7 7 7 4 gt tbl all of the table body text lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt mm Left and Right Art Placement Option The left and right table placement option opens up practically endless possi bilities when it comes to working with boxes and tables that have differences on the verso and recto pages What few are aware of is that this will also work with figures as well using the A and AR codes I ran across this when I was experimenting Initially you might not see the benefit of this but I assure you there are times when this is needed The Horizontal Alignment for the most part can handle moving the captions for most pieces allowing differences on recto and verso pages If art has a grouping of three elements this will not work with the Horizontal Alignment thereby making it necessary for using the left and right art placement Here s an example with a rule running the full width of the image Waves provide entertainment at Daytona Beach Florida The bar will not allow Autopage to flip the captions to the outside as needed Some pagers may find it easier to just add the bar after paging which will work but that seems to be defeating the idea of automation This can be han dled two different ways but both will require extra work and the use of Xtags Xtags_ChO7 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 164 F 164 Xtags Ma
142. bu2 15p B 1p5 29p 75 40p 75 n n 100 Solid K 0 m nautical tif gt lt tbu2 12 TR1 0 10p 8p gt CAP Nautical Equipment lt te gt lt pbu2 42p TR1 12 42p 5 M n 100 Solid K 50 m gt lt g3 2 1 gt Here s a reduced version of how the recto image will import Nautical Equipment Xtags_Ch0O7 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 165 Chapter 7 Xtags Working with Autopage 165 VERSO PAGE lt amp tbu2 1p B 1p5 10p 8p gt CAP Nautical Equipment lt amp te gt lt pbu2 12 TR1 0 29p 75 40p 75 n n 100 Solid K 0 m yoy Nautical tif gt lt pbu2 Op TL2 12 42p 5 n n 100 Solid K 70 m gt lt g 3 2 1 gt Here s a reduced version of how the verso image will import Nautical Equipment 6 The Xtags translation table would have to be broken up to look like this Recto Page f1 lt amp pbu2 15p B 1p5 29p 75 40p 75 n n 100 Solid K 0 m f2 gt lt amp tbu2 12 TR1 0 10p 8p gt f3 lt amp te gt lt pbu2 42p TR1 12 42p 5 n n 100 K 50 m gt lt g 3 2 1 gt Verso Page f4 lt amp tbu2 1p B 1p5 10p 8p gt 15 lt amp te gt lt amp pbu2 12 TR1 0 29p 75 40p 75 n n 100 Solid K 0 m 393999 f6 gt lt amp pbu2 0p TL2 12 42p 5 n Gn 100 K 70 m gt lt g3 2 1 gt 7 The coded files would look like this CAP
143. build your Xtags from scratch all of the time to avoid unneeded content I don t necessarily disagree that you need to know how to do this but to get the desired result you can select the grouping select the Item tool and use Copy Xtags Text and Paste and adjust as necessary Copy Xtags Text Paste Xtags Text By setting up the preferences correctly most of the unnecessary content will stay out of the string Tll break the fields down quickly Remember if you need a color in a box the shortcut colors for any Xtags box are C Cyan Y Yellow M Magenta W White and K Black which is the default Xtags Issues When using Xtags to bring in photos or boxes one of the biggest mistakes is ending up with unnecessary information When using Xtags there are two ways to get the Xtags strings One is to type the fields in manually starting with lt amp tbu2 Op etc or by grouping the boxes together going to Edit Copy Xtags Text and Paste This works but it is a good idea to do the following 1 Make sure the runaround is off all boxes both text and pictures if a runaround is unnecessary 2 Make sure if possible that the x and y positioning are set as even numbers It is hard to make sense of an x coordinate at 37p4 997 Try to make it 37p5 It s easier to work this way This practice should be used with the width and depth of boxes as well 3 Make sure there is no offset or image scaling Select Modify
144. by a giant reef Other beaches worth investigat ing are Puako Bay Pololu Valley Beach Manini Beach Kona Cost State Park and Kua Bay All free of commercial ism that surrounds In Maine the ocean temperature rarely exteeds 65 degrees in the hottest parts of the summer There is approximately one half a cup of salt per gallon of water on the nearby beaches Sand Beach is nestled between moun Without the assistance of Xtags in the building of this box this process could be very time consuming I highly recommend experimenting with relative placement when you have some spare time The best way to learn how to use this isn t necessarily when you are under a difficult deadline but rather by testing When I became aware of this feature I tried vertical captions horizontal captions shortening and lengthening captions and so on Some can work under the pressure of a Xtags_Ccho4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 73 Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 73 deadline with positive results but I find many people get frustrated and return to the manual way of doing things Fit to Height Fit to Width The Fit to Height Fit to Width f feature is one that works great when you have a certain amount of space allotted for an image and the size of the image hasn t been determined You must pick either the width or the height for this Both cannot be chosen simultaneously This is not the same as using the using the picture 16 plac
145. by se lecting the Omit default elements in Xtags list tags in the preferences Save Text with Xtags Copy Xtags Text v Don t export style sheet definitions Output separate tags e g lt B gt lt I gt vs lt BI gt Vv Omit default elements in Xtags list tags When doing a Copy Xtags Text Paste combination this is the result lt amp pbu2 0 0 198 39 n n 100 n m 56 GB Disk Xtags Art ch03_009 eps gt The path is much cleaner but I must caution that it s more difficult to find the needed fields without counting the commas Having the default information allows pagers to locate the needed fields quicker once they learn what each field stands for Having used Xtags for over nine years I use this setting al most exclusively Output separate tags e g lt B gt lt I gt vs lt BI gt When selecting this the program will generate separate Bold Italic etc tags rather than combining tags I usually like to have them combined but this all has to do with your workflow and if you have defined scripts to do something during the post processing phase Delimiters One standard about any programming software or language is that certain characters are reserved for certain functions With Xtags I find it s better to avoid the use of the following characters whenever possible amp lt gt Do not use these unless they possess a definite function that won t be con fused with somet
146. c Xtags book in the upcoming months but for the time being this is primarily focusing on the QuarkXPress 6 5 ver sion I have noticed in testing that most of the picture box and text box strings seem to work between both programs but since my workflow has been primarily based around QuarkXPress I have chosen to focus prima rily on that platform I do feel this book will help users of both programs but you will have to know where the limitations are concerning both versions The Xtags User Guide does have specific InDesign differences and is where you will need to locate what the unique InDesign Only functions are Pay special attention to the InDesign Caveats throughout the Xtags User Guide The InDesign Caveat illustrate specific differences between the QuarkXPress and InDesign versions Knowledge of Scripting Throughout this text there are quite a few references regarding AppleScript and occasionally Perl If you do not understand these scripting languages it doesn t mean that you won t get enough out of this book because you will I do feel if you can understand these you will be getting even more because it will open the door to new possibilities and increased automation AppleScript is easy to understand and with programs like BBEdit that have so many recordable functions it is very user friendly This book does not break down AppleScript and teach it but it will show you how to improve your workflow using it If you
147. can be accomplished in the Quark file 1 The Creating Translation Tables head will need to be set up with Quark rules with Rule Above and Rule Below Paragraph Attributes Formats Tabs juRules M Rule Above Length Indents f Style E From Left Op Width op tits 3 From Right Op Color W Black Offset p4 495 Shade 100 _ B m Rule Below Length Indents f Style From Left Op Width 10 pt E From Right Op Color W Black he Offset p4 495 Shade fioo o 3 Apply Cancel OK p 2 There will only be a need for a bottom inset in this example so the styles will need left and right formats built in to the style sheets 3 The multiple inset will need to be set with all zeros except the bottom where you ll need 6 pts This can be set up in the Text Inset field 18 as 0 0 6 0 The Xtags to create this box will be lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 21p 40p n 1 n 100 K 15 0 0 6 0 5 gt Box Text here lt amp te gt Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 103 F Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 103 In the input file using a translation table would be t1 BOX_TTL Creating Translation Tables T1 A well set up T The idea string t2 Single Column Box with Rotation This box may appear very basic but it contains four items that make it unique which are highlighted in the Xtags strings 1 The black diamond box is rotated
148. ced return tag keeps all of the preceding text on the A Mas ter Page The text following is then put on the 2 Master Page which is B Master Page You can also call out actual titles that are put in the Master Page For example if you named Master Page B Rules then it would be acceptable to name this Master Page lt amp m Rules gt There are many uses for calling out the Master Page tags These include 1 Going from a one column layout to two columns 2 Calling in an end matter page with a decorative bar bleeding on the out side of the page 3 Calling in a worksheet with a different margin width 4 Calling in a Master Page with a drop folio rather than a running head Since most of my paging is actually done using Autopage I rarely use this fea ture unless I m paging a book that has very small chapters of 4 pages or less or on a workbook as mentioned earlier For more explanation concerning the uses for Master Pages consult the Xtags User Guide Troubleshooting Tips There will be times when your document just doesn t behave like you expect it to You could be faced with a scenario where you are working on a file and when you click on the next spread it closes down the program or all of the type might disappear This can be one of those mentally taxing moments when Xtags really can do some magic for you I ve seen all kinds of things go wrong in files These seem to have shown up more in Quark 4 1
149. cements to the text I tend to do the majority of my work out of the Calculated AppleScript option because I can achieve replacements that would normally be handled manually The Xtags Translation Table Code This is one of the most simple of the replacements but it is a very important one The markup department will code in Xtags at the top of the file A script will need to be written to change this It will read off the field that says Author Last Name It is important to type the name correctly in here because a lot of script steps will read off of this field Author Last Name During the replacements the information in the Calculated AppleScript will interpret this information tell application BBEdit amp activate f amp replace Xtags using lt amp tt2 amp Xtags Creator Author Last Name amp ttl gt searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false 4 amp end tell This is very similar to the way a normal AppleScript would be written with the addition of an extra in front of delimited characters What I m telling AppleScript to do is to take Xtags and replace it for the lt amp tt2 Author Last Name ttl gt which in this example will be lt amp tt2 Williams ttl gt This is a basic replacement b
150. connect to the closing horizontal rule Here is the code for this lt b2 gt lt 1b 270 125 75 or a 1 K 100 Solid 1 Plain gt We ll have more examples of anchored and unanchored lines in upcoming chapters This should give you a good example of some of the uses that can be applied using the lines feature Xtags_Ch0O4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 67 F CHAPTER Working with figures and boxes can really make or break the profitability of a project depending on the time you dedicate to this prior to starting the first chapter Many users of Autopage have the tendency to build a shell for the box and put it in the library using the T E method This is an acceptable way of working with boxes but there is still adjustment Autopage recently made a box feature that will page the boxes but there are still some limitations with this although its very impressive Not every reader uses Autopage so this will not apply to everyone For users of Xtags who don t use Autopage boxes do not have to be so complicated that you need to do a lot of hand manipulation afterwards So much can be achieved using the shrink to fit relative placement and BL1 type of placement options The same with figures When figures just have an image and the caption the code is relatively easy to deal with However you re only scratching the surface on what is possible The last chapter we covered the anchored and unanchored picture text and line usage This is the fou
151. ct ratio If all of the art was at 30p X 20p you could use the a and the images would reduce at the same percentage to fit to the smallest dimen sion in the box In this example the image maxed out 92 at the width leaving the top and bottom showing the white space Xtags_Ch03 48 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 48 g Xtags Maximized 17 18 19 20 The f will expand or shrink to fit the box This is like selecting shift f where it will fill the box with the image This means the width could be 97 and the depth 48 Here s an example of how this would appear Typically this is used on design elements and not images unless you are going for a unique effect We will cover more about placement in this chapter and through out the book scalex The horizontal direction of the art when scaled Unless you import your art other than 100 you would rarely want to change this scaley The vertical direction of the art when scaled I rarely alter this field because I generally require my art 100 of the size offsetx This will put in extra white space from the left of the box Ideally you ll want these always set at Op unless you have certain circumstances This can be beneficial if you need a rule added and 12 points white space on the left offsety This will put in extra white space from the top of the box Ideally you want these set at Op unless your picture has sp
152. d Complicated Box with Multiple Elements Even if you don t plan on setting up a box like this I still think this one would be good practice for you The whole idea of this book is that I want others to not feel limited when they have a pager walk up and ask Can this be set up in Xtags I would hope your response in the future will be Yes Give me a few minutes to figure it out I thought I would throw in this box because it covers so many different elements all in one It looks almost easier to do this as art or out of a library but I thought by combining it together for Xtags to bring in that you might see how you aren t limited at all Here s how the final box should appear Review Box 12 1 e Try to use as few boxes as possible during the set up If can use insets or First Baseline to accomplish this l Il spend a little extra time to keep the boxes as user friendly as possible e Make sure if setting up for XMLxt usage that the text can read through without any text breaks otherwise the XML will not stay well formed If the box isn t being used with XMLxt this isn t an issue e If there are any Quark blends set them as Adobe Photoshop files because Xtags doesn t currently support blends e Always have the box built perfectly with trapping alignment and so on before writing the Xtags strings to ensure everything will work correctly when importing the text The following elements are here two rect
153. d something on this subject At the very least try a few different avenues before giving up on the mat ter Troubleshooting will only strengthen your skills and will help you attack each new problem as it arises with greater clarity in future projects I truly believe that getting any answer you want relies on first asking the question Step by Step Analysis I follow a dozen steps prior to paging my first chapter The document prepa ration is critical to the success of the book You can alleviate many potential problems by just knowing where to begin with your document I always start by having a printed copy of the sample design I review this page by page finding places where Xtags and Autopage will need to be used I will even adjust the file that the designer set up to ensure that boxes tables and anchored elements are working the most efficiently When setting up a project it s extremely important to know where youre going and not to get dispirited if you can t get there immediately Some of my most taxing moments were solved when the computer was turned off Some times this occurred during supper when I was taking a drive or Fd wake up with a solution I m not trying to imply that your life will turn into one long quest for a resolution but if you are at a complete loss sometimes walking away will be your best course of action It s amazing how your subconscious will search for the answer you seek The point is that everyth
154. d use Xtags if overriding a style sheet For users of XMLxt with a translator this is a standard practice although there are times when I need to break the rules as well When I wrote my first software book Autopage 6 Automating the Pagina tion Process found one of my favorite aspects of writing it was the section on Xtags I had allotted about 25 pages for this and quickly realized that I was only scratching the surface on what the XTension offers Considering how much Xtags has helped me streamline and speed up my workflow writing a full book was something I looked forward to I was talking to a former co worker when I first thought about writing this book and their response was that they only use Xtags for importing the art using the translation table I created for them It was at that moment I real ized how this software s potential isn t being utilized Many pagers and set up specialists don t approach a problem seeking the best solution They just move on to the easiest resolution which generally is additional manual time spent throughout the project I personally think that is a counter productive way to approach any workflow It s to your advantage to go through this book and learn all that is possible using the code combinations Xtags has pro grammed within I feel that anytime you are creating a book any floating elements art boxes side art tables etc that can be automated during import will save production time du
155. d Picture Boxes The amp pb contains the following fields parameters lt amp pb width 1 height 2 text align 3 frame width 4 frame color 5 frame shade 6 frame style 7 bg color 8 bg shade 9 text outset 10 placement 11 scale x 12 scale y 13 offset x 14 offset y 15 angle 16 skew 17 picture pathname type 18 picture type 19 box name 20 layer name 21 gt Most of these have been mentioned in the unanchored section but I will spec ify the definitions of those that are different 3 Text Align When anchoring a piece of art within the Modify win dow you are given two options For ascent use A or a for base line use B or b which is the default Align with Text Ascent Baseline Offset 1p6 Xtags_ChO3 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 57 F Chapter 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes 57 If using baseline the offset also goes within this field in parentheses CPE following the a or b separated by a comma For example lt amp tb 5p6 2p6 b 18 16 Angle This is the same as pixangle but applies to the anchored box 17 Skew This is the same as pixskew but applies to the anchored box Anchored Text Boxes The amp tb contains the following fields parameters lt amp tb width 1 height 2 text align 3 frame width 4 frame color 5 frame shade 6 frame style 7 bg color 8 bg shade 9 text outset 10 columns 11 gutter 12 t
156. d back 52 to fit perfectly inside the rectangle Double digits would need more tracking Before Tracking J After Tracking Ei 3 The Xtags to import this besides changing the number would be BL lt BL_DG gt lt k 52 gt n lt BL_NM gt 1 lt p gt The other method is to set the rectangle in the style sheet with the rules where there would be a negative offset to bring the rule above back Here is the Xtags paragraph rule style for this lt ra 12 Solid K 100 1 483 0 5 gt This would require that a center tab is set so the number will position in the middle of the rectangle This is second line of type Example 6 Square bullets set with rules When working with square bullets in text it is just as easy to not have these coded for and set them in your style sheet in the rules E This is the bulleted element m Here is the next bulleted element Here is the code in the Xtags paragraph style sheet of how this The indent from the right is 19p6 lt ra 6 Solid K 100 0 19p6 0 gt That is how this sets in perfectly without any additional coding The coded file for this would be BL This is the bulleted element BL Here s the next bulleted element The key here is to look for any advantages when paging that will save the markup department from additional coding to simplify the paging Xtags_Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 31 p Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 31 Xtags Export Issue When exporting th
157. d different handling Art Placement Options At the bottom of the page you will see three buttons labeled as Option 2 Option 3 and Option 4 These are separate pages for new Xtags definitions Option2 Option3 Option 4 Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 202 p 202 Xtags Maximized The purpose for these is that you will have books where you cannot use the same Art Placement Option for each type of art For example you may have a photo that requires a side caption and a figure that requires a bottom caption This requires using both Art Placement Option 1 and Art Placement Option 2 When selecting the Option 2 button at the bottom of the page it will take you to another page that looks very much the same but will have Art Placement Option 2 at the top Make sure the button is selected and then make your choices to this page Fields such as Job Number Path to Art etc will all bring information from the first page however the other fields specific to the art you are going to use will need to be filled out completely Each page should have different images showing in the caption positioning area so it feels like a different page Or you could possibly change the back ground slightly to give each new option a different feel You ll want all of the field information to be the same so it should be subtle I advise that each page needs to be unique enough to decipher between them so you don t accidentally st
158. d yourself with a new array of areas to begin working on One of the reasons I find FileMaker Pro to be so important is that it can store thousands of replacements make enhancements to fields and other con tent using intricate scripts and the user friendly interface For example if you were working with XML content you could want to make all of the boxes be a variable like lt box num 1 ID box1_0201 gt The 0201 would be broken down as 02 Chapter No and 01 Box No If this was a custom job how could you tell the entire document to change the chapter number to 12 instead of O02 Through BBEdit you could do a series of searches for the figures marginal terms boxes tables etc and change them that way Through FileMaker Pro you could just change the pull down menu for the Chapter field to 12 and then run a script to do this against the entire XML file This is something that we will look at as this chap ter progresses Level of Understanding If you have no understanding of FileMaker Pro you can still read this chap ter but I think it would be a good idea to familiarize yourself with the pro gram and some of the features I ll be jumping around here quite a bit so if you want to know the program I d suggest either buying a book on it doing an online course like on www vtc com or just working in it What I want to show more than anything is how we can take Xtags con tent and make it u
159. de Margin Box Expandable example New Technology Important Issues Remember the following important points e Try to use as few boxes as possible during the set up If can use insets or First Baseline to accomplish this l Il spend a little extra time to keep the boxes as user friendly as possible e If there are any Quark blends I set them as Adobe Photoshop files because Xtags doesn t currently support blends e Always have the box built perfectly with trapping alignment and so on before writing the Xtags strings to ensure everything will work correctly when import ing the text e Test the codes before putting them in their translation table Don t just do a Copy Xtags Text and Paste and be finished Just because it came in that way don t assume it is correct To accomplish this box you have to do a little playing around with the ele ment to find the right place to break the image apart Here are the steps 1 The top of the image will remain as one section as seen here and will import first positioning on the 0 x 0 y coordinate No special handling 2 The text will import next and will be 3p x 3p y This also has no special handling 3 The bottom will also be its own section which will not change size This will import 3p BL1 and 7p6 y It will position using this tag lt pbu2 3p BLI 7p6 8 29p6 9p6 8 k n n 100 n m 56 GB Disk Chapter 05 box_bottom eps gt Xtags_Ch05 11
160. ding on the size of book At this point you are probably wondering where the efficiency lies You ll see the productivity later during the scripting stage if all of these steps are fulfilled After the Quark documents have been prepared you ll want to put all of the chapters into a folder You will need Autopage at this point in order to do the Batch Export If you don t have Autopage this is where you would have trouble because you would have to export each text box or grouping individ ually and that would not be cost effective That is one of the reasons I suggest using Autopage An export engine would be a great feature for Xtags to incor porate into the program but at this point it isn t available Xtags_Ch0s8 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 177 Chapter 8 Repurposing with Xtags 177 To use Batch Export in Autopage 1 Make sure Quark is running but all Quark documents are closed 2 Go to the Autopage XTension menu in the QuarkXPress menu bar and select Batch Export 3 Make sure the main buttons 1 2 and 3 are selected as shown below with the same features selected Select Proceed If you don t have any XML tags hidden in the document the program will pass over step 1 Autopage Batch Export M 1 Check Well formed XML v 2 Convert XML Hidden Tags QART Pathnhame Q DOCPAGE m3 Export using xas sd O lt gt Of Oo 10 Convert Tags v Delete Tags v Del Numbers pa Missing Link M Captions M Notes M All
161. e a less complicated approach because it has the least amount of steps Labels Below Art Alphas Collectively pagers have never been too thrilled about putting alpha labels under art Its my opinion that the art will not be compromised as long as the original is treated as a support piece This opinion doesn t change the fact that pagers still have to complete this manual and tedious process There are ways to reduce the time spent on this issue In the translation table it s easy to have a piece of art import in and by just adding something simple like an a b or c code you can have a quick solution to this task One thing to keep in mind is that on your lt amp tbu2 code that if only default information is going to be in the code it is acceptable to only include the first four fields I achieved this by putting these ahead of time into my translation table a lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 p6 41p3 R 0 1 p12 gt Label lt C gt a lt amp te gt b lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 p6 41p3 R 0 1 p12 gt Label lt C gt b lt amp te gt c lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 p6 41p3 R 0 1 p12 gt Label lt C gt c lt amp te gt Xtags_Ccho4 80 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 80 F Xtags Maximized The major difference here is that on the last label you will need to add the caption to this I typically group these together separately with each piece of art If you attempt to have all the pieces pull in together using the shrink to
162. e are many misconceptions tasks by using scripts and other automation methods about Autopage and its uses I can be used in many areas of publishing but does it Book 2 Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 142 F 142 Xtags Maximized As you can clearly see the chapters are very different On the opening page we see the following differences immediately 1 The first book contains an objectives with numbers and the second book has objectives using colored square bullets 2 You ll notice that the Objectives title is different on both 3 There isa lead in sentence on the first book where the second fails to put this in 4 The first book has an opening image that is centered and slightly rotated on the page with a block shadow behind it whereas the second book has an image taking up most of the margin area 5 The first book has the chapter identified as only 15 whereas the sec ond is Chapter 9 I tried to make this as simple as possible by keeping the content close to the same This isn t usually the norm as when doing custom publishing you ll find new content all over the place that will need to be designed for or altered slightly The Opening Page For starters I will begin by addressing the opening page and using BBEdit combined with AppleScript to make these adjustments Some people may think it would be easier to just copy and paste in the text and then find the right style sheet This thin
163. e are the main concerns I start with Others may appear but once these are addressed you are pretty much on your way to working on the title and having some consistency Missing or inconsistent content is one of the hard est obstacles but we ll cover that here soon We are going to be covering 137 ae Xtags_Ch06 138 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 138 F Xtags Maximized Grep searches in BBEdit so its best to take a look at this before we get too deep into this Some Background on Grep Searches One of the greatest features in the Find amp Replace window is using the Grep searches This is very similar to writing a MacPerl string with the s g pattern replacement There are some differences in code structure that are easy to become familiar with Grep is very involved and teaching every facet of it would take up more pages than I have available in this section My goal here is to provide an overview of its capabilities The idea is to match patterns and be able to ignore content that would be included in a normal search and find I want to point out that the majority of my changes are implemented using subpatterns Subpatterns are groups of Grep separated by parentheses that can be manipulated and used to reorder delete or add content between the groupings These are handled differently than in MacPerl In MacPerl if I have a grouping like S FIG An 1 2 MF111 3 9 The subpatterns are 1
164. e beginning and the end of the hyperlink and put a lt URL gt around the type Search for lt A 3 HYPB 2 gt 9 lt A 3 HYP gt Replaced with for XML lt URL gt 2 lt URL gt Replaced with for HTML lt a href http 2 gt lt V a gt The process I ve shown throughout this chapter has more benefits if you are doing a series and you can repeat these steps throughout many books The setup time pays off over the series Many of the Search and Replacements shown here can be used for many projects I repeat the replacements for track ing baseline shifts etc in each book It s a great practice to build a standard AppleScript containing what you will be using from one project to the next If you are a publisher and your style sheets are always the same using a FileMaker Pro database to store all of the style sheet replacements is a great option FileMaker Pro has the ability to call AppleScripts from BBEdit or other programs allowing more functionality You can be more specific with pulldown menus We will cover this more in the next chapter While I only displayed a small portion of this it should give you a good idea of what is possible and how the exported Xtags data can give you the opportunity to bridge the gap between the Quark file and an XML HTML or other coding possibilities Once you learn Grep and have an export of the Xtags file nearly any end result is within your reach Xta
165. e could be extracted just out of this information To do it the other way would start by simply following the style r type of replacement and then just follow similar steps to what is shown above Searching Through the File One of the last steps I like to make is going through the file and looking for content that doesn t need to be in the file For example in Quark if the pager does a soft return a lt n gt will appear in the file You do not just want to delete this because the word following may end up against the other word causing a typographical error such as walkinto Instead I do the following Search for lt n gt Replaced with two literal spaces Putting in two literal spaces is easy to go through afterwards and do a search for the two spaces and then replace with 1 space Other changes I make is looking for extra returns This can be accom plished by simply searching for r r and then replacing with r I like to have as clean of a file as possible I will also look for spaces or tabs before the line ending that are unneces sary This can be accomplished by simply searching for s r and replac ing with r Xtags_Ch08 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 188 188 Xtags Maximized Closing the File In an XML or HTML workflow there always needs to be a start and end code BBEdit can put in the beginning with the A code and the closing by using the Z code
166. e image The dotted line is for demonstration only When this places only this portion of the image will place in the text area 3 When paging you can have your horizontal art caption alignment to the inside or outside but depending on which column it lands on you ll have to adjust the one that ends up between the columns The layout would look like this when finished In Maine the ocean temperature rarely exceeds 65 Secluded Hawaiian Beaches degrees in the hottest parts of the summer There is approximately one half a cup of salt per gallon of water on the nearby beaches Sand Beach is nestled between mountains and rocky shores to the east of Mount Desert Island A small walk down an rocky cliff leads to Papakolea Green Sand Beach For very private times Pine Trees Beach is a favorite for travelers who are looking for tranquility over mass cultural appeal Spencer Beach Megadunes were first noticed by pilots fying over Pat s protected by a giant reef Other beaches worth parts of East Antarctica Satellites showed that Vestigating are Puako Bay Pololu Valley Beach Manini Beach Kona Cost State Park and Kua Bay All megadunes areas were huge areas The found one area to be the size of California Nearly 25 percent of the Northern Hemisphere is covered by permafrost from free of commercialism that surrounds Honolulu and popular beachs of that area E In Maine the ocean temperature rarely exceeds 65 freezing and thawing t
167. e is the NL style with the leading text size and font highlighted Style Fields Listing amp NL IS NL lt J gt lt h just gt lt kn0 gt lt kt 2 2 gt lt ra0 gt lt rb0 gt lt d0 gt lt p 18 18 0 13 3 0 g U S English gt lt t 13 2 1_ 18 0 1_ gt lt P gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z11 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Times Roman gt 4 This is very standard on how this is handled Every text style will be prede fined for an 11 13 font leading size So when 10 5 12 5 is selected a script will be called to do the following tell application BBEdit amp activate amp If Style Fields Text Leading Size 10 5 12 replace lt p 2 9 2 1 3 2 lt z1 1 gt Times using 1 12 5 4 lt z10 5 gt 6 searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false ae bo end tell This is doing a Grep replacement that looks through the paragraph defini tions and when it finds the 13 leading in the paragraph tags it will swap this out to be 12 5 When it locates the lt zl1 gt size tag it changes this to lt z10 5 gt It is very straightforward but you really need to make sure you do not delete any content while making these changes The same will be true with the font replaceme
168. e many uses for anchored text beyond math This can be especially useful in annotated English books where there are text boxes with edit marks that need to be set off Here s an example 1 I can speak almost Spanish after few lessons e i 2 For three days in Decmber I went to the movies To make this work l Create a separate text box that you can put in the annotated mark a aa 2 In the text flow just anchor these in where necessary then kern the lines back You may have to baseline shift a little but it s still better than trying to do this with the actual type area f e in Decmber Xtags_Cch03 60 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 60 p Xtags Maximized 3 The Xtags anchored code for this example will look like this in De lt k 70 gt c lt k 80 gt lt b 10 gt lt amp tb 6 45 23 92 b 0 K n 100 100 Solid n 100 1 1 1 1 1 t gt anno e anno2 lt amp te gt tl mber 4 With the anchored box put into the translation table it would be much easier to code for in De lt k 70 gt c anno anno e anno2 anno2 mber 5 The translation table would contain these two entries anno lt k 80 gt lt b 10 gt lt amp tb 6 45 23 92 b 0 K n 100 100 Solid n 100 1 1 1 1 1 t gt anno2 lt amp te gt tl Anchored Text Example 3 Another great example of using anchored text is when a dingbat is used in a box to start a section See the example below
169. e of the secrets of the Xtags experience is that a lot of power should cen ter around two places the translation table and the ability to get the tags in the coded file It is not cost effective to have the coder put in the long codes so make sure you always use compact markers For figures it is best to keep them to something short like fg1 Figure 1 2 fg2 This makes it easier for the coder and saves the company money Having this broken down will make the project easier for those handling it In the Xtags section I will cover in more detail how to make your coded sample easier using the power of the translation table How to Use This Book One of the prerequisites to be successful with this title is that you have used Xtags on at least one project Also I feel it is necessary that you have read through the Xtags User Guide by Em Software which is an invaluable reference guide Its obvious to me that there would not be a need for this book if I did not have a distinguishing approach to the material Where I feel this book is unique is through my step by step approach helping you achieve the task without having to keep referring back to certain sections to pull it off I always have learned through instruction like this and I more often retain something once I do it It locks in the memory better than just reading about descriptions of various tasks I want to help people who sometimes get a little confused on where to begin The mor
170. e style sheet information I have noticed with Xtags 6 2 that the tags are no longer separated like they were in the Xtags 4 2 version Here s an example of the Xtags 4 2 version h3 S h3 lt L gt lt h P3 gt lt kn0 gt lt kt0 gt lt ra0 gt lt rb0 gt lt d0 gt lt p 0 0 0 14 0 0 g U S English gt lt P gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z12 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Bembo Bold gt Here s a style tag in the Xtags 6 2 1 version H5 S H5 lt L h P3 kn0 kt0 ra0 rb0 d0 p 0 0 0 14 12 6 g U S English Ps100t0h110 001z12k0b0cKf Futura Condensed gt I don t want to make too big of a deal of this because it s very possible that they will fix this in an upcoming version or they changed this for a rea son possibly to do with the possible conflicting of XML tags I personally like working with the lt kn0 gt type of tag rather than trying to make sense of the long string I have devised an AppleScript workaround to fix this issue What I do is by looking at the tags I can decipher what needs to be done to each one in order by the options Let s start at the beginning For the lt L tag I will need a replacement that changes this My Grep changes will be LIRICIFI replaced with amp gt h A C 4 2 A replaced with amp gt kn replaced with 1 2 3 gt 4 Here s an example how the AppleScript would appear This would be using Grep substitution
171. e this f1 Chapter 01 fg01_001 eps f2h for horizontal f1 Chapter 01 fg01_002 eps f2v for vertical ae Xtags_Ch0O4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 92 F 92 Xtags Maximized 4 The full codes will be written in the translation table as f1 lt amp pbu2 10p B 0 37p p 2 51p4 p 2 n K W 100 100 K 0 m 96 GB Disk Images f2h gt lt amp pbu2 7 TL1 7 36p2 R pl 1 51p4 R p1 1 K n K W 100 100 K 0 f 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Shadow Folder Shadow2 tif gt lt g 1 2 gt f2v 4 gt lt amp pbu2 7 TLI1 7 36p2 R p1 1 51p4 R p1 1 K n K W 100 100 K 0 f 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Shadow Folder Shadow1 tif gt lt g 1 2 gt The horizontal image will then pull in as 5 The proportions on the shadow are 47 9 and 39 2 Unless you have a problem with the horizontal scaling causing some problem during the printing of the file this should be acceptable Before adapting this type of a workflow it s a good idea to run some tests and see if anyone has a problem with the quality of the shadows I find that the quality doesn t seem to suffer any as long as you use the horizontal shadow or the vertical shadow that are more proportionate to their images ae Xtags_Ch0O4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 93 p Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 93 Screened Caption Under Image This type of treatment is seen more often in gardening and cooking books yet i
172. e this by putting two of these pieces in the translation table as follows sn lt SNL_Bullet gt lt k 60 gt 1 lt p gt lt b0 5 gt sn2 lt f gt lt f gt lt b0 gt 5 The markup department would then have to type these when coding the text file as SNL1 sn 2 sn2 See the previous figure 6 This could also be added automatically by having the coding department type the number followed by a tab and through a Perl Script you could add this line s SNL1 SNL d t 1 sn 2 sn2 g This is a simple example and I will go into more detail on how to use the Copy Xtags Text Paste combination in later chapters I find this to be very useful when trying to write or adjust the codes for figures and boxes Paste Xtags Text The other option is to Paste Xtags Text This works after you ve either com pleted a Copy Xtags Text to work with an element and then after some code adjustments you want to see how it looks This is where Paste Xtags Text comes into play Xtags_Ch02 18 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 18 F Xtags Maximized We ll use the same text from the example above to show how this would ben efit you 1 In BBEdit or on the pasteboard the code is written that you want to use in your translation table Copy the entire string of text SNL1 lt SNL_Bullet gt lt k 60 gt 1 lt p gt lt b0 5 gt 6 lt f gt lt f gt lt b0 gt See 2 Select a text box or a place in the Quark file that you
173. e you have working correctly up front the less chance there will be of unforeseen problems later in the project This book has not covered every aspect of the program because that is not my intention Some facets of the program like macros I will not be touching on at all because that is not part of my workflow I use scripts to do these func tions instead which I will be showing you throughout this title I also feel that the Xtags User Guide does an incredible job with their coverage of macros My main objective is to show the user how to get more out of the program by approaching Xtags in a different manner than the user might be used to I will also show how to increase your productivity by incorporating BBEdit and AppleScripts and into your workflow I feel if intermediate and advanced users work through the examples they will find themselves more proficient than before Many of these concepts you may be familiar with but my hope is that you will learn many new and important ideas along the way Xtags_Cho1 11 27 06 5 41 PM Page 9 p Chapter 1 Introduction to Xtags 9 Written for QuarkXPress This book was written with QuarkXPress 6 5 and 4 1 1 in mind I realize that Xtags has a version available for Adobe InDesign but I have not used the InDesign version enough at this point to really be able to set up exam ples to help users become more efficient Depending on the feedback I receive I may write an InDesign specifi
174. eator ISBN 5 Type of Art Towards the top of the database you will see a section that says Type of Art and the selections are Figures Photos and Unnumbered Figures Depending on the positioning of the image and caption depends on which is selected Type of Art Figures amp Photos X Unnumbered If the design calls for each type of art to be handled the same all three can be clicked However if you need a different type of treatment for the Photos you will need to go to Art Placement Option 2 and create the Xtags for the photos This is how the database keeps everything organized This is essential for the art to import correctly Each art type will create the Xtags definitions to be used later in the translation table Depending on which placement option you choose will impact the tags that are generated For example if you use Art Placement Option 1 the database will generate fg1 and fg2 for the figures If you select Art Placement Option 2 the database will generate fg4 and fg5 for the figures The script will generate these tags for the translation table fg1 lt amp pbu2 300 B 0 24p 53p n 5 n 100 100 Black 0 m 100 100 0 0 0 0 Macintosh HD Users Williams fg2 gt lt amp tbu2 300 TL1 0 24p 4p R 0 1 n Gn 100 100 N 0 gt This is why you ll need to create three different placement options in case all three types of art nee
175. ecial han dling or are trying to trap a rule Xtags_Ch03 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 49 F Chapter 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes 49 21 pixangle This is the angle in degrees of the image within an unro tated picture box Do not confuse this with the 5 field In the measurement palette screen capture below its the top field A 24 a 36 Here is how the the pixangle will set inside a standard rectangle box There are many times you may want to use this depending on the effect you are trying to accomplish 22 pixskew When skewing a picture this is the amount in the bot tom field in the palette image above The pixskew can create some very striking effects if handled correctly 23 picture pathname This is the path to the art when importing an image If the translation table is in the same chapter with the art you only need the art name The art will automatically find the pic ture Otherwise the entire path from the server or folder will need to be specified similar to DualDisk Xtags Art ch01_001 eps PDFs are also supported to import 24 picture type Instructs Quark which type of missing art needs to be updated The choices are P or p for PICT T or t for TIFF and Xtags_ChO3 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 50 F 50 Xtags Maximized 25 26 E ore for EPS Instead of Picture Usage putting in a temporary PICT tag it will actually specify the image type box name
176. ecting match cut selection find bx03 searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false with selecting match paste end try replace lt para gt lt box using 1 r 2 searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false save text document 1 end tell You would have to repeat the AppleScript step for each box and the script actually gets really long but once it is written it can be reused for other books As long as try and end try are included if it does not match the number of boxes the script will continue to the next step and not generate an error One thing we didn t go over is how to get the closing lt box gt tag This is through the power of Xtags As long as you have the entire box grouped it will end with a grouping tag In this case it was lt g 1 2 3 4 5 6 gt Know ing this all I need to do is substitute this out for the closing lt box gt tag This Xtags_Ch0s8 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 191 p Chapter 8 Repurposing with Xtags 191 also picks up a picture box string and a line tag string but with specific infor mation inside them For example the picture box has a o for an oval as well as a
177. ed on that information decides how the Xtags strings should be formatted At the end I will run a script that will create the Xtags Translation Table based on the information that the user specifies in the fields A series of fields are included at the top of the page including Job Num ber Author Last Name ISBN Path to Art Art Name Type of Art No of Grouped Boxes and Autopage Usage These are critical to the success of the job For example we have several different options for the Art Name field There is a value list that you can define under File Define Database that stores which options can be in a pull down menu Based on the possibilities for art I realize that four options could occur The possible art names will be f0101 eps fg _0101l eps author_f0101 eps isbn_f0101 eps Based on this information within the Art Name field I select the f0101 eps pull down selection A script will look at this definition and it will add expanded tag information The markup department will need to put a small variable before and after the figure so the database can replace the information correctly It is important that these are numbered sequentially for each image For example Figure 5 1 will be f01x Figure 5 2 will be f02x etc Here is an example of how the tags should be coded Callouts Figures f01z Photos p01z Unnumbered u01z Start of Caption Figures f01x Photos pO1x Unnumbered
178. ed pagers who see a lot of color and just freeze I tell them to ignore the color at first and just deal with what it is going to take to reproduce this That to me is where a person really needs to begin Try to keep the boxes as simplified as possible to avoid a lot of hand ma nipulation afterwards Just because a designer has an element set up a certain way does not mean you have to keep it the way they originally created it In most cases a designer is not a pager Therefore they do not look for the best way to handle it They are looking at the box for its appearance whereas a pager will see it for its functionality As I mentioned earlier you should always begin by creating your box and doing a Copy Xtags Text and Paste combination to see which codes are mak ing up your box In most cases the order will not be what you want there isn t any relative placement and other factors will not be exactly what you want What it does do is gives you a starting point to begin with mm Origin Tags When doing the Copy Xtags Text and Paste on a group of boxes you will no tice an Origin Tag preceding the text and picture boxes It looks like this lt amp 0 44 384 gt 97 ae Xtags_Cho5 98 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 98 F Xtags Maximized This is showing the x and y location of the grouped boxes on the actual page I typically delete these because I use Autopage for the actual positioning of the floating objects For some workfl
179. ed text file would reflect this on any two digit number EQ 2 eq 7 eq2 lt m gt The result would be 29 Xtags_Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 29 p Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 29 Example 4 Items behind type There are many different situations in paging where the designers will decide to set something up a certain way that is easiest for them yet it isn t efficient when paging Items sitting behind the type or heads are good examples of this Here is an instance of an oval underlaying the start of a head Using Boxes and Elements Many times when using a program like Autopage the pager will just use the oval as side art and underlay the head with the oval Unless the oval was sticking out into the margin area I wouldn t handle this that way As a pager setup person automation specialist or whatever your title is you need to find efficiencies It s imperative to the success of your projects Don t be afraid to be creative with dingbats In this case I will show you step by step how I would approach this l m certainly not breaking any new ground here but it can be interesting how people don t think of these things 1 The first thing I do is bring in a circle with Zapf Dingbats I apply a 180 horizontal scaling and 25 shading Now we have an oval Before Styling After Styling 2 When imported the oval and the head would appear like this Using Boxes and Elements 3 By tracking 60 between the
180. eet to a text file that will be imported into the Quark tem plate You will want to have a line of generic text following the style sheet definition that will be imported Here is an example of how the style sheet and the sample text will export to a text file The sample text is highlighted h1 S h1 lt L gt lt h H1 gt lt kn0O gt lt kt 2 2 gt lt ra0 gt lt rbO gt lt d0 gt lt p 0 0 0 22 24 6 g U S English gt lt K gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z18 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Times Bold gt h1 LC 1 M 40p A 2 The Need for Automation SR h1 V 3 L h1 tx1 S tx1 lt J gt lt h Standard gt lt kn0 gt lt kt 2 2 gt lt ra0 gt lt rbO gt lt d0 gt lt p 0 0 0 13 0 0 g U S English gt lt P gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z11 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Times Roman gt tx LC 1 M 30p Automation can be the difference between a profitable company and one that reduces staff because of inefficiencies You will also want the AppleScript to place the styles in the order that you want the text to flow in the document For example I will put the book front Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 214 F 214 Xtags Maximized matter first followed by the chapter number and title objectives or vignette or opening text The order is important because it eliminates the need for later hand manipulation and produces a nearly finished design if scripted properly An
181. ement option that supports the shrink to fit by using the a or f option The a option will make both 80 4 but would have white space above and below the image in the box The f in the 16 field would scale the width to 80 4 but leave the depth at 100 thereby distorting the image Below are examples The a placement option The scaled f placement option Don t get thrown off that the f is also used for this option It operates out of field 3 or 4 1 and 2 for anchored so it should be less confusing For example let s say we are working with a box as shown here Computer Spotlight This book has not covered every aspect I feel intermediate and advanced users because that is not my intention My main need to work through these examples objective is to show the user how to get more out of the program by approaching the program in a different manner than the user might be used to After following through the book and learning how to do all of the procedures Chapter 9 is full of step by step examples that will give you an opportunity to apply the various functions of the program and it s many uses We can see that an image needs to be placed We know the width needs to be 18p due to the specifications Maybe the art department has this at 24p because it is from a previous book or a custom publishing job What we will Xtags_Ch04 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 74 74
182. emperatures degrees in the hottest parts of the summer There is approximately one half a cup of salt per gallon of water on the nearby beaches Sand Beach is nestled between mountains and rocky shores to the east of Mount Desert Island For very private times Pine Trees Beach is a favorite for travelers who are looking for tranquility over mass cul tural appeal Napo opo o Beach Park is located at the southern end of the beautiful Kealakekua Bay on a very rocky terrain Black sand beaches are very common in the state of Hawaii There s Moana Loa and Moana Kea and there s Hana which is part of the Maui landscape but a trecherous road will take you to it Not for the faint hearted but worth the drive The photos contained on these pages are not nec essarily from any of the mentioned locations For dis play purposes only This is the caption with C O Xtags_ChO7 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 174 174 Xtags Maximized Anchoring the H1 Side Head Instead of Side Art Many people often have this dilemma when setting up a design They ll have an H1 or an Example head positioned in the margin and the text aligns next to it in the major column as seen here returned box office success in movies like Notting Hill and the academy award winning Erin Brockovich Jim Carrey s Jim Carrey is another performer who was around forever in movies like Doing Time on Maple Drive High Strung Once Bitten and Sudden Impac
183. ent n user might be used to After following Understand the relationship between computer softwareand how it impacts our daily lives through the hook and learning how to do all of the procedures Chapter 9 is full ng to leisure time s between software and hardware you ll already know but my hope is that you m How the Internet and othe things along the way changed the way we com s of communi te internally with on such as Instant Messaging has businesses some methods companies can we to strenghen their business using the Inernet The Impact on Profitability m Appreciate the important ways in which we look for new ways to take software to quicken Since ve been using the program I ve noticed there are tasks by using scripts and other automation methods about Autopage and its uses It can be used in many areas of any misconceptions lishing but does it Original Look Tho impact of Computer Sotware on Our Lives 149 Intro to Second Party Xtensions PETI Second Parti Software Second party Xtension have revolutionized QuarkXPress and may be a big sell in the future for InDesign always had a good grip on QuarkXPress but when needed that boost of power knew there was a developer out there who had just the thing I needed would go out of my way to learn this software 1 also want to help people who sometimes get a little confused on where to start I s one thing to set up a bo
184. enu Diferences 221 OpenType Support 220 Paragraph Attributes 222 PSD Importing 219 223 Rule Opacity 222 Special Characters 221 222 Table Tags 217 218 Text Opacity 222 223 Quark Blends 101 Relative Caption Placement 62 68 69 72 74 78 81 83 87 89 91 93 94 104 105 114 119 120 129 130 132 133 135 136 147 172 Relative Double Border 84 Report Errors 46 Repurposing Content 159 Closing the File 188 Floating Element Markers 189 Heads and Run in Heads 186 Images 186 Know the Content 188 More Intricate Coding 183 Searching Through the File 187 Rotated Solid Shadow on Image 89 Rounded Corner Box with Unsupported Shape 106 Rule Above and Below 21 Rule Around Picture and Caption 77 Runaround 44 62 63 125 Save Text with Xtags 13 15 Scale x 48 Scale y 48 Screened Caption Below Image 94 Screened Caption Under Image 93 Select QXP Doc in Export Hierarchy 177 Setting the Preferences 11 Shading 25 63 Shadow on Images Shrinking to Fit Both Dimensions 90 Xtags_Index 11 27 06 6 50 PM Page 228 228 Xtags Maximized Shrink to Fit Capabilities 36 43 44 47 48 61 67 68 74 77 91 101 103 112 114 117 130 132 133 Side Caption Bottom Left 54 Bottom Right 55 Top Left 52 Top Right 52 Side Element with 5 Grouped Boxes 82 Side Margin Box Expandable 121 Side Margin Box with a Vertical Line 110 Single Column Box 101 103 Sizing Options 76 Skew
185. enu each time in Quark would be time consuming With that said these are available as Xtags markup codes The coding structure for these are as follows Special Em Space lt m gt Em Dash lt gt En Space lt e gt Discretionary Hyphen lt h gt 3 per Em Space lt 5 gt Indent Here Hang lt i gt 4 per Em Space lt gt Discretionary New Line lt d gt 6 per Em Space lt 4 gt Punctuation Space lt p gt Thin Space lt gt Figure Space lt 8 gt Hair Space lt gt Flexible Space lt f gt Special nonbreaking Em Space lt m gt Flexible Space lt f gt En Space lt le gt Figure Space lt 8 gt 3 per Em space lt 5 gt Punctuation Space lt p gt 4 per Em space lt gt Standard Space lt s gt 6 per Em space lt gt Em Dash lt _ gt Thin Space lt gt Hyphen lt gt Hair Space lt gt Many of the codes have previously been part of the Xtags structure but now that these are in a Quark pull down menu the coding of these will be even more Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 222 F 222 Xtags Maximized necessary Notice that en space is now lt e gt In previous versions of Quark this was lt f gt Many of these codes will only work with Quark 7 and higher One unique aspect of using these Special and Special nonbreaking characters is that when the Invisibles are on they each have their own character that is visible in the text T
186. er not using Autopage in conjunction with Xtags is really missing the full spectrum of what is possible Your goal as a paginator should be to speed up your workflow and be as cost effective as possible It s a very critical time to be effective with a program like Autopage with all of the changes in the publishing field Many U S companies have reduced their in house production staffs and have been outsourcing to stateside free lancers and foreign composition houses to meet a large part of their paging keystroking and art needs How this translates to a stateside company is that it is critical to find ways to automate the process to remain competitive This is essential in the survival and longevity of any publishing company My goal with this chapter is to show users of Autopage or even those who might have some interest in the program where Xtags comes into play with the program The two work very well together and so much is possible with the exporting now with the rise of XML usage that I can t see where someone wouldn t want to use the two together I started using Xtags and Autopage back in 1997 Xtags was the one I fig ured out first and then took that knowledge and applied it further when working with Autopage I quickly found that I needed both to be fully effec tive as a pager and I was one of the most productive pagers This was not by accident It had so much to do with how far I could take both programs Even when I was assig
187. er radius This results in a 6p width therefore this field will have 1 12p The circle has a 25 black rule and the circle needs to be sent to the back k The code is lt amp pbu2 0 0 9p5 9p5 k n 1 12p Gn 25 100 K 0 m gt 4 This code in number 3 will be used twice with a small variance The top circle positions at 0x Oy The second circle will be positioned based on the ending depth and width of the photo Therefore it will need a 6p9 BR2 6p9 Since it also positions under the photo it is sent to the back The final code when all put together will read as follows lt amp pbu2 2p9 3p3 30p 30p n n 100 K 0 m 56 GB Disk Book Photos flowers3 tif gt lt tbu2 Op TL1 0 30p4 R 0 1 50p4 R 0p 1 n n gt FIG SR A C O lt amp te gt lt amp pbu2 0 0 113 113 k n 1 144 Gn 25 100 K 0 m wo yy gt lt pbu2 6p9 BR2 6p9 113 113 k n 1 144 Gn 25 100 K 0 m 5 gt lt g 1 2 3 4 gt By using the C O in Autopage only the relative area will position in the col umn when paged The actual placement of the photo with the decorative cir cles will appear placed like this example In Maine the ocean temperature rarely exceeds 65 degrees in the hottest parts of the summer There is approximately one half a cup of salt per gallon of water on the nearby beaches Sand Beach is nestled between moun tains and rocky shores to the east o
188. ere won t be a few difficulties setting this up but it should be easier than when the chapter first began Here is how the box should import f eescooeoooseooooeooooooooooocooooeooooooocoeooooooooeosooeooooooooopoooooooeoo Importing Text and Picture Boxes Try to use as few boxes as possible during the set up If I can use insets or First Baseline to accomplish this I ll spend a little extra time to keep the boxes as user friendly as possible e Make sure if setting up for XMLxt usage that the text can read through without any text breaks otherwise the XML will not stay well formed If the box isn t being used with XMLxt this isn t an issue e If there are any Quark blends set them as Adobe Photoshop files because Xtags doesn t currently support blends New Technology e Always have the box built perfectly with trapping alignment and so on before writing the Xtags strings to ensure everything will work correctly when importing the text Let s look at what we re dealing with here There is a large piece of art in the background two dotted lines rotated text and a text box requiring relative placement When I approach a box I don t try to figure it all out the second I get into it but I do make note of anything troublesome Overall this box isn t too complicated but there are a few difficult scenarios Let s begin by following these steps l My first step normally would be to bring in the art b
189. erenced paragraph is the last paragraph on the page The 4p will not help your page because the space is in the style but isn t doing anything because there s no subsequent text Method 2 Using an Anchored Box Using an anchored text box Ascent at the beginning of the paragraph to add space for the runaround is another acceptable method I don t use this method too often because I have had great success with the previous scenario To achieve this 1 At the callout it s mandatory to put an anchored picture box as a place holder for the runaround 2 To get this to anchor can be handled two different ways a Have the markup department key in an Xtags code anch that would be match the translation table The code would be to this effect anch lt amp pb 8p 10p a n 100 n 1 1 2 12 m gt b The other option would be to write a MacPerl script or AppleScript to position the macro appearing in the translation table into the text flow at the start of the style sheet each time a photo is called out The MacPerl script would be written as follows s 4 MAR P d 1 D 1 Manch 2 3 4 g If the text in the paragraph was coded as T1 The example is shown in Photo AR P2 2 the MacPerl script would change this to T1 anch The example is shown in Photo AR P2 2 Xtags_Ch07 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 171 p Chapter 7 Xtags Working with Autopage This ensures tha
190. ess where all of the elements are specified except whether the length is Indents or Text v Rule Above Length indents H Style eeccccece B From Left p3 Width 1 5 pt From Right p3 Color l G Color_01 hy Offset lp Shade 70 3 The default is Indents but if you select Text then right before the Left In dent a T must precede it Here s an example of how this would appear lt ra 0 5 All Dots Color_01 100 T0 0 18 gt Xtags_Ch02 22 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 22 F Xtags Maximized As seen on the previous page you must name the rule style in quotes These need to be named appropriately such as All Dots Thick Thin Thick etc The color name must be in quotes The only exceptions to this directive is if the color is Cyan C White W Black K Magenta M or Yellow Y I ve found that there are many instances when a closing rule is necessary to locally style and not have added to the existing style sheet For example certain boxes need a closing rule that cannot really be added to the style be cause the last style of the box may end with an extract display math or para graph This also cuts down on the multitude of styles that are necessary The best scenario in this case is to have an override code added on the last style of the box regardless of what it is lt rb 1 Solid K 100 0 0 6 gt If any style falls at the end of the box t
191. everything works as intended 12 Build a coded sample showing the translation table codes and how they should be coded Create an Effective Coded Sample Creating an effective coded sample is a necessary early step into the prof itability of a project Depending on your markup staff it is important that they understand your tagging structure and the proper positioning of your elements If you have the ability to write a script to put in macros then a coded sample may only be necessary for yourself for use as a checklist If scripting isn t a possibility putting forth detail will help the coding department decipher your intentions It s important for the coded sample to be using two sets of instructions one box showing style sheets for codes on the side and one for listing the macros Autopage tags and Xtags coding instructions Here is an example of how the coded sample should look 46 Part 1 Coral Reefs Pacific Coral Reef 47 Black sand beaches are very common in parts of Hawaii There s Makalawena Beach contains a rocky area and the sandy beaches T Moana Loa and Moana Kea and there s the Road to Hana which is part features a breathtaking views of mountains in the distance of the Maui landscape but a treacherous road takes you to it Not for the faint hearted but worth the drive if you have the time and nerve Hazards to Coral Reefs H3 Coral reefs have been known for years as support for all
192. ext inset 13 baseline offset 14 baseline min 15 vert align 16 interparagraph max 17 box name 18 gt These are all covered in the unanchored or in the anchored picture boxes so we ll move on to some examples Anchored Picture Box Example 1 Here s an anchored art example where the anchored art is tabbed to the right where it works as part of the box element In some boxes this could also be floating but it makes it easier to code if the image is always going to be to the right of the title Computer Spotlight Working with Xtensions It s one thing to set up a book in a program like Autopage but it s another to get the Xtags Headers amp Contents and even the QuarkXPress document set up properly The more you have working correctly up front the less chance there will be of unforeseen problems later in the project Always spend extra time in the beginning to make sure you have your preferences set up correctly An AppleScript can be run to assure this The anchored code for this box is as follows lt amp pb 82 66 a 0 5 K n 100 100 Solid W 100 0 12 8 8 m 100 100 0 14 0 5 0 0 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 03 fg03_015 eps gt Xtags_Ch03 58 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 58 F Xtags Maximized Anchored Picture Box Example 2 Bulleted lists will occasionally need a graduated bullet in them This can be done in Quark but it cannot be done through Xtags because it doe
193. f detail like I did the Xtags Creator This is a very important database because its purpose is to make customized standard designs by generating style sheets based on Xtags Paragraph and Character Style Sheet information This infor mation is read not only by the checkboxes that are selected but also by the fields at the top of the page This also takes information from the Figure Selector and Box Selector pages allowing the user to customize which type of figure or box style theme they desire for their particular design Let s first look at the top of page where we have the following fields Book Title Edition Color Page Size Part Section Openers Text Leading Size Dis play font Text Font and Text Width Indent These are all critical to the success of the book Let s take the second and third rows Trim Size Chapter Part Openers Text Leading 7 25 x 9 5 v J Chanter Opener Tr 11 13 O v Display Font Text Font Symmetrical Indent Wexler Bold v Lexington v Full Text Width 7 All of these fields will have an impact on the style sheets For example if the text and leading is 10 12 each style sheet that isn t a title or needs special Xtags_Cho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 211 F Chapter 9 Xtags and FileMaker Pro 211 font leading requirements will need to have this called into the style sheet The fonts are handled the same way Let s look at a style sheet that is set up in the script For example her
194. f in both pic ture box tags The picture box to the right will need to have an 18 point top right placement as well Here s an example of the code for the top right image lt amp pbu2 18 TR1 0 35p 9p8 f n m 100 m 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 03 fg03_018 eps gt ae Xtags_Ccho4 96 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 96 p Xtags Maximized The bottom image needs to have a maximum width of 10p6 The depth is not an issue so in the 3 field we will need to have 10p6 f This box will also position off of the picture box directly above it This will need to be 10p6 bottom right 10p6 BR2 with an 18 point y offset for this to position correctly lt amp pbu2 10p6 BR2 18 10p6 f 35p n n 100 m 5 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 03 fg03_019 eps gt The text box will read off of the top right picture box where it requires a 0 BL2 with an 18 point y offset It will also need to be 10p6 to match the width of the bottom left image for balance The complete code is as follows lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 30p 9p8 f n n 100 m 96 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 03 fg03_011 eps gt lt amp pbu2 18 TR1 0 35p 9p8 f n n 100 m 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 03 fg03_018 eps gt lt amp pbu2 10p6 BR2 18 10p6 f 35p n n 100 m 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 03 fg03_019 eps gt lt a
195. f Mount Desert Island Megadunes were first noticed by pilots flying over parts of East Antarctica Satellites showed that megadun s areas were huge areas The found one area to be the size of California Nearly 25 percent of the Northern Hemisphere is covered by permafrost from freezing and thawing t m peratures Seasonal snow cover covers over 30 of the Earth s total land surface Over 95 of the total seasonal snow cover is located in the Northern Hemisphere Snowfall accounts for over 70 of annual precipitation in the Rocky Mountains and other mountain areas Black sand beaches are very common in Hawaii There s Moana Loa and Moana Kea and there s Hana which is part of the Maui landscape but a trecherous road will take you to it Not for the faint hearted but worth the drive The scenery along the way is nothing short of breathtaking There s also Punalu u Black Sand Beach in Hawaii Among other beaches are Lapakahi State Historical Park Beach Mahukona Beach which used to be an abandoned harbor once used by an Hawaiian sugar company Makalawena Beach contains a rocky area and sandy beaches while Onekahakaha Beach Park features one of the most breathtaking views of mountains in the distance A small walk down an rocky cliff leads to Papakolea Green Sand Beach For very private times Pine Trees Beach is a favorite for travelers who are looking for tran quility over mass cultural appeal Spencer Beach Park is protected
196. ference overrides built in This allows them the ability to override the parameters if necessary The way to achieve this is by first clicking the Autopage Usage on the first page and ace Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 206 F 206 Xtags Maximized then adjusting the parameters here In the Autopage Placement field I have a value list defined for the following options that would create the following Autopage overrides Value List Option Tag Override Parameters Do Not Alter Top Y T Bottom Y B Left Top Side X L Y T Right Top Side X R Y T Left Bottom Side X L Y B Right Bottom Side X R Y B Top Outside X O Y T Bottom Outside X O Y B The VSB field would have the options to select 1 2 or 3 The Positioning field would have either Float or Inline If Float is selected no override will happen since this is the default When the script is run against the text these overrides will end up in the AR ID coding such as See Figure AR 5 X L Y B I Y V 3 1 5 If the fields are left to the defaults the coding will just be AR 5 Picture Box Art Advanced amp pbu2 The Picture Box Art Advanced pbu2 section contains the remaining fields in the picture box tag beyond the first 4 fields When making a new job in the database the defaults will fill in It is important to make sure you cre ate a script that will put the defaults in each field That will assure the user that if they do no
197. from Margin left page 8p Side Element Offset from Margin right page 8p 2 Icombine the power of Xtags to give me an edge In the paragraph where the art is referenced I add extra space to the paragraph that I feel the wrap will add to the text in an Xtags code For example once I turn the runaround on the art will most likely push the text 3 or 4 lines for hori zontal photos and 4 or 5 lines for vertical photos from the original posi tion before the runaround is applied I add this Xtags string lt p 48 gt Xtags_Ch07 11 27 06 6 46 PM 3 4 Page 169 F Chapter 7 Xtags Working with Autopage 169 This adds 48 points to any style sheet the reference falls within There will now be 48 points of white space below the paragraph containing the photo reference when the image is first pulled in Here s an example At first when paged the image is in the background without the runaround on The text is flowing over the 8p underlayed portion of the image The Underwater Environment SRPMBOTORI COMPEUPAS vary in the ocean A sandy bottom can be found nearly every where with corabin the upper depths Some areas have an abundance of coral mounds or bottom coral growth Areas with more sand have lower visibility Nearly all coastal areas haye anvabundahce of coral in the intertidal and surf zone areas g lottoms are home to many stingrays searching for shells There is urrence of coral
198. fully at the tags there s a lot going on The Rise in the 80s It practically happened overnight What used to take a lot of capital to get into was suddenly changed when heavy metal music was capitalized by entrepreneurs in 1982 The wave started in 1981 when Brian Slagel a record store owner and heavy music collector decided to take the hopeful groups in the Los Angeles area and release an independent record called Metal Massacre This compilation album with a small run of less than 5 thousand spawned two of hard rock s biggest groups Ratt and Metallica who went on to sell over 150 million in records combined It wasn t long before many others jumped on board hoping to find the next major group before the major labels discovered them first On the East Coast Jon Zazula started up Megaforce Records which was notorious in later years for housing class acts In competition with MB on the West Coast was Jim Varney who started Shrapnel Records which was the record label to be a part of if you were a virtuoso guitarist like Yngwie Malmsteen Tony Macalpine or Steve Vai Although Shrapnel never really saw the numbers like Metal Blade they did manage to force musicians to be a little better at their craft The 90s saw Independent labels move to Seattle where they took the ideas from the metal labels and released grunge music The release of music by Soundgarten Pearl Jam and Nirvana caused a new wave of music that hit the hearts of the reco
199. g I have the figure pulling in first at 8p B That allows me 8 picas to work with from the left edge of the pasteboard for the caption to place Therefore I made a 8p BL1 to accommodate the 7p caption and the lp space to the art I allowed 10p for the depth of the caption so I made the caption box position 9p9 so the baseline of the caption aligns with the bottom of the art which is a great workaround If using Autopage creating a bottom left caption is not necessary if you use the Horizontal Alignment which can bot tom align the Vertical Art Caption ae Xtags_Ch0O3 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 55 p Chapter 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes 55 FIGURE 5 Bottom Left Side Example lt amp pbu2 8p B 0 33p 40p n n 100 Solid K 0 m Macintosh HD Art pwatch tif gt lt amp tbu2 8p BL1 9p9 7p 10p n n 100 n 0 4999D gt FIG lt FIG_NUM gt Figure 5 lt p gt Bottom Left Side Example lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt Side Caption Bottom Right The bottom right caption is similar to the top right side caption in many ways However the caption needs to bottom align with the figure requiring the use of the bottom vertical alignment b I allowed 10p for the depth of the caption so I made the caption box posi tion 9p9 so the baseline of the caption aligns with the bottom of the art FIGURE 6 Bottom Right Side Example lt amp pbu2 Op B 0 33p 40p n n 100 K 0
200. getting started My schedule cleared up enough where I could really start giving this title my full attention The more I worked on it the quicker I realized that this was going to be such a rewarding book to write Not only for myself but for the Xtags user that really wants to push the envelope and not just use it at the ba sic level Every company always has that person that sees an XTension like this and wants to take it to the next level This book should help you reach that potential Even though I m at an advanced level with Xtags it s still a challenge to write this text because getting an application to come across as interesting is very important to keep the reader motivated Xtags is one of the most power ful QuarkXPress XTensions I ve come across yet it s one that a lot of people get intimidated by I feel those who run into problems generally aren t visualizing where they want to go with it My goal here is to break it down simply em phasizing all of the advantages to using this over manually creating boxes art and other aspects that this is designed for I would also like to see those inter mediate level users acquire an advanced skill level by acquainting them with new workarounds they weren t previously aware of Xtags is a very affordable XTension that can easily pay for itself just on the art importing capabilities alone On most titles my time would improved any where from 30 to 60 over manual paging by using Xt
201. gs Creator TTL amp fg1 amp Xtags Creator F1 Xtags Results amp 4 Set Field Xtags Creator TTL Xtags Creator TTL amp fg2 amp Xtags Creator F1 Xtags Results Text amp 41 End If End If End If Xtags_Cho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 209 Chapter 9 Xtags and FileMaker Pro 209 To break this down this script is being instructed that l If the F1 On Off field The Art Option Placement 1 field at the top of the page is clicked proceed to next step firtPlacement Optiond If the F1 Figures Yes No field is selected which is the Figures button next to Type of Art proceed to next step Type of Art X Figures If the Fl Bottom Caption button is selected then all three of these are proven true Bottom Caption The script will pull information from the F1 Xtags Results and the Fl Xtags Results Text fields and copy this data into the translation table This will pull the following information into the field named TTL fg1 lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 30p 2 24p 0 0 n n 100 Black 0 c 100 100 0 0 0 0 Server F1 Composition Users 52394 Williams fg2 gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 1 4 30p 5p 0 0 n n 1 00 Black 0 7777 gt After all of the strings are compiled a script titled Translation Table Exported will go to the layout where the Translation Table data is located copy it out of the TTL field then perform this AppleSc
202. gs_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 193 F Xtagsand SAHVA pr EPP o A E gt s E CHAPTER If you are not using FileMaker Pro you are really missing out on a world of new possibilities ve found that FileMaker Pro has made automation even easier and has opened up new ways to take scripted material and use it ina user friendly way I ve asked many people if they use FileMaker Pro and they use it for tasks like tracking their time inventory and for listing contact infor mation Meanwhile this person is setting up all of their Xtags strings by hand and having a coding department type in the figure names This can all be tack led using this program I ve also seen people who will at least use BBEdit and perform the Grep searches to get their material in but they are still doing more manual manip ulation than they should be When you can use FileMaker Pro to do the same thing and incorporate all of your Grep searches AppleScripts but make them modifiable based on field information the door opens wide and faster workflows will develop I have spent much time working on databases geared for Xtags Autopage standard designs XML tagging and other publishing areas that were nor mally handled manually or not as efficiently as they could be For example I knew that glossary terms were difficult for one publisher in particular They would send all of the final copy and pay someone to look through each page circle the glo
203. has a total depth of 10p This will underlay the other box lt amp tbu2 0 9p11 40p6 22p k n 1 K n 100 K 10 1 21 12 8 12 t eM gt The code that makes up this box is as follows lt amp pbu2 0 0 40p6 10p n 1 K n 100 100 Solid K 0 m 1 1 56 GB Disk Art Photos jd01 tif gt lt amp tbu2 1p8 2 2p1 9 22p5 5p5 n K n 100 n 100 1 t gt SMP_BX1_HD_S Music Business Profile SMP_BX1_SHD_S Independent Record Companies lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 1p7 6 2p1 22p5 5p5 n K n 100 n 1 0 7 7 gt SMP_BX1_HD Music Business Profile SMP_BX1_SHD Independent Record Companies lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 3p1 8p4 17p7 2p8 n 1 K n 60 100 Solid W 100 1 19 c gt SMP_BX1_SSHD The Rise in the 80s lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 0 9p11 40p6 22p k n 1 K n 100 K 10 1 21 12 8 12 t gt SMP_BX1_F It practically happened overnight lt te gt lt amp g 1 2 3 4 5 gt This would be broken down in the translation table as bb1 lt amp pbu2 0 0 40p6 10p n 1 K n 100 100 Solid K 0 m 1 1 56 GB Disk Art Photos jd01 tif gt lt tbu2 1p8 2 2p1 9 22p5 5p5 n K n 100 n 100 1 t s bb2 lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 1p7 6 2p1 22p5 5p5 n K n 100 n 100 1 t tee gt bb3 lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 3p1 8p4 17p7 2p8 n 1 K n 60 100 Solid W 100 1 n1933 gt
204. he Paginate Window in Autopage The Paginate window in Autopage found in QuarkXPress under the pull down menus at the top of the screen controls the conversion paging and exporting of the document Import Xtags Math Tags XML Tags Running Head Tags Of Oo OD Within this menu there are a variety of buttons that can be selected Autopage 5 8 and 6 0 differ slightly in the numbering You ll see here that you can use this window to do the Get Text with Xtags instead of doing it under File I habitually use File Get Text with Xtags to import my text before I go to the Paginate window but to use the Import Xtags 1 here are the steps 1 Select the Import Xtags MW 1 and select Proceed 2 A window appears to Select Xtags Input File It lets you navigate through the folders Then select the file you want Select Xtags Input File Enable l All Readable Documents HA CI Xtags Book 3 HighVolumePress iam 24 Box w_blends co Xtags_Ch07 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 159 F Chapter 7 Xtags Working with Autopage 159 3 The file will import If there are problems the Xtags error message will appear 4 Xtags will finish and then if other selections are made such as MW 3 XML Tags or Wf 4 Running Head tags Autopage will move on to these Repurposing Content If you are planning on repurposing your Quark content for multimedia it is very important to use Xtags and XMLxt The Paginate wi
205. he hidden Autopage tags as well as links into markup codes that can be used in either Xtags or the stan dard XPress tags depending on what you select in the export window I per sonally always select Xtags because there is more detailed unanchored and anchored picture box and text box information amongst all the other para graph and character style attributes that populate the file If you are using XMLxt and have a workflow already in place you are already working in an XML workflow However if you are not working in an XML workflow but are finding that you need to take paged material and have it XML ready for a customer or yourself you may want to read this chapter on a proven method for doing this m not going to go into details concern ing XML because this chapter is more about how to take the paged file with out XML markup and find a way to have it become XML markup I have found that any content can be exported out of Quark through Xtags via the Autopage Batch Export and can be produced into a workable XML file 175 ae Xtags_Ch08 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 176 p 176 Xtags Maximized This is invaluable because this allows full control over the content compared to using an off the shelf product XML is so specific and this allows you to customize your workflow A few rules need to be followed in the original Quark file to save handwork 1 All text and picture boxes in a floating element need to be grouped together For e
206. he rule will fall below An issue that may occur is if any of the styles are indented such as an extract In this case you would incorporate lt rb 1 Solid K 100 12 0 6 gt This would be on a case by case basis These rules can be added easily in a translation table by just using the codes rule and rule2 BOX_T1 rule This is the closing paragraph BOX_EXT rule2 This is the closing paragraph With the aid of Grep or MacPerl it is very easy to change this based on the style name preceding it but there would have to be a way for it to know the box was ending The markup coding department could put a code boxend at the end of the box that could be swapped out Here s a MacPerl example s BOX_ A boxend 1 rule 2 g I m having MacPerl incorporate the macro for the translation table In order to add the rule2 for the BOX_EXT style you must place this second in the order of the script two 2 s BOX_EXT Mrule 1 2 two 3 g Drop Caps lt d0 gt The Drop Cap tag isn t used as much as usual and typically defaults to the lt d0 gt tag If you do need to have a drop cap defined the tag looks like this lt d 1 2 gt Drop Cap Character Count 1 Line Count 2 Xtags_Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 23 F Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 23 Paragraph Parameters lt p 0 0 0 14 0 0 g U S English gt The paragraph parameters tag has
207. he top and left of the rule and extend the border past the caption This can be tricky but following the steps will get this to work To do this 1 The maximum figure width is 3lp Xx 45p 2 Since the rule will be part of the picture box we ll need to have a 9pt off set on the box and have the additional space built into the width and depth To accommodate the space for the caption we need to add 9pts of additional space to the width I ve found that this is 50 of the additional width or depth needed Don t add in the inset because that doesn t affect the additional spacing Here is the opening picture box tag lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 31p 4p4 5 45p p9 0 5 n 100 m 9 9 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 04 fg04_010 eps gt 3 The text box 7p3 5 TR1 reads off the right corner of the surrounding border and includes the caption width 9 pts for the inset and 5 pt for the border lt G amp tbu2 7p3 5 TR1 9 6p6 21p 1 6 100 55555995 gt 4 The complete tag will look like this with only 2 boxes necessary lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 31p 4p4 5 45p p9 0 5 n 100 m 9 9 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 04 fg04_010 eps gt lt amp tbu2 7p3 5 TR1 9 78 21p gt fgc Figure 2 3 fgn It is very important in photography to pay careful attention to the small details lt te gt lt amp g 2 1 gt Whether you choose Example 1 or 2 you will get the same result Example 2 might b
208. hese are all searchable through the Find Change window Paragraph and Character Tag Differences As shown in Chapter 2 the Paragraph Styles tags normally appear as h3 S h3 lt L gt lt h P3 gt lt kn0 gt lt kt 2 2 gt lt ra 1 Solid K 60 0 0 9 gt lt rb0 gt lt d0 gt lt p 0 0 0 9 0 0 g U S English gt lt P gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt hl00 gt lt z8 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Bembo gt With the new Quark 7 features of Opacity Enable Ligatures Language and OpenType these tags are now expanded shown highlighted below h3 S h3 lt L gt lt h P3 gt lt kn0 gt lt kt 2 2 gt lt ra 1 Solid K 60 50 0 0 9 gt lt rb0 gt lt d0 gt lt p 0 0 0 9 0 0 U S English gt lt P gt lt s100 gt lt p75 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z8 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Bembo gt lt n0 gt lt o dlig smcp gt lt G1 gt The first change above is the 50 for 50 opacity in the 5th field of the Rule Above lt ra gt tag which also works with the Rule Below lt rb gt tag The next addition is the lt p75 gt Text Opacity tag for 75 opacity The lt n0 gt tag is for the Language option in the Character Attributes I have U S English and None as options in my version The U S English gives the lt n0 gt result where lt n254 gt works with None The lt o dlig smcp gt tag is for OpenType see page 220 and the lt G1 gt is for the Enable
209. hing operational Get Text and Save Text with Xtags Get Text with Xtags To import tagged text into the QuarkXPress document using Xtags you can not go about it with the standard Get Text mode that you are used to This Xtags_Ch02 14 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 14 Xtags Maximized will happen by going to File Get Text with Xtags A window will open prompt ing you to find the text file that you want to import There are 5 different buttons that can be selected I typically use the Con vert quotes and Include style sheets options The Convert quotes needs to be selected if you want the to become the smart quote equivalent Include style sheets needs to be selected for Xtags to process the text properly v Convert quotes v Include style sheets Report errors Don t update during import _ Delete file after successful import If you are fairly new to Xtags it is a good idea to have the Report errors option selected so any problems with the tags can be easily located Upon running the text a message will prompt reporting the number of Xtags errors that are in the document Xtags encountered 1 error during import tae the text Xtags error description is left at the point of error 10449 EC Next to the imported text where the error resides will be an error describing what the problem is and where it is in the Xtags string Xtags error Malformed tag tag amp tbu2 param 7 I purpo
210. his is read by the data in the Path to Art field Flim lea Server Al Composition Users 52394 Williams Art The way to get the path to the art is by doing the following This was men tioned earlier in the text but instead of flipping back through the book we ll cover it once again 1 Import an image from the folder you want 2 Click on the image and select in QuarkXPress Edit Copy Xtags Text 3 Create a text box and select Edit Paste The string will come in like this lt amp pbu2 0 0 383 231 n n 100 n m Server Fl Composition Users 52394 Williams Art Chapter 03 52394 f0401 eps gt 4 Copy only the highlighted area after the first quote to right before the word Chapter Paste this information into the Path to Art field Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 205 Chapter 9 Xtags and FileMaker Pro 205 Advanced Options At the bottom of the first page there is a button named Opt 1 Advanced When pressed this button will take you to a new page that has the advanced Xtags options for the Art Placement Option 1 frt Placement Option 1 Advanced Options Job Number Author Last Name Autopage Reference Options Autopage Placement VSI Positioning ture Box Art Advanced amp pbu2 7 Pix Angle comer Radius None Pix Skew Box Skew Angle Flags Placement Color Runaro nd Box Skew 0 os None rner Type M Scale X Box Angle 0 Runaround le Flags
211. ically will go with the easiest solution which would be the d in this case To find Table 10 1 Search for Table d d Replace with Table 9 3 I wrote out the word Table because I couldn t have 19 3 because Grep would interpret this as 19 rather than 1 and a 9 Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 140 140 Xtags Maximized Let s look at another possibility If we needed to look through the docu ment to find the font for lt f Berkeley Italic gt lt f Berkeley Medium gt and lt f Berkeley Bold gt and delete these references we could have several dif ferent ways to handle this w Any word character 0 9 a z A Z etc a z Any lowercase letter A Z Any uppercase letter A Za z Any lower or uppercase letter A Za z Any lower or uppercase letter until proven false alpha Any letter S Any non whitespace character except space tab etc In this case we are left with the option of which way to go here We can do a search for all 3 with a pipe between them or handle it the most obvious way using the w option I feel in this case it is the most direct approach Search for lt f Berkeley w gt Replace with Empty This works well because it will find all the different scenarios of Berkeley that may not have been considered If you wanted to keep some options of Berkeley such as Bold Italic then you would want
212. ich chap ters they want to use in their curriculum Sometimes this isn t just one book in particular It could be several books by different authors This gives the compositor a major challenge How do you take chapters from 4 different titles and make them look like the one book How do you take chapters from Quark 6 5 or 7 and bring that content into Quark 4 1 1 All the while doing this within the required budget My answer is by utilizing Xtags and BBEdit I have done many books like this and I have found that I can successfully execute this by tapping into the power of Xtags When doing a custom pub lishing job its imperative to study the material before starting the project I begin by asking myself the following questions What is the book that all chapters will need to look like Are there any size margin differences that will affect the art Are the fonts the same or will these need to change Will the point size change Did they use the same style sheets for naming similar content Are there new elements that will have to be designed for Is the end matter elements consistent or will they need altering OANA UM BWN Are the references such as Figure 1 1 Table 1 1 etc consistent or do the other books use hyphens between the chapter and figure number 9 Are there references to other chapters or figures 10 If the book is 4 color which colors will need to change for consistency to which new colors Thes
213. ill be offset 9pts around the image This will need to have a p9 TL1 position with 9 at the top By using relative placement for the width we must add the space of the caption space between caption and the 9 pts on the left side of the figure and the right side of the caption This is 6p6 p9 p9 p9 8p9 We ll also need 1p6 for the relative place ment for the white space above and below the image We then have these two relative tags 30p R 8p9 6p and 40p R 1p6 6p 5 By putting all of this together we end up with the following tags lt amp pbu2 10 B 10 31p 45p n 100 m 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 04 fg04_010 eps gt lt amp tbu2 9 TR1 0 6p6 15p gt fgn Figure 2 3 fgc It is very important in photography to pay careful attention to the small details lt te gt lt amp pbu2 9 TL2 9 30p R 8p9 6p 40p R 1p6 6p k 9 n 100 m 5 5 gt lt gG 2 1 gt This is one method of doing this Its very effective and is a good way to learn the relative placement options and taking them a step further Example 2 Using the Rules to Offset The second example is a little less involved and is actually easier with one less grouping Its very similar to the Space Between Rule and Figure example pre viously shown What we ll want to do here is to bring in the image 9pts from Xtags_Ccho4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 79 p Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 79 t
214. ill need 5 points additional depth added with an 18 points first baseline lt amp tbu2 0 0 5 174 150 p5 k n Gn 100 K 15 18 gt The bottom line will need to overlay the screen by 5 point so it can trap properly The complete tags are lt lbu 0 0 0 174 or 4 K 0 Double gt lt amp tbu2 0 0 5 174 150 p5 k n n 100 K 15 18 gt All text goes here lt amp te gt lt lbu 0 BL1 5 0 174 or 4 K 0 Double gt lt g 3 2 1 gt The markup department will need to only have two tags to make this work when using a translation table b1 bx1 All text b2 Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6239 PM Page 125 F Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 125 MathType Anchored with Xtags Many pagers prefer to have their equations anchored in the text flow rather than as floating objects When anchoring a MathType equation do not use the equ Anchor setting Ascent Ascent will cause type to run up alongside the ation unless you put a large amount of space below the equation in the format Depending on the depth of the equation you ll be manually adjust ing most of the equations Ascent would only be used if you had any equations flowing within a paragraph low l If you have equations that sit on their own lines with space above and be Xtags can handle this without any problem Here is where to begin Anchor an equation into the text flow Set this equation 4p
215. inates for placing the images Xtags_Ch0o5 100 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 100 p Xtags Maximized Here is an example of how these 3 pages will layout during the import process when using the Origin Tags I used the Origin Tags on the images and table 4 Chapter 1 The New Direction of Software Since I ve been using Autopage and its uses New Directions in 6 Chapter 1 any say ned the box is being use with XM this ist an any Quark blends st thom as Adobe Photoshop files tags dest curently support blends Iays have the box built perfectly with trapping alignment and so before writing the Nags sings to ensure everything will work oerecly when importing the tex at your findings Once you get going forward you completed manually are now handled this Intro to Second Party Xtensions QuarkXPress and QuarkXPress but the program I ve noticed there are many misconceptions about tcan be wed in many amas of publishing but does not necessarily The layout is achieved by having a runaround on the art tables and captions so the text is pushed forward In the coded file the Origin Tags will need to be called out before the Xtags strings For this example I used a translation table and the o1 and o02 specifiers The tags will be set in the text file as ol 1 Chapter 05 fg0101 eps f2 fgc This is caption 1 f3 o2 1 Chapter
216. ing a blend already created in Photoshop or Illustrator Xtags_Ccho4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 87 F Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 87 Here s an example of an image that would require a blend in the caption Figure 2 This is the caption with the upper right blend behind it that will need to shrink to fit By looking at the above treatment we see that the caption is top right and the blend is behind the caption with a 6 pt inset So how do we achieve this l Build the blend in Photoshop or Illustrator Make sure it is deep enough to accommodate the longest caption For this example I thought it might be 18p maximum depth The First Baseline on the caption will be 1p2 There will also need to be an extra 6 points depth on the text box so add p3 to the depth field lt amp tbu2 12 TR1 0 12p 15p p3 n Gn 100 n 0 1p2 gt The blend will use a picture box at 12p TRI This is the length of the cap tion This will also need a relative placement on the depth The length is obviously going to remain the same lt amp pbu2 12p TR1 0 12p 20p R 0 25 The full code will be as follows lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 25p 24p n n 100 Solid K 0 m 56 GB Disk Xtags fg04_015 eps gt lt tbu2 12 TR1 0 12p 15p p3 n n 100 n 0 14 gt FIG lt FIGN gt Figure 2 lt p gt lt f gt Caption lt amp te gt lt amp pbu2 12p TR1 0 12p 20p R 0 1 k n K n
217. ing isn t always clear cut so don t get discouraged I ve developed the following method when beginning a book For a quick rundown the steps are l Be certain the design s settings and preferences are to the proper com pany specifications 2 Review a copy of the design Go through each page and decide which ele ments will require Xtags and Autopage if you use the program 3 Mark up each page with the necessary macros Autopage tags and Xtags markup If you do not have a coding department you will need to use a program like BBEdit combined with AppleScript to get these into your input document 4 Review the Quality Control printout from Autopage Have a checklist with the variable space bands VSBs to fill out 6 Add the necessary H amp Js to the Quark template Always start with a tem plate of your design This will reduce any possible errors in consistency a 7 Test the difficult Autopage and Xtags setup to verify your calculations and make sure boxes figures and other elements are working correctly Xtags_Ch01 11 27 06 5 41 PM Page 7 Chapter 1 Introduction to Xtags 7 8 Input the Short Line Elimination amounts to the template 9 Add the Headers amp Contents information to the Running Heads If you do not own Headers amp Contents you will have to skip this step 10 Build the Xtags strings and create the translation table 11 Bring in the text for the first chapter and test it to make sure
218. ing to it then it would be very difficult during the repurposing to figure out where it actually goes without referring to the original paged file By the text and the box having a marker a script can be written that can move the type in the text to the area where referenced Here s an example of how this might look in the file With the onset of online shopping auction companies and the ease of use through wireless Internet home business ventures are growing to be where some of the big money lies CC This used to be the case years ago when movies like Raiders of the Lost Ark Star Wars ET etc were being turned out Things have changed ever since television thinks any one on the small screen can transfer over to the big screen bx01 Hollywood in 2004 is a grim situation Studios are less interested in what will NN be remembered 10 years ago and more concerned about which movies will be remembered for about 15 minutes Hard working actresses like Catherine Mary Stewart and Cheryl Pollak rarely get good roles because the fashion flow crowd would rather see Mandy Moore star in her movie because her recent video is on Marker in text You can see the box is floating at the top of the page and below is the text Since the entire text chain exports first and then the boxes and other floating elements the box will export far from its targeted positioning That is where the two markers will bring this together For boxes
219. iple insets This even works if you are using Quark 4 1 1 Once you click the Text Inset button it activates this and then you can add the amount for each field The frame and shading options are the same but there are some columns and baseline information such as the offset baseline minimum etc that need to be filled in as well Columns Baseline Columns 1 Gutter Default Baseline Offset None Baseline Min Ascent Vertical Align Default Top I know this is a database I created and you can t use it off the shelf like other programs but what I m trying to accomplish here is that you can build some thing like this yourself but you need to realize how much information will need to be included to accomplish this Exporting to Translation Table This is one of the most important aspects because based on your scripts field information etc you will need to write a script that takes all of that infor mation and exports it to a BBEdit file to create the translation table This is achieved by writing a script that will go through the database and export information from the calculations Here s an example of how the fg1 and fg2 tags will be built I will start by instructing the script that If Xtags Creator F1 On_Off On If Xtags Creator F1 Figures Yes No On If Xtags Creator F1 Bottom Caption On or Xtags Creator F1 Bottom Caption On Set Field Xtags Creator TTL Xta
220. is may end up taking some extra time but the new discoveries will more than make up for the loss of production time I always find that with each finding so many new doors open up Don t Exceed the Page Size of Document When setting up your picture box tags and captions be sure that the total depth of both boxes doesn t exceed the available space on the page or paste board I ve seen pagers encounter problems importing their images that couldn t get their Xtags to shrink to fit correctly They would have 60p 2 for the image and 20p 2 for the caption but they had only 67p total depth on the pasteboard to work with It s critical not to exceed the maximum space on the page when setting up To do this create a picture box on the pasteboard to see what the maxi mum depth of is Once determined always keep that amount in mind when building boxes and captions Typically you know what the average depth of the caption needs to be so don t feel like you have to exceed that just to avoid overflow I ve found most captions below the figure are typically about Op deep or less This is a good measurement to go with unless they are side captions then the depth is not an issue Importing on the Pasteboard In order for the image box or text box to import onto the pasteboard be sure you always change the first 0 to 0 B as follows lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 etc By putting in 0 B the art will import on the left pasteboard
221. istitem gt lt italic gt height lt italic gt This is the depth height of the text box By typing in the maximum depth of the art can be and adding a question mark the box will lt term gt shrink to fit lt term gt to the depth of the art lt listltem gt lt numberList gt lt chapter gt We ll cover more on markers in floating elements in this next section Know the Content Doing repurposing will be a struggle if you do not know what the end result should be If you want to make an HTML document out of the material it is important to have a working file of one finished chapter so you will know Xtags_Ch0s8 11 27 06 Marker in box pal bx01 Bo Internet Home Businesses 6 48 PM Page 189 F Chapter 8 Repurposing with Xtags 189 what style or content needs to be mapped to which code That is the best way to learn what needs to become what I actually had to take XML coded tables and turn them into HTML tables At first I thought this was going to be a struggle but once I saw what the end result was it only took me a short amount of time to figure out an approach Once I set it up the majority of tables were done in minutes with very little handwork This was from knowing the content ahead of time Floating Element Markers Earlier in this chapter I said that any floating elements need to have a marker The reason for this is that if a box is placed in text but it doesn t have some thing referr
222. it Here s how it would look in the format window Based On Next Style Paragraph Alignment lt L gt This is the alignment of the paragraph The breakdown for the alignment is as follows lt L gt Left alignment lt J gt Justified lt C gt Center alignment lt F gt Forced Justified lt R gt Right alignment Hyphenation and Justification H amp Js lt h Pre P3 gt This is where the H amp J is defined It is very important to have these prede fined Any name can be put in between here but if it doesn t reside in your H amp J list before importing the text it will default to Standard Therefore the best solution is to either have a template that is already created consisting of all of your H amp Js or to have a AppleScript that you can run against your Quark document that will put these in for you ahead of time I find this to be Xtags_Ch02 20 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 20 F Xtags Maximized the best practice A lot of times you are dealing with another company s files and want to have your H amp Js incorporated into those files I actually have an AppleScript that I created that is basically a quality as surance checker It creates the H amp Js fixes the colors and has my preferences just how I want them Here s an example of how I would write the AppleScript for the H amp Js tell application QuarkXPress activate make new h and j spec at beginning of document 1 with make new h
223. it would need to be made as an Adobe Illustrator image After further study I realized that this can be done entirely in QuarkXPress without the aid of outside art programs Here is how this should import LEARNING PICTURE BOX TAGS The purpose for working through all of these examples is to get the user more familiar with the different aspects of the pro gram It seems that a lot of people work with software like this for years but fail to break new ground out of not having prop er direction This is where the corner type comes into play to get the perspective effect on the title bar Due to the complexity of this box I have two choices on the number of boxes needed I can have four boxes by keeping all of the type to gether or I can reduce it to three boxes by keeping the title in the bar and breaking the text there Since XML is the direction a lot of companies are go ing it would probably be best to do with the text flow together by using four boxes Here is how to achieve this 1 The text box for the title is very basic with no special handling The main issue is going to be the positioning Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 108 108 Xtags Maximized 2 The 15 gray picture box behind the title needs no special handling out side of the screen and the frame around it 3 The black perspective bar is where we run into our first real issue This is done through Xtags using the straight corner type with
224. ive Technique lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 49 38 23p 15p k n n 100 n gt All the text here lt Q te gt lt amp g 1 2 3 4 gt Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 124 6 39 PM Page 124 Xtags Maximized Using Lines for Top and Bottom of Box This is an example of a picture box requiring lines to be at the top and the bottom of the screen This appears easy on the surface where the pager could probably include the lines using the rules in the formats but this is one of those situations where you have to look close at the example The purpose for working through all of these examples is to get the user more familiar with the different aspects of the program It seems that a lot of people work with software like this for years but fail to break new ground out of not having proper direction The line at the top and the bottom has a 0 Black Gap to give the White effect between the two lines If you were using a rule above in the formats the Gap is not available so it will end up with this effect instead The purpose for working through all of these examples is to get the user more familiar with the different aspects of the Notice how the gray is showing through the rules That is why we need to use the unanchored line tags instead so this will be white To do this properly l This is very basic Start the box with the unanchored line followed by the screened unanchored text box The text box w
225. ized This book has received a lot of positive feedback from pagers and setup spe cialists all over the world Upon writing the first book I knew that I would one day write a book on Xtags because it has always been one of my favorite soft ware packages to use I have written two other books in the past year and this being my second software title I also write screenplays when time permits with one titled Dream Theater which was released as a book this past August I currently run my own company High Volume Press where I concentrate on self publishing as well as producing textbooks through paging and layout Autopage and Xtags setup scripting design custom publishing consulting training repurposing and database creation Darryl J Keck Xtags_FM 11 27 06 5 38 PM Page xi LZ LS EET LF TEA began writing Xtags Maximized almost as soon as I completed the Autopage 6 Automating the Pagination Process book back at the beginning of 2005 Chris Ryland from Em Software had discussed with me the possibly of writing an Xtags book and I liked the idea of it but I had just started working as an au tomation specialist for a company which I knew was going to take most of my time Therefore it was put on the back burner for quite awhile Whenever I d think of something new or unique concerning Xtags I would write it down in a notebook or enter it on my laptop Before long I had so much information that I couldn t keep myself from
226. k to fit properly I have tried different things like only using 1 column and then adding the supplementary columns later but depending on how lines break you still have to do some adjusting I have found that this does come closer to the actual finished size in most cases There s really no perfect science when it comes to multi column layouts Bringing it in as a single column is an option or just realize that the columns are set correctly and the biggest adjustment will be to the text and closing box depth That is if there isn t some decorative element at the bot tom of the page Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 112 p 112 Xtags Maximized Here s an example of how the text will pull in with a 2 column layout when there isn t enough text to fill the full depth of both columns Even with the shrink to fit option the text still fills the first column then starts the next using the full depth Entertainment Problems and Solutions Has the Creative Side in Hollywood Dwindled Problem Point 1 Creative movies are not the focal point any more in Hollywood This used to be the case years ago when movies like Raiders of the Lost Ark Star Wars ET etc were being turned out Hollywood in 2004 is a grim situation Studios are less interested in what will be remembered 10 years ago and more con cerned about which movies will be remem bered for about 15 minutes Hard working Problem Point 2 The regurgated
227. kf NewBaskerville Roman gt The differences between software and hardware lt z9 5c Red01 f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z11ckf NewBaskerville Roman gt How the Internet and other forms of communication such as Instant Messaging has changed the way we communicate internally within businesses lt z9 5c Red01 f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z11ckf NewBaskerville Roman gt Describe some methods companies can use to strengthen their business using the Internet and email lt z9 5c Red01 f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z11ckf NewBaskerville Roman gt Appreciate the important ways in which we look for new ways to take software to quicken tasks by using scripts and other automation methods lt amp pbu2 57 167 480 347 592 n K n 100 100 Solid W 100 0 m 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images ch09_image1 eps gt 4 The first thing that is most noticeable here is that the style names are going to be different than the original book and that the objectives have the bullets which will need to be removed To do this it is best to do Grep searches or write these in AppleScript We ll start by doing a Grep search through BBEdit that will change these Find amp Replace Search For O M Use Grep Patterns fe Find Replace lt Z Start at Top Search Selection Only _ o i Replace All_ Wrap Around _ Extend Selection _ Search Backwards C Don t Find _ Case Sensitive _ Match Entire Words gt Cancel
228. king opens up the doors for far too many issues When pasting in it s too easy to change the font and not change the point size or leave tracking on that should be removed There are too many variables that need to be addressed Don t leave yourself wide open to errors Typically you will have more than one chapter that you are going to be using from other books For that reason whenever l m doing Grep searches in BBEdit I find myself making an AppleScript to record the replacements so they can be reused throughout the process Let s start by going through this process just starting with the first page Typically I do the entire document but for learning purposes we need to start slow 1 First go through and make sure the images are all updated 2 Go through and select the text from the chapter number to the end of the objectives Then select Edit Copy Xtags Text 3 Open up BBEdit and paste this information into a new document For this title the text appeared as follows ch_cn 9 ch_ct Can Second Party Software be the Best Investment ch_objt Objectives Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 143 F Chapter 6 Custom Publishing 143 ch_obj lt z9 5c Red01 f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z1 1cKf NewBaskerville Roman gt Understand the relationship between lt f Times Italic gt computer software lt f Times Roman gt and how it impacts our daily lives from commuting to leisure time lt z9 5c Red01 f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z11c
229. le will not work properly Similar to most scripting languages the translation table can have lines that are commented out so you can make notes To do this the first charac ter in the document defines what the comment character needs to be Out of habit I always use the because I rarely see this used anywhere To comment any line this character must be placed before the line you want to write notes or comments on The example at the top of the next page shows how an Xtags translation table written in BBEdit should appear This translation table shows 2 types of figures tables and a few other items thrown in including a layout change I ve actually had medical books that were so involved that my translation table exceeded 4 pages That is un common but it proves how critical it is to understand how this works Translation Table Start Tag Whenever a file needs to be imported a tag has to start the text file in order for the file to import the translation table information If the file name is book ttl the tag at the beginning of the text file will need to read lt amp tt2 book ttl gt Using this tag requires that the translation table be saved in the folder with the template If working on a server this allows anyone to be able to work Xtags_Ch02 34 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 34 p Xtags Maximized autopagebook ttl translation table for autopagebook xtags figures f1 f2 f
230. ll still be some adjustments that have to be made to the code but its min imal compared to the labor intensive way of manually setting up your boxes and art One might ask Why do people still do this by hand This is one of the more troubling questions facing the publishing industry After years of paging and setup I will always do the up front work to reduce as many man ual tasks as possible Enough time is utilized with the pagination process that it s senseless to manually create art and floating elements mm Xtags Fields Xtags uses comma separated fields to process the detailed information for im porting boxes and images The following shows a complete string for im porting art lt amp pbu2 0 0 46 59 0 0 n 0 K n 100 100 Solid n 0 0 m 100 100 0 0 0 0 Hard Drive APManual Art ch_001 eps gt These are the fields needed to pull in the referenced piece of art At first this can be somewhat confusing but remember that the pbu2 is for import ing an unanchored picture box and amp tbu2 is for importing an unanchored text box There are a multitude of uses for these strings 41 ae Xtags_Ch03 42 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 42 Xtags Maximized With Xtags a pager or setup person really needs to know what each field represents between the commas It s very important to be aware of these because you will need to make adjustments I ve heard many arguments from people that it is important to
231. lot of extra time Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 216 p 216 Xtags Maximized This would be accomplished by simply changing names in the replacements where the Xtags string would bring in box_stylel eps and if Style 2 was selected it would replace for box_style2 eps Consistency in naming is very important to reduce the chance for errors E Database Production Benefits In the past couple of years I ve found the use of FileMaker Pro databases to be a very efficient practice to achieve automation It is so user friendly and allows you a single location to store all scripts associated with the project and being able to call them in with the use of the database field content This is why I suggest to anyone who wants to get the most value out of their prepress dollar to consider building their own databases for their pro duction departments They can be server based and password protected to keep the scripting secure That is one of the problems I find with just using AppleScripts among many users is that anyone can go in and change these and you might end up with different versions on your server In order to really get the value out of a database it is important to have time to commit to one You can get started and have something useable but it is important to be able to stay on it until it is completed The best way to do this is come up with an idea draw out how you plan to get there and then find gaps in
232. m gt lt g 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1 gt This looks worse than it is The translation table coding for this would be b1 RB Review Box 12 1 b2 rbtx all text here b3 Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 130 6 39 PM Page 130 p Xtags Maximized Expand or Shrink to Fit with Graduated Screen This is a good use of use of the 16 field s f expand or fit to size option This is used in the picture box that brings in the graduated screen It leaves the width at 100 but reduces the depth of the screen to the depth of the text while maintaining the blend Important Points Remember these important points e Try to use as few boxes as possible during the set up If can use insets or First Baseline to accomplish this l Il spend a little extra time to keep the boxes as user friendly as possible e Make sure if setting up for XMLxt usage that the text can read through without any text breaks otherwise the XML will not stay well formed If the box isn t being used with XMLxt this isn t an issue e If there are any Quark blends set them as Adobe Photoshop files because Xtags doesn t currently support blends To automate this box l Position the text box at 1p2 x and 2p4 y The box will shrink to fit and youll need a Multiple Inset of 12 9 4 9 for the text positioning Relative to this box will be the graduated screen that is an art file that needs to maintain the 100 width but shrink to fit
233. ma gt lt k0 gt lt Bf StoneSans Bold gt lt t0 gt Although this may appear to be a lot of work it really makes it easier through out all the chapters Each time you have to change a box you merely need to run this against the boxes The only real problem I anticipate in dealing with boxes is if they weren t set up with Xtags to begin with and were put together by hand You can get all kinds of mixed results because the pager may not have grouped them prop erly did manual overrides etc In this case you may just want to regroup them and write one long replacement string that can catch everything regard less of what the numbers are This is why I always say you need to know your content Don t just assume that everything is going to be correct during the export Look through a chapter to see what you are dealing with first In Closing Although there is so much more we could cover on the possibilities with cus tom publishing this should give you a great place to begin More of this type of work is going to be available in the future as more publishers are setting their sights on custom publishing This is something you should really learn Xtags_ChO7 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 157 F ETEA dae Up Ke ee lef CHAPTER Autopage may only being used by a percentage of the Xtags users but it is a very important subject to discuss because it will increase your productivity more than you can imagine I feel if you are a pag
234. marine life yet ISR H1 V 2 L H1_BAR are are being destroyed due to pollution erosion and other factors i ONERE lt p gt lt f gt lt f gt wast caused by humans Many are out to protect coral reefs by using SS fic Goral Reefs S enfored licies Most of these are maintained by fisherman and TE aai rodan A 5 aa biologists who Reep_an eye out for dangers to them ES 3 South Pacific Coral Reef H2 Ecosystem of Coral Reefs Coral reefs are one of the most intricate Reefs in the South Pacific are rarely touched due to the lack of tourism gk Tee Chap 98 in nature Some are believed to have survived for millions T1 outside of the Hawaii region Black sand beaches are very common in Styl o H4 AF of years but due to pollution erosion and other factors most caused Hawaii There s Moana Loa and Moana Kea and there s the Road to tyle lt H4 gt by humans Many are out to protect coral reefs by using enforcement Hana which is part of the Maui landscape but a treacherous road will policies The reefs are important to plants fish and any life form take you to it Not for the faint hearted but worth the drive The dependent on them scenery along the way is nothing short of breathtaking The most common type of lava seawater explosion is known as x Use TR B1 at reference Tephra Jets There s also Punalw u Black Sand Beach in Hawaii Type b1 T B1 at start of box before BT
235. ment whoa the hing needed woul go oto my way totam ste ware also want to help people who sometimes get a little confused on where to start It s one thing to set up a book in Autopage but it s another to get the Xtags Headers amp Contents XMLat and even the QuarkXPress docu ment set up properly The more you have working correctly up front the less chance there will be of unforeseen problems later in the project What is Second Party Software One of the prerequisites to be successful with this book is that you have used tugs A valuable Xtags before preferably on an actual project Also I feel it s necessary that you have QuiriXPrss Xienson shat read through the Xiags Manual by Em Software Inc which is an invaluable refer works withthe code ence guide It s to me that there would not be a need for this book approach 1 m t have a distin is through my st p approach helpi keep referring back to certain sections to pull instruction like this and I always retain somethir iby see Iwo for both ory be some degree espec he heaviest time of the produc d you re in the middle of several books It is sometimes difficu project relies heavily on the upfront setup of Xtags This book has not covered every asper e because that is n objective is to sho FIGURE 9 1 m Leisure time for couples is spent more frequently g out of the prog Objectives using laptops the program in a differ
236. more often in home repair books but I ve found that this is typ ically something that happens in QuarkXPress rather than on the actual image This is where there are illustrated step by step instructions showing what order to do the work in Since the author may at some point add a step they do not want the number to be part of the image That is why it s the pager s responsibility to group this with the image Here s an example Xtags_Ccho4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 89 F Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 89 As you can see the number lands in the bottom left corner with a white rule around it However the white rule is only on the top and the right of the 20 gray numbered box Here is how we would accomplish this 1 Bring in the image but make sure there s a slight adjustment on the image I put a 25 on both the width and depth of the image to make sure there is no extra white space around the image lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 35p 25 40p 25 The box with the number in it will need to be positioned at the bottom left corner with a 1p6 5 y coordinate The depth of the box is 1p6 5 so this will fit in perfectly lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 1p6 5 1p2 5 1p6 5 We are now going to incorporate two lines into this This is where youll get to use some ingenuity to make this happen The first line needs to position at the top left O TL1 x and 0 y of the numbered text box lt lbu 0 TL1 0 0 14 5 or 1 W
237. mp pbu2 3 B 3 42p 5 45p 2 5 n 3 22 n 25 100 Solid K 0 m 0 3 0 3 56 GB Disk Images Chapter 04 fg04_012 eps gt lt amp pbu2 3 TL1 3 42p R p6 1 45p R p6 1 k n 3 28 Gn 45 100 Solid K 0 m gt lt tbu2 0 BL1 7 42p R 0 1 6p6 gt f5 Portofino of boats lt amp te gt lt amp g 3 2 1 gt Caption Top Source Line Bottom At first glance this appears very easy but you d be surprised on how difficult this can be to some pagers I ve actually seen them bring the source into the figure caption at the top and then create a text box below the image and link to it Upon the linking they readjust the spacing which is extra work FIGURE 1 1 San Francisco s Golden Gate Bridge is one of America s most popular landmarks Source goes here Xtags_Ccho4 86 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 86 p Xtags Maximized The way to approach this without the hand manipulation is l Start with a text box bringing in the caption followed by a picture box Just like the standard top caption positioning Following the picture box have another text box start This will be coded as follows lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 24p 6p gt fgc lt fgn gt Figure 1 1 lt f gt lt f gt lt i gt lt p gt San Francisco s lt amp te gt lt amp pbu2 0 BL1 10 24p 50p n n K 0 c 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 04 fg04_013 eps gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 7 24p R 0 0 4p gt fgs
238. mp tbu2 0 BL2 18 10p6 12p n G n 100 N 55555 gt All box text here lt te gt lt g 1 2 3 4 gt Many possibilities can happen with the Fit to Height and Fit to Width option This is a good feature to practice with Try different scenarios to see what you can come up with In Closing While this is a very good sampling of what can be done with the figures and captions it is just scratching the surface The next chapter is going to look at boxes We will be using techniques we used in this chapter while throwing in some even more advanced features to go beyond what many might con sider the boundaries of Xtags Xtags_Ch0O5 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 97 Creating Boxes Jemen CHAPTER The past couple chapters have given you some background on what can be done with the text box picture box and line tags Xtags offers so many op tions that practically any type of box from basic to complicated can be cre ated if you take the time and develop an approach I have rarely seen a floating element that I could not accomplish using Xtags The most difficult situations have been boxes that exceed one page Most others can be accomplished with a strategy on where to begin The goal when building boxes is being able to use them many times throughout the project so there needs to be consistency The most obvious thing to consider when you are building a box is to ig nore the fact if the element is in color to begin with I ve witness
239. mplished by changing the or der of the text box and picture box They are virtually the same other than the order of the captions FIGURE 3 Top Caption Example lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 280 48 gt FIG lt FIG_NUM gt Figure 3 lt p gt Top Caption Example lt amp te gt lt amp pbu2 0 BL1 9 280 289 n n 100 K 0 m Macintosh HD Art road eps gt lt g 1 2 gt ae Xtags_Ch03 54 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 54 Xtags Maximized Bottom Caption From working with hundreds of textbooks over the years it s been my expe rience that the bottom caption seems to be the way the majority of textbooks are set up You ll see figures set in a lot of different ways but on average this is the treatment that is seen most often As a result it is the best one to start with in the translation table as a standard FIGURE 4 Bottom Caption Example lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 280 289 n n 100 Solid K 0 m Macintosh HD Art city tif gt lt tbu2 0 BL1 9 280 48 gt FIG lt FIG_NUM gt Figure 4 lt p gt Bottom Caption Example lt amp te gt lt g 1 2 gt Side Caption Bottom Left The secret to the bottom left caption is thinking it out ahead of time Obvi ously to have the caption bottom align with the figure requires using the bottom vertical alignment b Then I need the figure to read off of the bot tom of the figure so the caption cannot come in first As you can see from the Xtags strin
240. n the user might be used to After following through the book and learning how to do all of the procedures Chapter 9 is full of step by step examples that will give you an opportunity to apply the various functions of the program and it s many uses Xtags_Ch0O4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 75 F Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 75 So this is a very powerful feature and if used properly will open the door to new possibilities This function works with both unanchored and anchored picture boxes I would suggest working with this feature and trying different scenarios to understand where it will help you later Forced Anchored Leading Forced Leading is another optional parameter that works with only anchored text and picture boxes How this works is by using the upper or lowercase L parameter within the height tag Similar to how this worked with the Fit to Height option The code would be written like this lt amp pb 4p f 2p6 L This automatically adjusts the leading on the line containing the anchored object The program PowerMath appeared to give this type of result with the equations Here s an example using baseline anchoring of what would hap pen if you anchored the image without using the L option My main objective is to show the user how to get more out of the program by approaching the program in a different manner than the user might be used to B _ work with the examples and see if you
241. nd they tend to flow fairly well They usually have some end matter pages requiring a certain treat ment By breaking the pages using the lt b gt tag I place lt b gt directly before the style that falls on that page calling in the Master Page For example CN Chapter 1 CT Learning the Code TX1 The always more than one way to do something lt b gt lt amp mpf 2 gt WKST Worksheet 1 WK List what you have learned about picture boxes WKL lt 009 gt WKL lt 009 gt WKL lt 009 gt WKL lt 009 gt Here are the first two pages The Master Page 2 which is Master Page B is called out right before WKST Worksheet 1 CHAPTER 1 Worksheet 1 List what you have learned about picture boxes Learning the Code The purpose for working through all of these examples is to get the user more familiar with the different aspects of the program It seems that a lot of people work with software like this for years but fail to break new ground from lack of direction The goal is to show as many different examples as possible covering all of the picture and text box options through the examples It s one thing to read about them and another to see the strategies in action Remember there s always more than one way to do something Master Page A Master Page B Xtags_Ch02 38 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 38 p Xtags Maximized The lt b gt for
242. ndation of all boxes and images This chapter is going to break into expanding what you know about working with figures and getting away from the hand manipulation that you might be used to doing We ll start by covering a little more about some of the options available with the unanchored and anchored tags E Shrink to Fit Capabilities In the last chapter it was mentioned a little bit about the shrink to fit capa bilities of the unanchored and anchored picture and text box tags This is something that gives power to what you are trying to achieve By putting in a 2 following the width or depth the box will shrink up to the content Because of this you will usually not have to do any hand manipulation after wards The only time this does not work is on the width of the text box because Xtags does not know what width it would need to shrink to By using 67 ae Xtags_Ccho4 68 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 68 p Xtags Maximized relative placement there are possibilities here but we ll cover that in the next section To shrink to fit a box the code will reflect this lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 29p 48p There will be times when you want to cheat this a little For example you may want the figure to have a 5 rule around it and want the image to trap within the rule to avoid any white lines between the image and the rule In this case you would need the shrink to fit to reduce the size by 1 point To do this you would subtract
243. ndow and the Batch Export option have the ability to export the tags with many options for both XML and for Xtags exporting M 11 XML Export MART C Pathname C PAGE M 12 Export with Xtags KS O lt gt Of Oo OD M Convert Tags __ Delete Tags v Del Numbers v Ignore Missing Link M Captions M Notes C All v Layouts v XML M Tag Unlinked Art C Convert Link l Embed Notes 1stID 1 vi Use Styles W 11 is for XML exporting and 12 exports the document including all art text layout changes floating elements etc into Xtags or XPress Tags The Xtags export is more specific so this is another added bonus to owning the program When I ve done roundtripping where I ve taken regular tagged Quark files and converted them to finished XML products the Xtags export made the content in a workable format where everything came together All text boxes floating elements etc were all useable Then I decided what I needed could delete what was unnecessary find the picture and text boxes tbu2 amp pbu2 etc and multipurpose that con tent into XML The main use currently with f 11 and 12 is for an XML workflow using the XMLxt XTension If you have a workflow that supports XMLxt you have probably used this at some stage The thing about this is that you can get any text that sits in the text area of the entire document to export so that it can be used later I will go into more detail concerning this in Chapter 8
244. ned the most difficult medical or mathematics book I was still under budget with my paging and setup The main focus of Autopage should be to reduce the time spent on man ual pagination and for overall consistency of the page layout This has become critical not only for staying profitable in your business but also for staying competitive with foreign companies who can do the same work in the same time at a fraction of the price because of lower overhead and reduced labor 157 ae Xtags_ChoO7 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 158 F 158 Xtags Maximized costs Autopage combined with Xtags can give a pager the edge if used effec tively and proficiently Autopage can be used in many areas of publishing including but not lim ited to books catalogs and telephone books The further you push yourself into this program the easier your job will become Initially the learning curve might seem overwhelming but the more you use the program the easier many of the tasks will become Every year textbook designers go beyond the previous margins of creativity so it s very possible that the functions you learn about today with Xtags and Autopage will be necessary features in an upcom ing project I m going to touch on some different areas of Autopage that can be enhanced by using Xtags in combination While non users may get a little lost here you can at least see some advanced features of the program and how Autopage and Xtags works together E T
245. ner radius and the corner type for rectangular boxes only The corner types are as follows C v convex rounded corners C c concave inverted S for straight corners are angled and straight To get the corner radius you ll need to place twice the amount of the needed corner radius For example 1 6p will give a 1 point frame with a 3p corner radius Here s an example of a tagged frame 5 2p s For a circle oval you will need to use the o optional parame ter You cannot have a corner radius on this because this tag does n t accept it To get a circle with a lpt frame use this code or The corner radius and corner type combinations are something you have to work with to get the hang of I recently created a FileMaker Pro database to use in correlation with Xtags and getting all these com binations to work required a lot of additional scripting 10 frame color Frame color will default to black however if you need a color type it in the field with the color between quotes Cyanl or PANTONE DS 10 6 C An optional parameter is also included in the color for the Frame Gap which would be used on rules like Double or Thin Thick Thin The first color is for the Frame the second for the Frame Gap as seen here Color_05 Color_01 If standard frames are used without the Frame Gap simply putting the color in the field is acceptable If the color is left off com pletely it
246. ng After Import 1 Place a text box over the area of the art you desire to be positioned in the text area In this case the box could be no larger than the 20p column width 2 In this box put the art reference and the C O The C O can be part of the reference or the object I usually choose the object to keep track 3 When placed the extra portion of the image will push out either left or right depending on the set up This keeps the image from using two columns of space Bringing in with Xtags To have an image import with the C O positioned perfectly around the art using Xtags requires some real planning You ll want the caption to be part of the text box around the portion of the image that is in the text area only To achieve this 1 The Xtags string is going to need relative placement vertically starting at the top left of the image extending 20p then extending the full length of the photo with 2p extra at the end allowing for caption placement The Xtags strings will be lt amp pbu2 10p B 0 30p 46p4 n K W 100 100 K 0 m 56 GB Disk AP_Book Art Photos flowers3 tif gt lt tbu2 Op TL1 0 20p 46p4 R 2p 1 n K W 100 100 n b gt F_CAP This is the caption with C O A 1 C O lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt Xtags_Ch07 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 173 Chapter 7 Xtags Working with Autopage 173 2 The sample below shows the caption only space with a dotted line around th
247. ng boxes art and overriding style sheets The up front time spent on coding the sample would have been saved throughout the project In my opinion a successful cost effective project relies heavily on the up front setup of Xtags Xtags_Cho1 11 27 06 5 41 PM Page 5 p Chapter 1 Introduction to Xtags 5 There isnt that much art in the book It will be faster to just bring it in manually over creating the translation table I have to admit that there have been times where I thought that would be quicker but I found that it is still faster to have the art coded for Xtags and then have it import in It is so much easier to have it auto import rather than having to open up the server find the folder and then import in the images Even if there are only 5 figures in the chapter the translation table still is faster The secret is to have a standard translation table where you just fix the width depth and path to the art I will cover this in greater detail in Chapter 2 Increase Your Value as a Pager At a minimum in the upcoming years a pager will need to be very proficient at the following programs XTensions QuarkXPress 6 5 and 7 Xtags AppleScript Autopage FileMaker Pro XMLxt BBEdit with its text editing capabilities or MacPerl for having more control over the functionality POV SR ae Bo If you cannot become skillful with these programs your value as a pager greatly diminishes That i
248. ng why nothing was happening I in structed this person to work with BBEdit instead After enough situations like this he finally took my advice and he has had a better experience since Translation Table Issue When setting up the translation table be very careful that you do not end up with a line with just one character space on it The text will pull in with all of the words running into each other Here is an example of how the text pulled in when this happened Arecentadditionthatwasmadetothe5 8versionwastheabilitytoexport thetextbacktoan rtfdocument Thisisagreatfeaturethatgivespublisher stheabilitytoreturnthewordfiles Once the single character space was removed A recent addition that was made to the 5 8 version was the ability to export the text back to an rtf document This is a great feature that gives publishers the ability to return the word files This can happen accidentally by just moving too quickly through the trans lation table If you happen to see text importing this way backtrack through the translation table and look for a single space character sitting on it s own line remove it and resave the ttl file Test the Codes Before the Translation Table Tm going to mention a serious error that many setup people are guilty of It is not testing the codes before putting them in their translation table They do a Copy Xtags Text and Paste Then because it came in that way they believe it is correct This is a b
249. not be a need for this book if I did w n t have a distinguishing approach to the material Where I feel this book is w ing you achieve the task without Quart XPress Xenon that cays retain something once I d ory better than tions of various tasks This could be see some degree espes time of the product the middle of several bool aside the neces about descrip igure 9 1 wa justifiable exe focus and complete the up front tasks The spent on coding the sa This book has not covered every aspect of Autopage because that is not my intention M FIGURE 9 1 Leisure time for couples is spent more frequently Objectives using laptops Understand the relationship between computer softwareand how it impacts our daily lives through the book and learning how to do all of the procedures C from commuting to leisure time danced k through of these concepts at you ll learn some new and important B The differences between software and hardware nselves more pro ly know but my hope is m How the Internet and other forms of n such as Instant Messaging has changed the way we communicate internally within businesses B Describe some methods companies can use to stre and email ot ange i ae The Impact on Profitability B Appreciate the important ways in which we look for new ways to take software to quicken Since I ve been using the program I ve noticed ther
250. nto collectible magazines and designing collectible books for Antique Trader Publications Antique Trader Publications was a great place where I did all the design and paging on the book including art using Adobe Photoshop and Aldus Freehand No employer I ve since worked with allowed that much creativity and versatility The need for learning so much software made it very possible to pick up other programs quickly Following Antique Trader I took a position at Times Mirror Higher Educa tion TMHE in its pagination department At Times Mirror Wm C Brown Pub lishing I again worked with QuarkXPress but I also saw the use of Penta and thought that Quark really needed something code driven that would auto mate some of the manual work we were doing After leaving TMHE to return to Antique Trader Books I ran into a former colleague from TMHE who told me of a new position she held at a local com position company I began working there shortly after where was introduced to Xtags In my spare time I would push the program as far as I could take it Pd search through previously paged books looking for boxes tables or anything that looked challenging and figure out a way to achieve them even if it required additional scripting I ve always had a passion for writing and in late 2005 I wrote my first book on the program Autopage titled Autopage 6 Automating the Pagination Process ix ae Xtags_FM 11 27 06 5 38 PM Page x F x Xtags Maxim
251. ntosh HD Automation Folder Wexler Wexler_ch03 txt with full list elements containing box and style definitions end tell The time saver here is that I already have the file named how I want the ele ments saved and the location it will be saved in Copy and Paste Xtags Copy Xtags Text Similar to the Save Text with Xtags is the Copy Xtags Text option I use this heavily when figuring out my boxes localized style overrides and anchored Xtags_Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 17 F Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 17 text I can usually write these out because I m so familiar with the program but I suggest that this is where you start It leaves a lot less to chance Let s take this example below It s a very basic example of a numbered list where the number requires a 20 gray circle The number needs to reside within the circle 2 See the previous figure By seeing this example I would do the following to figure out the proper kerning baseline shift etc 1 After getting this set up properly select the text from the start of the cir cle to the word See Make sure you have a character style applied to the bullet 2 Go to Edit Copy Xtags Text 3 Either make a text box off to the side or open BBEdit Paste the copied text into the file It will read as SNL1 lt SNL_Bullet gt lt k 60 gt 1 lt p gt lt b0 5 gt 4 lt f gt lt f gt lt b0 gt See 4 This is exactly what you want You can now achiev
252. nts The font was written to always default to Times but if you want to use a font such as Giovanni you would need a script that goes through and does the following tell application BBEdit amp activate f amp If Style Fields Text Font Giovanni replace Times Roman using Giovanni Book searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false 4 amp end tell Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 212 F 212 Xtags Maximized To replace the italics and bold of this font you would just have the replace lines do the following replace Times Bold using Giovanni Bold searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false 4 amp replace Times Italic using Giovanni Bookltalic searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false 4 amp This is the best way to handle the fonts that I have found The problem isn t that you couldn t just use the information in the field but the fonts have a cer tain way they have to be identified that is more difficult for the user It
253. o be deleted like this lt p 36 36 0 13 5 0 g U S English gt This would need the following deletion Search for lt p d 2English gt Replaced with Leave Blank I think you get the idea on the deletions that need to occur Xtags_Ch08 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 182 182 Xtags Maximized 6 Next I start mapping the XML to the necessary DTD based on the style sheet names The first thing I will need in the XML file is the starting tag This is very easy with Grep The A code matches at the beginning of the first line We know that this needs to be the tag for the XML Depending on your DTD different possibilities can occur We ll just put in the a stan dard tag for demonstration purposes Search for A Replaced with lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt r End Result lt xml version 1 0 encoding UTF 8 gt 7 The first tag following the XML tag will be the chapter number style CFN beginning style sheet The text file shows CEN Chapter 1 To get this to work with a Grep Find and Replace Search for CFN Chapter 1 r Replaced with lt chapter num 3 id ch 00 0 3 gt 4 End Result lt chapter num 3 id ch 00 0 3 gt 4 8 The title is a lot easier because you are only dealing with the start and end of this There is no extra handling needed Search for CFT 2 r Replaced with lt chapter title gt 2 lt chapter
254. o either re import and al ter this which isn t a possibility if the file is paged or export each page care fully and fix the file by deleting the lt cC gt tag I would go through and on this line I would re import it using this text t1 lt cK gt The teacher lt A 3 A1C 003 000 007 lt ITAL gt 474 gt lt cK gt This will solve the color issue If you imported a lot of styles and converted the tags a major problem may be on your hands I ve seen this happen to a couple pagers and they spent hours correcting the problem Thankfully Xtags could get in there and correct the problem or it would have been more of a headache to put back into working order Xtags_Ch0O3 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 41 When I was first introduced to Xtags almost 10 years ago the picture and text box tags were the big selling point I had no idea how much time I had wasted prior to realizing the power that lies in these tags alone Many automation awakenings happened for me upon learning about Xtags The direction I took working with software was never the same following this discovery Manually building boxes and bringing in art by hand is like taking a trip by horse and buggy You ll reach the same destination but it will take you ten times as long As long as the objective is the same why not arrive in style and ahead of schedule That is where the power really lies here I could not work without the text and picture box tags nor would I There wi
255. o oO araroa wo a a a a O S Gy O Xo Xo iH Sor GOON Cc oO E Layton Ray Ray ss Ss On Enh Orci Uns Us I son E CNN waa CNN nrxvnr nana r VEA eg maky 5 c O N SEON N SNA z OM HO Oo m sO fa CaM aan VR e eo W NN m 5 N oO av N 2 Rand d ao oA DO AMOnDAG ANMOnnaAaAN Rogar Ow Roane Ow r A Wey Wey ab m e tt WM NN St Sort e rm o 3 oe CS EF Hoen BOSSene k A aTe Te y RAS Sil e e Toasts oeSs DOr eO GO F ZAA BAnnraAaDS For a rotated table l Bring in an unrotated text box and group this box on top of the existing rotated table lt amp tbu2 95 B 95 61 25 90 n n 100 n gt tbl T 1 lt amp te gt 2 The table will eventually need to be rotated 90 but for now leave it unro tated so you can set your tabs adjust etc The shrink to fit doesn t work well with the rotation so this is the best way to start The x and y paste Xtags_ChO7 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 163 F Chapter 7 Xtags Working with Autopage 163 board positioning will be at 80 x so when rotated there is room for the rotation Here s an example of the table code lt amp tbu2 80 B 80 30p 45p n 0 5 Gn 100 K 10 7 7 7 4 555555 gt 3 The T ID object tag will be in the small rotated text box After you have adjusted the tag rotate the text 4 The table will now page properly Here is the full code lt amp tbu2 95 B 95 41 25 90 n n 100 n gt t
256. ode lt pbu2 0 TL1 0 21p R 0 0 24p R 0 0 k n 5 3 The final code to get this result is lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 21p 24p n Gn 100 n 9 9 11 9 gt ttl Note nt Text lt te gt lt pbu2 0 TL1 0 21p R 0 0 24p R 0 0 k n 5 n 100 M Disk 1 CH 05 fg004 eps gt lt g 1 2 gt 4 The translation table would contain these two parts tl lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 21p 15p n Gn 100 n 9 9 11 9 5 gt t2 lt amp te gt lt amp pbu2 0 TL1 0 21p R 0 0 24p R 0 0 k n 5 n 100 M Disk 1 CH 05 fg004 eps gt lt g 1 2 gt Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 105 p Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 105 Example of a Two Box Approach with Relative I thought this would be a good example to demonstrate rounded corners and how to offset slightly using relative placement The approach to take on this box is to keep it to two boxes if possible When first looking at this it appears that this will not be possible but I as sure you it is The main thing to look for is what can be put into the style sheets That is always the best approach to reduce the number of boxes With this initially I see that the title s bar can be built into the style sheet Here s how the box will look when imported into QuarkXPress NOT The purpose for working through all of these examples is to get the user more familiar with the different aspects of the
257. ok in Autopage but i s another to get the Xtags Headers amp Contents XML and even the QuarkXPress document set up properly The more you have working correctly up front the less chance there will be of unforeseen problems later in the project What is Second Party Software One of the prerequisites to be successful with this book is that you have used X99 Xtags before preferably on an actual project Also Pocodousomsanmsi guishing approach to the material Where I feel this book is unique is through my step youcaret vs 0 step approach helping you achieve the task without having to keep referring back to cer tain sections to pull it off I always have learned through instruction like this and I always retain something once I do it It locks in the memory better than just reading about descrip tions of various tasks See Figure 9 1 This could be scen as a justifiable excuse to some degree especially when it is the heaviest time of the production season and you re in the middie of several books I is sometimes difficult to put aside the necessary time to focus and com plete the up front tasks The up front time spent on coding the sample would saved throughout the project In my opinion a success ful cost effective project relies heavily on the up front setup of Xiags This book has not covered every aspect of Autopage because that is not my intention My main objective is to show the user how to get more out of the p
258. ooi CHAPTER A Xtags has many of the same features as XPress Tags in QuarkXPress but can handle so much more A lot of power resides in the style sheet tags and we need to really dive into this Most of the text editing features will be covered in this chapter We ll get more into the text and picture box tags in the next chapter What I m not trying to do here is to rewrite the Xtags User Guide Some aspects of this program I will touch on only slightly whereas others I will go into more detail Lets start with the Preference options and ways to import your Xtags E Setting the Preferences It is very important to get the Xtags Preferences set up to the way that works best for you There are many selections to choose from Currently I set up my Xtags Preferences as shown here Application Get Text with Xtags Paste Xtags Text Display Interactive Save Report errors C Don t update during import Undo m XTensions Manager _ Delete file after successful input Font Mapping Additional text file types avenue quark File List Default Path Save Text with Xtags Copy Xtags Text Full Res Preview Browsers Index C Output separate tags e g lt B gt lt I gt vs lt BI gt Jabberwocky PDF M omit default elements in Xtags list tags Placeholders Fraction Price Xtags Convert quotes z l Include style sheets v Don t export style sheet definitions Don Export Style Sheet Definitions
259. ook cannot be paged using Autopage because of the wraps I ve yet to do a book with wraps that I couldn t use Autopage Sometimes it requires starting and stopping quite often but the project was still completed in a timely manner Of the methods I use one requires minimal reworking that bypasses the error message associated with runarounds Here s an example of a design with wrapped images Method 1 Treating Wrapping Art as Side Art This first scenario is to treat the wrapping art as side art Generally ve found designers and editors are pretty consistent when having art wrap They usually have two or three sizes of photos that have the ability to bleed Many times they are vertical photos with a width between 12p and 15p The horizontal photos are between 18p and 24p Although the depth is an uncertainty this makes cal culating the amount of space the photos will take up when the runaround is applied much easier 1 I leave the runaround off when paging having the art fall to the outside using side art The intention here is that the widths are uniform on a few images I noticed that the average width of the photos is 18p The mar gin is by 9p with 1p in the gutter That leaves 8p that will need to under lay I set the Horizontal Alignment to Outside for Side Art 1 and the Side Art Placement parameter as shown below Allow Side Element To Straddle Margin v Treat Side Element as Underlay v Side Element Offset
260. oose m I m not going to go into detail for the Frame Shade and other settings because they essentially work very much the same Some fields have pull down menus where others you need to enter a number value As you can see there are a lot of possibilities here It is much easier for the user to select the options in the fields than to try to count commas I will say it does take a considerable amount of time to build a database like this but once it is completed your composition depart ment will be more cost effective If you do decide to build a database similar to this my best suggestion is to make sure you do a lot of error checking and testing It will pay off to have it near perfect the first time out Text Box Caption Advanced amp tbu2 Text Box Caption Advanced amp tbu2 Box Skew Angle Flags Placement Color Runaround Box Skew 0 CO Runaround CO Text Inset Box Angle 0 Top Top Flags None Left Left Bg Color Black Bg Shade 0 The Text Box Caption Advanced tbu2 section contains the remaining fields in the text box tag beyond the first 4 fields I m only going to show the Xtags_cCho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 208 p 208 Xtags Maximized first half of this As you can see the first part of this is set up exactly the same as the picture box tags but the Text Inset is specific to text boxes The text inset amounts for Top Left Right and Bottom allow you the option for mult
261. ormation in the fields is where the customization becomes easier for the end user Xtags_Cho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 213 p Chapter 9 Xtags and FileMaker Pro 213 Setting Style Sheets If you wanted to take the time in the Style Sheets Required section it would be possible to make a style sheet checkbox for each style that is cov ered in the design By doing this you open yourself up to interpretation prob lems where the user who checks these boxes starts wondering which style is needed etc I find it easier to handle the text elements end matter elements boxes etc by having a checkbox for those sections Then the majority of information that would normally be in those sections would be part of the design Look at the screen capture for the Text Elements area Text Elements Inline Elements KT URL etc Text Elements dlalog math extract Lists BL NL LL etc Sublists NLBL etc By handling the text elements in one check box you could have as many def initions expressed all in this one box The Script would be written like this If StyleGenerator Text Elements On Perform Script Text Elements Combined End If What this will do is within the Text Element Script all of the definitions for styles such as text dialog display math quotes extracts vignettes poetry etc would all be defined and added to the design This would export the defini tions of each style sh
262. ottom left of the first box that was brought in This would read off of the first box in the code as shown here Because this box is used for positioning we will need to use a BL5 tag because there will be four picture boxes and one text box imported prior to this ap pearing The coding for the line will be lt amp lbu 0 BL5 3 0 347 or 1 gt The main text area will follow the rule with a 1p3 bottom left offset and a 9 point y offset below the line The left line running the length of the text will be brought in as a picture box with a relative placement that will be 7 points deeper to accommodate the offset but not the text descenders lt amp tbu2 1p3 BL1 9 27p3 25p 100 1 1 1 0 09 gt Text here lt te gt lt pbu2 1p3 TL1 9 1 25p R 7 0 n n 100 K m 3 gt The entire code is as follows lt amp pbu2 10 6 B 0 138 30 k n 18 n 100 K m 5 gt lt amp pbu2 10 6 B 0 48 30 n n 100 K m 55 455 gt lt pbu2 0 B 4 5 21 15 21 15 45 n n 100 K 0 m yor 4 gt lt amp pbu2 84 6 B 18 273 12 n n 100 K m yong yy gt lt tbu2 29 6 B 8 108 16 n 100 n gt RB Review Box 12 1 lt amp te gt lt amp lbu O BL5 3 0 347 or 1 J gt lt tbu2 1p3 BL1 9 327 25p n 100 555555 J gt All text here lt te gt lt amp pbu2 1p3 TL1 9 1 25p R 7 0 vn n 100 K
263. ough time to work with them I will show one example of something very basic This is the code that I put together to bring in a basic 2 row 2 column table with some text in it lt tsu 0 0 165 60 2 3 0 2 20 gt lt trs n 36 gt lt amp tcs gt tbl This is lt B gt Cell 1 lt amp tcs gt tbl This is lt B gt Cell 2 lt amp tre gt lt trs n 36 gt lt amp tcs gt tbl This is lt B gt Cell 3 lt amp tcs gt tbl This is lt B gt Cell 4 lt amp tre gt lt trs n 36 gt lt amp tcs gt tbl This is lt B gt Cell 5 lt amp tcs gt tbl This is lt B gt Cell 6 lt amp tre gt lt amp tse gt The table is broken down as lt amp tsu gt line is broken down as x 0 y 0 width 165 height 60 number of rows 2 number of columns 3 column widths 0 frame width 2 frame shade 20 Default values for the rest of the table The lt amp tcs gt columns were left for all default values The lt amp trs gt rows were given a n to indicate that they were for nor mal rows where an h would have indicated a table header row and an f would specify table footer row The imported result looks like this This is Cell 1 This is Cell 2 This is Cell 3 This is Cell 4 This is Cell 5 This is Cell 6 There are so many options in the table tags that an entire chapter will need to be set aside to cover these thoroughly in the next edition Xtags_Cho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM P
264. ould only be created with one value for the entire inset when using Copy Xtags Text There wasn t a Multiple Insets as there is in Quark 6 5 However that does not stop one from being able to set this up in Xtags A good example of this is requiring a simple box with a rule around it but needing a 12 12 9 5 12 inset During a Copy Xtags Text the inset would paste as lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 20p 25p n 0 5 n 100 n 12 gt This can be manually changed to lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 20p 25p n 0 5 n 100 n 012 12 9 5 12 gt This will then give you the inset that is needed Whenever possible you need to look at ways for Xtags to fix issues like this French Quotes vs Brackets Many pagers use French Quotes for their macros when setting up their translation table French Quotes need lt 199 gt and lt 200 gt ASCII codes so they have to be first imported into a QuarkXPress file then the file needs to be resaved as ASCII before using Get Text with Xtags That s a waste of time I suggest using the same delimiters used in Autopage and As long as your translation table is set up like this yowll have no problem with these as long as you never name your tags in the same structure as AutoTags Translation Tables A properly set up translation table can have the same power as an intricate AppleScript or MacPerl script I ve always used the translation table as much as possible for importing
265. ows they may serve more of a purpose because it is much easier to set the Ox Oy for your first picture or text box rather than the actual page positioning That s where the Origin Tags come in Let s consider a chapter opener with a opening photo on the page You may find that if you use Autopage this first image will not be placed because your chapter opener is typically set up different than the rest of the document So in order for this image to place and not remain on the pasteboard the Ori gin Tags tags could be used for proper placement of that image Look at this chapter opener example of how the image will be placed Wireless Internet Offers Freelancers More Freedom in emi 2 G Traveling and cmmuting is a great time to get freelance work or other business done The chapter opener page needs to have the opening image placed in the cen ter of the page in that exact x and y coordinate You could bring in that image by hand but it would be easier to do the followings 1 Set up the opening photo to pull in through the translation table We know that the exact position of this image is 4p9 x and 14p9 y This means that the Origin Tag needs to be lt amp o 4p9 14p7 gt 2 The picture box and text box tags can be set as normal with one excep tion You cannot use the pasteboard specifier 0 B 0 because it needs to be pulled on the page Instead just have the tag read like this lt amp pbu2 0 0 40p
266. ox will be b1 bxt Box Title bx All the box text b2 Side Margin Box with a Vertical Line Side margin boxes should almost always be imported using Xtags unless you are using Autopage and the box is very basic and you are using the margin note tags Otherwise the side elements should be constructed using the pic ture box text box or line tags Here s an example of an element needing the text and picture box tags Building Skills Gather in a group of two to three students One strategy for becoming better at computer skills is to actually sit down and work on things you do not quite understand For example instead of going into a program and doing what you already know dive into an area you are curious about and then see what you end up with The only real issue in this box is getting the rule to run the length of the text without having to adjust it This is controlled by relative placement but will need to have a depth reduction that includes the space from the title to the top of the rule and at the bottom of the text for the descenders We ve covered this a little in other examples but here s how that picture box will need to be written lt amp pbu2 0 TL1 15 5 1 36p R 17 5 0 n n 100 K 60 m gt The complete tag will be written as lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 11p9 36p p 2 n gt All of the text lt te gt lt pbu2 0 TL1 15 5 1 6p R 17 5 0 n n 100 K 60 m gt
267. p 18p p9 n 0 n 100 K 15 2p 5 gt The shadow is fairly easy but you will want it to position properly so it only picks up the amount shown above to give an almost 3 dimensional effect For this to happen we ll need to offset the picture box or text box your choice top left with the x coordinate by 3pts the y coordinate by 4pts and using the oval box type again The rest of the box requires relative placement an additional 3 points to the depth a 45 shade and the Send to Back flag lt amp tbu2G TL1 4 25p 22p R 3 0 k n 0 Gn 100 K 45 5555 gt The more text that is contained in the box will change the appearance to become more of a circle than the oval shape seen above Typically to maintain the oval look the designer would need this to fit content that was no more than 7 or 8 lines to maintain some uniformity throughout the design Here is the code that makes up the box lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 25p 22p p9 n o n 100 K 15 24 555 gt All text here lt te gt lt tbu2 3 TL1 4 300 22p R 3 0 k n G0 n 100 K 45 555 gt lt te gt lt G g 2 1 gt The translation table entries would be bx1 lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 25p 22p p9 n Go n 100 K 15 24 gt bx2 lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 3 TL1 4 300 22p R 3 0 k n 0 n 100 K 45 gt lt amp te gt lt amp g 2 1 gt Xtags_Cho05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 128 128 Xtags Maximize
268. placement of the figure This is a better solution for those less advanced with Xtags If you were to pull the figure in the standard way you would need to move the figure 1p1 down from the top to make room for the rule This would cause reworking during pagination Construction is a constant process with year round employment My idea here is to offset the figure using 1p1 of white space when pulling it in with Xtags and having the caption sit 1p1 from the top of the image This will place the art properly with all of the allotted space for the rule that needs to be manually placed To do this ae Xtags_Ch07 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 167 F Chapter 7 Xtags Working with Autopage 167 When setting up the Xtags picture placement the First Baseline offset will need to be 1p1 lt amp pbu2 15p B 0 29p 75 40p 75 n n 100 Solid K 0 m lp1 construction tif gt lt tbu2 12 TR1 1p1 10p 8p gt CAP Construction is a constant process with year round employment lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt The extra white space in the figure will not cause any issues when printed during FlightCheck procedures and so on Here s how it will import The rule around the image is only for demonstration purposes to show the offset To do this effectively the Horiz Art Caption 2 will need to be set Out side in the Horizontal Alignment parameter To override the parameters the code will need to read
269. points offset from the top and bottom lt amp tbu2 6 TL1 8 29p 40p R 16 0 k n Gn 100 K 15 17 gt Xtags_Ch0O4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 94 F 94 Xtags Maximized 3 The complete code for this will be lt amp pbu2 6 B 0 30p 25 40p 25 1 n 15 100 n 2 8 6 8 m 5 5 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 05 ch05_011 eps gt lt amp tbu2 6 TL1 8 29p 40p R 16 0 k n n 100 K 15 17 gt Figure Caption here lt te gt lt amp g 2 1 gt Screened Caption Below Image The screened handling of the caption could also be used where the image was above the caption as shown here FIGURE 15 3 Wireless Internet Online shopping and auction companies have risen in popularity due to the ease of use through wireless Internet The big difference compared to the previous page is that the image would not need a runaround because the text box could start below the image The bar above the image could be it s own separate picture box but would still need to be using relative placement because it would need to have a depth reduc tion of lp lt amp pbu2 6 TL2 6 30 R 12 0 6 1 k n Gn 100 K 15 m 55 5 gt Here is the code for the image and caption lt amp pbu2 0 6 30p p 25 32p p 25 n 1 n 15 100 n m 0 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 04 fg04_019 eps gt lt amp tbu2 6 BL1 1 30p R 12 0 22p p3 k n n 100 K 15 17
270. possible e Make sure if setting up for XMLxt usage that the text can read through with out any text breaks otherwise the XML will not stay well formed If the box isn t being used with XMLxt this isn t an issue e If there are any Quark blends I set them as Adobe Photoshop files because Xtags doesn t currently support blends The end of the e Always have the box built perfectly with trapping alignment and so on middle section gt before writing the Xtags strings to ensure everything will work correctly when importing the text e Always have the box built perfectly with trapping alignment and so on before writing the Xtags strings to ensure everything will work correctly when importing the text e Test the codes before putting them in their translation table Don t just do a Copy Xtags Text and Paste and be finished Just because it came in that way don t assume it is correct 5 The full code for making this box is lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 29p6 99 n n 100 n m 56 GB Disk Chapter 05 box_top eps gt lt amp tbu2 3p B 3p 24p 35p n n 100 n 3999993 2ALL box text goes here lt amp te gt lt pbu2 3p BL1 7p6 8 29p6 9p6 8 k n n 100 n m 96 GB Disk Chapter 05 box_bottom eps gt lt pbu2 3p TL2 5p3 29p6 30p R 12p9 6 0 kn n 100 n F 56 GB Disk Chapter 05 box_middle eps gt lt amp g 1 2 3 4 Xtags_Ch0O5 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 133
271. program It seems that a lot of people work with software like this for years but fail to break new ground out of not having proper direction The goal is to show as many different examples as possible covering all of the picture and text box options through the examples To get this to work requires following these steps l Make sure you have the titles background shade built into the rules Here is the style sheet code that makes up the rules lt ra 11 Solid K 100 28 28 3 6 gt lt rb 11 Solid K 100 28 28 3 6 gt There needs to be a multiple text inset of 0 12 10 12 on the text box lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 21p 30p n n 100 n 0 12 10 12 gt ttl Note The picture box around the text needs to position 0 TL1 but with an 11 point y coordinate It also will need to be sent to the back contain a 5 point rule and will need relative placement with a 11 point depth re duction There is also a slight corner radius Here is the picture box code lt amp pbu2 0 TL1 p11 21p 0p R p11 0 k n 0 5 12 Km 100 n m a5 The complete code will be lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 21p 30p pl n Gn 100 n 12 10 12 gt ttl Note nt Text lt te gt lt amp pbu2 0 TL1 p11 21p G0p R p11 0 k n 5 n 100 DM 5555 4 gt lt g 1 2 gt Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 106 106 Xtags Maximized Rounded Corner Box with Unsupported Shape This example displays a
272. provided by permission by FileMaker Inc 1998 2006 Filemaker Inc All Rights Reserved FileMaker is a trademark of FileMaker Inc registered in the U S and other countries and the file folder logo is a trademark of FileMaker Inc The information contained in this book is presented without warranty Although safeguards have been taken while producing this title neither the author or publisher shall have any liability to any person or company for any loss or impairment caused or suspected by the instructions and examples contained in this book or by the software and XTensions described within Trademarks Trademarked and registered names are used all through this book Instead of placing a registered or trade mark symbol at each incident we affirm using the names only for the purposes of describing the software or hardware with no intention of copyright infringement Xtags is a trademark of Em Software QuarkXPress is a registered trademark of Quark Inc Autopage is a reg istered trademark of KyTek Inc Macintosh is a trademark of Apple Computer Inc Photoshop and Illustrator are registered trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated BBEdit and Microsoft Word are either trademarks or registered trademarks Other product names or software used in this book may be trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective owners 2 Xtags_FM 11 27 06 ww 5 38 PM Page iii ST OE EE About the Author vii Acknowledgements
273. ption Width and Depth sections because this is where you will be doing the majority of changes for each job Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 204 p 204 Xtags Maximized Xtags Results Xtags Results fg1 lt amp pbu2 0 6 0 39p 50p 1 5 Cyan1 n 100 100 Black 0 20 12 12 12 m 100 100 0 0 0 0 Server Al Composition Users 52394 Williams Art fa2 gt lt amp tbu2 0 BL1 11 2 39p R 0 1 LOp N 100 100 Black Onise gt The Xtags Results displays the finished Xtags picture and text boxes for the image and captions These are created in a Calculation within a field called Fl Xtags Results which will be set similar to this If F1 On_Off On lt amp pbu2 amp If IsEmpty F1 X Cdn O B F1 X Cdn amp B amp If IsEmpty F1 Y Cdn 0 F1 Y Cdn amp amp F1 Maximum Wdt amp If F1 Shrink to Fit On 2 amp amp F1 Maximum Dpt amp If F1 Shrink to Fit 2 On 2 amp amp I m only going to show the first 4 commas of the picture box but you should get the idea of how the Calculation is built The field above that says Fl X Cdn is a field for the X Coordinate I would only fill this in if you will be doing something unique with the positioning The last field that will be put in before this calculation ends is for bringing in the path to the art This will appear in the Calculation as amp amp Path to Art T
274. pulate it manually each time it is called out in the text ve witnessed this from others first hand and I always said You need to use Xtags more It will save you hours I then would set up some boxes for them and they saw the power first hand I will stand by this statement Bringing in your art and captions manu ally is throwing money away To bring in 100 pieces of art manually and align them with the caption could take anywhere from 30 minutes to an hour One ae Xtags_Cho1 2 11 27 06 5 41 PM Page 2 F Xtags Maximized of the important features of Xtags is its ability to import the art grouped with the caption with shrink to fit capabilities To import 100 pieces of art will take the program less than two minutes Although you can make detailed macros for character styles I usually use the QuarkXPress character styles whenever possible without using Xtags for this unless I discover some overrides or if it is necessary to have several char acter style sheets within one style sheet My primary uses for Xtags are the following Bringing in floating art Bringing in anchored items icons math etc Importing complicated tables boxes and side art Coding Autopage tags instead of markup E 7 E m Maintaining my translation table E Writing advanced macros Pagers using Xtags to change bullets heads and so on could use Quark s character styles for this instead but it all depends on your workflow I woul
275. r 03 fg03_017 eps gt Anchored Text Example 1 Here s an anchored box that has a different approach to a design element in this main level head Line Box and Text Elements At first look this element appears to be 3 lines together but this is actually created as an anchored text box with a 25 fill There is a style in that text 2 Xtags_Ch03 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 59 F Chapter 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes 59 box called Line which has a 3pt 75 shaded rule above and a rule below to make this appearance Here is the paragraph rule coding that makes this lt ra 3 Solid K 75 0 0 4 8 gt lt rb 3 Solid K 75 0 0 1 75 gt The anchored text box has nothing very unusual outside of the 25 shading and the 1 point runaround This is coded as lt amp tb 21 12 5 Gn 100 K 25 1 1 1 gt Line lt amp te gt Anchored Text Example 2 A great use for anchored text is in a situation where you may want to have equations such as fractions or radicals that need to be placed throughout the document In the example shown below we have a fraction that was cre ated in its own Quark text box requiring two lines to make it up properly Here s an example The price was 3 the original cost of the software The anchored code is as follows lt amp tb 4 7 16 b K n 100 100 Solid W 1 1 1 1 1 t gt frac 1 lt b0 gt lt k 100 gt 2 lt k0 gt lt b4 gt lt amp te gt There ar
276. ranslation table by being coded as TX1 hla H1Jim h1b Although I like using the power of Autopage whenever possible I find this an easier scenario to work with by combining Xtags anchored text box options Xtags_Ch08 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 175 Repurposing CHAPTER Even if repurposing your content does not fit in your current workflow wouldn t pass over this chapter because this is definitely the wave of the future for publishing Some of you may think this chapter does not apply to your workflow or you will not get any benefits from it but I suggest you reconsider Anything else you can learn will only help you in other areas of your workflow Maybe XML isn t what you need Perhaps it is just turning the document into HTML Following similar steps you can achieve this as well Repurposing is one of the more important aspects of Xtags working together with Autopage BBEdit and AppleScript The entire process involves converting the formatted Quark material back to an XML format so it can be used for various platforms including e books web related material and data bases Neither Xtags nor Autopage will take the document to an XML state but it will export the text allowing you to use some type of script to achieve the results My preferred method is using AppleScript by way of BBEdit s Grep in the Find amp Replace window to produced these results Currently Autopage s Batch Export converts t
277. rd buying public which caused most heavy metal independents to lose out and many to file bankruptcy If you ve been following along in all of the other examples you should be ready to tackle this Xtags sometimes seems like learning Algebra in a way If you get your foundation down there isn t much you can t accomplish with it This box does have a lot going on The main concerns are the shadow on the text the art in the background and trapping the rule around the entire box This is accomplished by 1 The image box will come in with a lpt rule around it ae Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 116 p 116 Xtags Maximized The next step is to get the Super Title and the Title to come in with the shadow behind it This is accomplished by just having a 8 x offset and a 9 y offset and duplicating the title Here s an example of the code lt amp tbu2 1p8 2 2p1 9 22p5 5p5 and lt amp tbu2 1p7 6 2p1 22p5 5p5 The Rise in the 80s subtitle box is brought in with center on the Ver tical Alignment and 1p7 for the Baseline Offset lt amp tbu2 3p1 8p4 17p7 2p8 n 1 K n 60 100 Solid W 100 1 1p7 c nm gt The part that can make or break this is getting the rule at the top of the text area to appear seamless from the bottom rule on the art box This is accomplished by trapping the art lpt under the other box and sending it to the back This box starts on the 9p11 y coordinate where the top box
278. re this is very helpful is within each of these Style Elements scripts there must be swapouts for the design elements I suggest that the easiest way to accomplish this task is by making sure all of the elements appear different but they still maintain the same width and depth A good example of this would be this box element It will need to retain the same box characteristics for each design but needs to have the same retain the theme of the Style Look at this example Box 3 3 Internet Home Businesses ___ With the onset of online shopping auction companies and the ease of use through wireless Internet home business ven tures are growing to be where some of the big money lies Unlike the commercials that you see where it shows the entre preneur sitting by his pool sipping a mixed drink a home busi ness does require a lot of extra time The bar at the top has an image that ties into the opening image keeping this style theme consistent throughout For the second design option a differ ent style element would import which would change the box to have this appearance ernet Home Businesses With the onset of online shopping auction companies and the ease of use through wireless Internet home business ven tures are growing to be where some of the big money lies Unlike the commercials that you see where it shows the entre preneur sitting by his pool sipping a mixed drink a home busi ness does require a
279. relative placement or BL1 positioning because we know it will always sit in the same location This picture box will need have the Send to Back flag applied lt amp pbu2 6 B 6 22p 52 k n 18 n 100 K 50 m k i gt When this imports it will come in with rounded corners on all 4 sides as seen here How we fix this is by bringing in a squared box with Black and 0 fill to knock out the gray which will give the custom shape lt amp pbu2 5 7 B 35 22p2 23 k n n 100 K 0 m gt ae Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 107 Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 107 The masking will take on this look The dotted line around the box is for demonstration purposes only 4 The order here is very important for this to work properly We ll want the text box to be first followed by the Black 0 filled picture box and lastly have the gray 50 screened box that will be sent to the back Here is how the code will appear lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 23p 30p p4 n 5 18 n 100 n 1 2p1 gt ttl Title h4 Text lt te gt lt pbu2 5 7 B 35 22p2 23 k n n 100 K 0 m pron 55 gt lt pbu2 6 B 6 22p 52 k n 18 n 100 K 50 m wo J gt lt g 2 1 3 gt More Advanced Unsupported Shape Box I will have to admit that this is tricky but still achievable When I first saw a similar example of this I thought that the title bar and the perspective box below
280. ring out tags With so many new additions in Quark 7 I still find myself more of a QuarkXPress fan I anticipate that this book helped you find new methods for using Xtags and automating your workflows I would expect that you have battled some troublesome boxes in the past that weren t shown here If you encounter a unique box or image caption combination that you just can t figure out email me at highvolume mchsi com and I ll see if I can write code for it If it is something I haven t seen before it may be featured in the next edition I will give credit in the book for the discovery to the person who sends this to me I look forward to your feedback Xtags_Index 11 27 06 6 50 PM Page 225 W Additional Height Options 76 Adobe Illustrator 58 86 87 101 195 Adobe InDesign 9 224 Adobe Photoshop 90 101 195 219 Align with Text 125 Altering Boxes to New Style 154 Anchored Alignment 65 Anchored Lines 65 66 Anchored Picture Boxes 56 58 75 170 171 Anchored Text Boxes 15 56 60 75 170 174 Angle 57 62 AppleScript 9 12 16 18 20 31 32 35 50 51 64 86 117 126 142 146 148 161 175 178 179 190 FileMaker Pro 192 209 213 216 Get and Save Text 15 Arrow Type 63 65 Ascent 125 51 Automating Using Databases 106 Autopage Adding Codes with Grep 152 Anchoring the H1 Side Head Instead of Side Art 174 AutoTag Export Conversion Status 178 Batch Export 15 38 159 175 178 193
281. ring the paging process I am a firm believer that the goal is to save as much time as possible This means you can handle more projects and make yourself or your company more profits At this critical point in the paging industry it s for your best interest to put forth all the effort possible to keep jobs at your company rather than being outsourced to foreign compa Xtags_Cho1 11 27 06 5 41 PM Page 3 p Chapter 1 Introduction to Xtags 3 nies that have economic advantages over you They may be able to do the work at a fraction of the cost but if you are using all of the efficiencies at your disposal you can maintain the work in your company I feel that the failure to maximize software like this may have a lot to do with the global shift in prepress services going to other countries You can do something about changing this here is an opportunity right in front of you Don fall into that paging trap that you cannot find the time to set float ing elements initially The time you set up the project using Xtags will easily be caught up This usually happens within the first two chapters The secret is to always use as few text boxes as possible This is a trick I will teach you throughout this book Another thing to remember is that Quark is a what you see is what you get software but underneath are codes making this all happen These codes can all be enhanced using the power of Xtags Apple Script and other programs
282. ript tell application BBEdit amp activate 1 amp make new text document amp paste J amp save text document 1 to file amp Xtags Creator Path to Art amp Paging Support amp Xtags Creator Author Last Name amp ttl GF amp end tell What this is doing is creating a new BBEdit document pasting the TTL field information and then saving the document into a Paging Support folder fol lowing the path to the art and in the Paging Support instead This would be Server F1 Composition Users 52394 Williams Paging Support Williams ttl Xtags_cCho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 210 p 210 Xtags Maximized Database 2 Style Sheet Generator Design Selected Standard 001 S tyle Sheet zz e Project Number a n e r a to r Trim sze gt chapter Part openers wis Author Last Name ISBN 10 or 13 Display Font Text Font Symmetrical Indent 097620410x Wexler Bold Ie a Full Text Width i and Teleplays ine Elements KT URL etc Part with Text Elements ext Elements dialog math extract Chapter Opener Elements Salega Chapter Number and Title SiS duts ciny Chapter Intro Text Chapter Author and Affiliation Chapter Objectives Floating Elements Main Level Heads H1 Main Level Head H2 Main Level Head H3 Main Level Head Generic Head Styles Page 2 Figure Selector Box Selector Export to File I am not going to go into the Style Sheet Generator in the same amount o
283. rlier in the book I will also use AppleScript to ac complish this as well It all depends on the project With OSX I ve found that I enjoy using AppleScript more to accomplish tasks like this It also helps be cause you can put error checking in to reduce careless coding errors Complex Box with Seven Xtags Strings This is another box that I would do with Xtags rather than have to adjust manually along the way It is complicated yet when you break down the macros and the translation table it all makes sense Note The 8 pt decorative box at the bottom corner will always snap into this location due to the usage of shrink to fit capabilities set in the other boxes There s also BR1 usage applied for this effect The shading behind the Problem Points is set in the style sheet rather than expecting Xtags to insert these This takes some of the complication out of this There is also slight overlapping on a couple of the elements For exam ple I have the hw1 Sent to Back so it will trap behind the hw2 Hol lywood Clich s which starts at 14p to overlap the other box by 5 pts I believe in trapping as much as possible on a box like this Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 118 118 Xtags Maximized HOLLYWOOD CLICH S CLICH S THE HOLLYWOOD WHEEL Laike JR O URE CREATIVE MOVIES ARE NOT THE FOCAL POINT ANYMORE IN HOLLYWOOD THIS USED TO BE THE CASE YEARS AGO WHEN MOVIES LIKE RAIDERS OF THE LOST ARK STAR
284. rogram by approaching the pro gram in a different manner than the user might be used to After following through the book and FIGURE 9 1 Leisure time for couples is spent mora frequenty leaming how to do all of the procedures Chapter 1 Understand the relationship between computer software and how it impacts our daily lives from using laptops 9 is full of step by step examples that will give commuting to leisure time you an opportunity to apply the various functions of the program I fee if intermediate and advanced users work through these they ll find themselves more proficient than before Many of these concepts you ll already know but my hope is that you ll earn some new and important things along the way Chapter Objectives After studying this chapter you will be able to The Impact on Profitability Since I ve been using the program I ve noticed there are many misconceptions about Autopage and its uses How far you go with the Xtension is up to you You can begin using the software the first day and gain more knowledge with each book or you can explore functions whenever you have time and amaze others at your findings New formatted chapter that matches the style of the book Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 152 p 152 Xtags Maximized Adding Autopage Codes with Grep If you are planning on using Autopage and repaging the chapter during the Xtags conversion stage of the project you can add the
285. rs accounting for Sea Ice due to the subzero temperatures in that Antarctic and polar regions Tides affect underwater visibility significantly Tides are normally predictable along major continental coastlines Sea Ice due to the subzero temperatures in that region Tides affect underwater visibil ity significantly Tides are normally predictable along continental coastlines and within the Xtags_ChoO7 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 172 F 172 Xtags Maximized The downside to doing this is that working with anchored art can make pag ination a little more difficult if the deep anchored piece falls at the bottom of the page If this should occur you can reduce the depth of the anchored box and adjust as necessary once the piece is properly positioned The upside is that you don t have to manually take out space E Oversized Two Column Inline Art Inline art in a two column layout will fall within one column unless the art is oversized If oversized the art will split the columns evenly place the art and then restart the new columns below If you have a design that calls for the art to be slightly oversized in order for it to bleed to the outside of each column this can be handled by using the C O Caption Only Caption art placement option The C O needs to be in a text box that takes up the area you want to be positioned This can be tricky and most people do it after it has been imported I will demonstrate both ways Handli
286. rtical and horizontal rule and a 30 black pic ture box That way there s less chance of having the trapping off 2 With Xtags the tagging will be lt amp lbu 298 15 180 294 0r i 0 5 1 gt lt lbu 4 7 6 270 7 6 01 i 0 5 1 gt lt amp pbu2 0 0 8 8 0 100 K 30 m gt lt gG 2 1 gt 3 I imported this grouping on the top of the page opposed to the paste board This way it will actually be sitting visibly on the page I cannot get the coding to do this exactly with Xtags but manually I can get this group of boxes to anchor with the head so I will go through and anchor all of these with the H1 heads To do this a Copy the grouping b Go to the H1 head and return immediately afterwards c Create a style sheet called H1_Bar based on the H1 head This style will need a 0 left indent instead of 1p3 and leading needs to be 3pts d Paste the grouped item into the text flow 4 Now all of these items will float with the H1 head while paging If I can only figure out how to get Xtags to allow me to code these into the text TIl be extremely happy but this will save time during the paging process Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 114 114 Xtags Maximized Table with Art Handling The following example is a table still treated like a box but with a decora tive piece of art that comes in at the bottom left corner of the page Table 13 1 IN AOR T A TEE oleae tex e Try to use a
287. s also needs to have the Send to Back flag lt amp pbu2 13 5 TL1 12 26p5 30p R 3 0 k n n 100 K 15 m gt 2 The piece of art in the bottom left corner will need to be 3pts BL1 with a 8p1 y No matter how deep the text is the art will always place in this position lt amp pbu2 3 BL1 8p1 100 100 k n n 100 m 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 05 ch05_008 eps gt Xtags_Ch0O5 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 115 Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 115 3 The complete code for this box will be lt amp pbu2 9 B 0 26p5 24 n n 100 K 70 m gt lt pbu2 17 B 2 5 5p 24 n n 100 K 25 m J gt lt tbu2 5 5 TL1 6 5 24p6 30p p 5 N n 100 N 55559 gt All the box text lt amp te gt lt pbu2 13 5 TL1 12 26p5 30p R 3 0 k n n 100 K 15 m yo yy gt lt pbu2 3 BL1 8p1 100 876 100 546 k n n 100 m gt 0 GB Disk Images Chapter 05 ch05_008 eps gt lt g 5 4 3 2 1 gt Complicated Box with Art Many would argue that this box should be set up using the T E in Autopage and I would do this if using an XML workflow If this box is set up correctly this will perfectly import every time Pm going to break down how these strings can be reduced to a very simple translation table entry This may look a little overwhelming but I left some of the default information in the fields Look care
288. s an example of how an anchored line appears lt amp lb 0 82 o1 b 1 K 100 Solid 1 Right Feathered gt The breakdown for each unanchored line field is as follows l 5 6 7 8 9 10 px Horizontal This is the line s initial point to the terminal point Basically if it s positive it points the right side if it s negative it points to the left If the r flag is selected this becomes the polar angle py Vertical A positive value moves towards the bottom of the page flags Same as Unanchored Lines anchored alignment When anchoring a line within the Modify win i dow you are given two options For ascent use A or a for base line use B or b which is the default width Same as Unanchored Lines color Same as Unanchored Lines shade Same as Unanchored Lines runaround amount outset Same as Unanchored Lines arrow type Same as Unanchored Lines line name Same as Unanchored Lines Anchored Line Example 1 Instead of using an underscore or a tab to make a line within the text for an answer or write on line I prefer to anchor the line in the text flow The prob lem with just using the tab or a underscore depends greatly on the Kerning Table tracking on that particular font By using a line the guarantee is there Xtags_Ch03 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 66 F 66 Xtags Maximized that the lines will not be broken up and will
289. s few boxes as possible during the set up If can use insets or First Baseline to accomplish this I ll spend a little extra time to keep the boxes as user friendly as possible e Make sure if setting up for XMLxt usage that the text can read through without any text breaks otherwise the XML will not stay well formed If the box isn t being used with XMLxt this isn t an issue e If there are any Quark blends set them as Adobe Photoshop files because Xtags doesn t currently support blends e Always have the box built perfectly with trapping alignment and so b on before writing the Xtags strings to ensure everything will work correctly when importing the text SE This box would look much better in color but for demonstration purposes we ll just use the different shades of gray The approach I would take first on this is by looking at what requires any relative placement or TL1 BLL etc The three obvious boxes are the top 70 bar the 25 bar around the table title and the text area There will need to be a slight indent on the positioning on the pasteboard to accommodate the piece of art in the bot tom left corner If not enough white space is available on the pasteboard an error will occur The next steps are as follows 1 Make the 15 background behind the text 13 5 TL1 and starting at lp y from the top of the text area Shrink to fit the depth using relative placement but reduce 3 points from the total depth Thi
290. s in BBEdit Be sure you have the Case Sensitive selected as True or you could have problems tell application BBEdit activate replace L R C F J using amp gt searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive true match words false extend selection false replace h 9 using lt amp gt searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive true match words false extend selection false replace kn 2 using lt 1 2 3 gt 4 searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive true match words false extend selection false end tell Xtags_Ch02 32 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 32 F Xtags Maximized By running this script it will take these tags below H5 S H5 lt L h P3 kn0 And it will become the following H5 S H5 lt L gt lt h P3 gt lt kn0 gt This is just something that you can mess around with if you are having trou ble deciphering the tags if they remain how they are now Changing the Inset for Autopage 5 8 This particular description only applies to Autopage 5 8 users System 9 2 users because this has been rectified in Quark 6 5 In Quark 4 11 or earlier the inset value c
291. s why it s so important to be as competent as possible with these programs I ve never bought into the excuse that a person s avoidance of a program is due to lack of training Whatever happened to experimentation or using a program s tutorial if one is provided It is in your best interest to exper iment with these programs when time is available A pager must always be evolving and that motivation strengthens your value as an employee For a self employed freelancer it is invaluable to find ways to keep the profit margin up There are so many tasks that are overhead that it s necessary to your survival to find programs that reduce your production time A little ingenuity can keep you in business much longer Furthermore do not be afraid to tap into the resources around you Depending on the size of your company there are inevitably co workers who excel at these programs and XTensions Employees who avoid mentoring those advanced users are only cheating themselves There is usually someone who knows the answer to the question you have If you cannot find a resolu tion there is always the manual or help menu with the program If you still Xtags_Cho1 6 11 27 06 5 41 PM Page 6 p Xtags Maximized cannot find your answer there are plenty of web resources to take advantage of such as www google com Go to www google com and within Groups type in Xtags art Its possible there is someone out there who has poste
292. s_FM 11 27 06 5 38 PM Page vii F Contents Side Art Using Reference 160 Rotated Tables 162 Left and Right Art Placement Option 163 Solution 1 Using Xtags with Left Right Art Placement 164 Solution 2 Manually Positioning the Rule 166 Text Wraps Runarounds in Autopage 168 Method 1 Treating Wrapping Art as Side Art 168 Method 2 Using an Anchored Box 170 Oversized Two Column Inline Art 172 Handling After Import 172 Bringing in with Xtags 172 Anchoring the H1 Side Head Instead of Side Art 174 Repurposing with Xtags vii More Intricate Coding 183 Working with Heads and Run in Heads 186 Images 186 Searching Through the File 187 Closing the File 188 Know the Content 188 Floating Element Markers 189 Hyperlinks 192 Xtags and FileMaker Pro Level of Understanding 194 Importance of Databases 194 Database 1 Xtags Creator 195 Scripting Option 197 Database 2 Style Sheet Generator 210 Database Production Benefits 216 Xtags 7 3 and Beyond 217 Index 225 Xtags_FM 11 27 06 5 38 PM Page viii viii Xtags Maximized Programs of Choice When I read anyone s software book always like to know the author s favorite programs to work with Here s my list Paging QuarkXPress w Autopage XT Text Editor BBEdit 8 5 Database FileMaker Pro Art Programs Adobe Photoshop CS2 and Adobe Illustrator CS2 Screen Captures Snapz Pro X Web Creation BBEdit 8 5 Dreamweaver MX Programming AppleScript
293. se to look at a design on a 4 color biology book and the chapter feels disconnected The problem for the pager is that they have to sometimes tackle some complicated scenarios The next few examples are figure captions that require some advanced thinking and strategy to achieve Most figure caption combinations I have found can be through Xtags but they do entail some thought ahead of time Side Element with 5 Grouped Boxes This particular example is problematic initially because of the number of ele ments but through some inventiveness we can make this less complicated Here is the way it needs to appear FIGURE 5 3 Wireless hookup lets Internet users log on from nearly anywhere This is comprised of five grouped boxes due to the fact that the vertical rule extending alongside the image needs to be a 5 pt rule I would normally use the line feature for this but cannot since it doesn t support relative placement A 1 pt unanchored box will be used that requires 5 pt to be masked off ae Xtags_Ccho4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 83 F Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 83 To me the masking of the vertical picture box is the only difficult ele ment The figure number can be achieved by using the above and below rules in Quark and setting both up in a style sheet The Xtags style sheet codes for the rule above and below are lt ra 0 5 Solid K 100 0 24 6 45 gt lt rb 13 Solid K 20 24 10 6 45 gt
294. seem time consuming but it s more cost effective to deal with this now rather than doing it when you are in the pag ing process and you lose your momentum So lets first create this Even if you are not a fantastic designer remember to keep the elements consistent and with the same feeling of the book So with this I will get the look down I will actually create the finished result using Xtags each time one of these show up in a chapter to keep it together Here is the Xtags code lt amp tbu2 36 B 0 31p 24p8 n 0 K n 100 100 Solid n 100 1 t gt vigtl Intro to Second Party Xtensions vig Second party project lt amp te gt lt amp pbu2 22 TL1 0 9 177 R 0 0 roo K n 100 100 Solid n 100 0 f 56 GB Disk Xtags Images vignette2 eps gt lt amp g 2 1 gt There is now a decorative bar down the side that shrinks to fit with relative placement and font has changed Here is how an example of how this will now appear in the first book Intro to Second Party Xtensions Second party Xtension have revolutionized QuarkXPress and may be a big sell in he future for InDesign always had a good grip on QuarkXPress but when need ed that boost of power knew there was a developer out there who had just the hing needed would go out of my way to learn this software also want to help people who sometimes get a little confused on where to start It s one thing to set up a book in Autopage b
295. sely made this error to show how easy it is to find Here s the unan chored text tag with the error lt amp tbu2 0 0 34p 12p Z gt The seventh field has an Z in it which is not an option for that parameter This generated the error At this point go back to your file and correct or if using a translation table the code would need to be corrected there It is al ways a good practice to do your work in the translation table This saves re peated steps The Don t update during import checkbox can speed up the importing by not doing a live update on the screen but rather just displaying the text once everything has been successfully imported Be very careful when selecting the Delete file after successful import check box This will actually delete the entire text file I would only suggest using this if you have a backup of the text file somewhere and you moved the text Xtags_Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 15 Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 15 file to a location on your hard drive Less clean up is required later but can be a problem if you only have one copy of the file and deleted it Use caution if selecting this Importing with Autopage If using Autopage the user can also go to the Autopage Paginate window and select Import Xtags and get the same result as Get Text with Xtags Many pagers prefer this method in their workflow Save Text with Xtags To save the text of an existing Quark file
296. ser friendly where you really don t have to count the com mas or know all of the coding options in any tag The database will just do this for you and you will get the end result in a fraction of the time Building the database takes time but it is a rewarding experience when it is finished Xtags_Cho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 195 p Chapter 9 Xtags and FileMaker Pro 195 I am going to show two databases in this chapter We ll start with the Xtags Creator that I created that builds picture and text boxes for figures unnumbered figures and photos and adds the references and Xtags strings to the text file By breaking down the logic behind this you will quickly see where you can take FileMaker to improve your current workflow E Database 1 Xtags Creator firt Placement Option 1 04 TTA 740015 eee Williams BESI ELLE lea Macintosh HD Users Automation Folder Filemaker Files_NEW Xtags Images ea Ein author _f0101 eps Type of Art X Figures 1 Photos O Unnumbered Autopage Usage A Top Caption _ Figure 1 3 A skyline city view Figure 1 2 A view of New York pre 911 Image Width and Depth Caption Width and Depth Xtags Results Art Maximum Width 24p K Caption Depth 4p Relative f91 lt amp pbu2 300 8 0 24p 53p n 5 n Shrink 24 100 100 Black 0 m 100 100 0 0 0 0 Macintosh HD Users to fit Caption Width R z Automation Folder Filemaker Files_NEW Xtags Images f92 gt lt amp tbu2 300 TL1
297. side caption starts with the picture box indented 8p and the text box coming in 8p TL1 to accommodate the caption and space between I only used the first four fields in the text box 8p TL1 0 7p 6p because there is no special styling in the text box requiring anything other than the defaults for the remainder of the fields You can also start with the text box and then have the art TR1 but for demonstration purposes this made the most sense FIGURE 1 Upper Left Example lt amp pbu2 8p B 0 280 289 n n 100 Solid K 0 m Macintosh HD Art wfall eps gt lt tbu2 8p TL1 0 7p 6p gt FIG lt FIG_NUM gt Figure 1 lt p gt Upper Left Example lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt Side Caption Top Right The top right side caption is accomplished by simply using a 1p TRI code which specifies the space between the art and the caption If using Autopage Xtags_Ch03 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 53 p Chapter 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes 53 and you are paging a symmetrical design this only needs to be pulled in one way and the Horizontal Alignment parameter can take care of the rest FIGURE 2 Upper Right Example lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 280 289 n n 100 Solid K 0 m Macintosh HD Art water tif gt lt tbu2 12 TR1 0 79 48 gt FIG lt FIG_NUM gt Figure 2 lt p gt Upper Right Example lt amp te gt lt amp g 1 2 gt Top Caption The top caption and bottom caption were acco
298. sn t support graduated screens at this point The best method is to make a graduated bul let in Adobe Illustrator and use an anchored picture box Here s an example Bl This is bulleted list paragraph 1 I This is bulleted list paragraph 2 This would require a slight baseline on the anchored picture box Here is the Xtags code for this including the baseline shift lt b 2 gt lt amp pb 12 12 n 100 1 1 1 1 m 0 0 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 03 bullet eps gt lt b0 gt Anchored Picture Box Example 3 Pictures will infrequently start off a paragraph sort of like a drop cap will They begin the paragraph with the text wrapping around the image I ve seen this a lot in cookbooks They may start the paragraph off with a small image of the food that takes up about 3 lines Here s a example Calamari Clams and Shrimp A new twist for the seafood lover by combining calamari clams and shrimp over a white sauce with a few spices thrown in for flavor Served with fresh garlic bread and a suggested red wine to compliment the dinner Read the recipe below Usually the picture is in color to give it more commercial appeal The main details to notice is that there is a 75 rule the runaround is only to the bot tom and the right and it s an ascent anchored box The anchored picture box code is lt amp pb 64 67 a 0 75 n 100 1 12 m 1 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapte
299. ssary term and definition and then have someone code it for the end matter this is not cost effective Instead I made a workflow where the following happens 1 Using the Batch Export feature in Autopage the entire text is exported to an xtags xtg file 2 Through FileMaker Pro I go through and remove the unnecessary con tent then pull all of the terms that match the style names for that book 3 These terms are put into a separate file where they are reformatted with Xtags to fit the end matter file 193 ae Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 194 p 194 Xtags Maximized 4 Through an AppleScript all of the terms are alphabetized and the dupli cate terms that may have occurred in more than one chapter are removed 5 The new file is then ready for import into QuarkXPress Try doing that by hand and see how long it would take The entire process of running this through FileMaker Pro will take 5 minutes or less after the ini tial Autopage Batch Export if set up correctly E Importance of Databases When I get sold on a program it s hard to steer me away from it I have soft ware that I primarily work with including Xtags Autopage AppleScript BBE dit and FileMaker Pro I have two databases in particular that I want to show you I m not going to break down every single detail because that would be better served in another book which I might just do soon But if you have the software listed above you will fin
300. style and b2 at the end of the box xx Use Macro p1 JArt Name p2 caption p3 for Photos Some coral pe Ez TA reefs in the 5 J e Ae South Pacific are believed to have survived for millions of years PAC Rock mass under the sea is caused many differe Papakolea Green Sand Beach For very private times Pine Trees Beach is a favorite for travelers who are looking for tranquility over mass appeal Spencer Beach Park is protected by a giant reef BEX In Maine the ocean temperature rarely exceeds 65 degrees in the hottest parts of the summer Sand Beach is nestled between mountains and rocky shores For tran B quility over mass appeal Spencer Beach Park is protected by a giant reef Makalawena Beach contains a rocky area and the sandy beaches fea tures one of the most incredible views of mountains in the distance The coded sample should have a mixture of character styles Xtags and Autopage codes I incorporate as many strings into Xtags as possible My translation table can end up being very involved but it keeps markup errors Xtags_Cho1 8 11 27 06 5 41 PM Page 8 F Xtags Maximized to a minimum I also put my AutoTags into my translation table This way the coder would only see a marking like LC in the coded sample but my translation table would have LC LC 1 M 36p A 4 S 5 H Cyan First Layout Change On
301. such as Napoleon Dynamite and Dream Theater are available in bookstores Here is the code that makes this up The unanchored lines lbu include BL1 for the closing line lt amp tbu2 0 0 27p 35p p2 n K n 100 100 Solid K 12 1 11 14 9 5 14 t gt bx_tl lt B gt S lt gt creenwriting lt B gt R lt gt esources bx_tx1 lt B gt Internet lt gt There Dream Theater are available in book stores lt te gt lt lbu 0 BL1 0 0 27p or n 4 K 35 Solid 0 Plain gt lt lbu 8 0 270 35 85 or n 4 K 35 Solid 0 Plain gt lt lbu 6 34 0 318 0r n 4 K 35 Solid 0 Plain gt lt g 4 3 2 1 gt Xtags_Cch03 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 65 p Chapter 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes 65 1 The first line following the end of text lt amp te gt is the bottom line Since the positioning depends on the depth of the text box this required a 0 BL1 0 code on the x and y coordinates so the line would split the gray box and trap correctly 2 The second line is the horizontal line extending underneath the title 3 The third rule is the vertical line that extends down from the top of the box meeting with the second horizontal line Neither the second nor the third line need the BL1 or TL1 treatment because they will always be in this position E Anchored Lines Anchored lines are very similar to the unanchored lines with a few differences that will be mentioned Here
302. swashes sups superscript position c2sc all small caps subs subscript position smcp small caps dnom denominator position An example of OpenType would be if you were importing fractions If the cod ing department typed the following dm The fractions are 1 2 1 4 and 3 4 The text would import as it looks in the coded file The fractions are 1 2 1 4 and 3 4 But if the typist added the OpenType code at the start of the paragraph dm lt o frac gt The fractions are 1 2 1 4 and 3 4 The text would import using the substituted OpenType fractions The fractions are 2 1 4 and 34 Xtags_Cho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 221 F Xtags 7 3 and Beyond 221 Menu Differences A few differences exist in the menus in the Xtags 7 3 version Instead of Get Text with Xtags Quark 7 introduces Import Text with Xtags This matches how Quark 7 no longer uses Get Text but rather Import Text Picture Import Text with Xtags Save Text with Xtags The Edit menu also has Paste with Xtags and Copy with Xtags which are slightly different from the Copy Xtags Text and Paste Xtags Text from all previous Xtags versions Copy with Xtags Paste with Xtags Insert Special Characters Under Utilities Insert Character are two options Special nonbreaking and Special This contains practically any spacing you can imagine including thin space hair space flexible space etc To have to go to this m
303. t B gt Bold lt K gt All caps lt I gt Italic lt H gt Small caps lt O gt Outline lt gt Superscript lt S gt Shadow lt gt Subscript lt U gt Underline lt V gt Superior lt W gt Word underline lt gt Back to current style Xtags_Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 25 p Chapter 2 Getting to Know Xtags 25 These can be used in the styles or just used in paragraphs for local styling I find when using Bold or Italic it should be set in the actual font For example if you want an Times Italic Make sure you are using I Times Italic opposed to Times with lt I gt in the style sheet The enchancemen can end with the same character or with a lt gt Here is a good use of one of these tags in the actual text flow when styling a word needing italicized I ll show both acceptable endings lt I gt Figure 1 1 lt gt or lt l gt Figure 1 1 lt I gt Shading lt S100 gt This is the Shading of the type color The range is from 0 100 Tracking lt t0 gt This is the Tracking of the type Do not get this confused with the lt t0 gt tab code There is no asterisk in the character styles The range is from 500 through 500 Horizontal and Vertical Scale lt hl00 gt _ This is the Horizontal or Vertical Scale Only one or the other can be used Horizontal scaling uses the lt h100 gt code Vertical scaling uses the lt y100 gt code The range is 25 through 400 Type Size lt zl2 gt The z code
304. t Paste lt f Berkeley Medium gt lt t0 gt NL lt p 36 36 0 13 5 0 2 U S English gt lt t3 gt 4 lt f Berkeley Italic gt height lt f Berkeley Medium gt lt t0 gt lt t3 gt This is the depth height of the text box By typing in the maximum depth of the art can be and adding a question mark the box will lt KT gt shrink to fit lt p gt to the depth of the art ch_end As you can see in the highlighted text this is where Xtags throws in the fonts picture boxes paragraph overrides tracking and baseline shift information This is only a partial example of what will show up We will tackle this small example to show how we can make this content XML tagged instead of Quark ready content There are a series of steps I go through I will have the replace ments to its easier to follow along Its best to record these into an AppleScript 1 Remove all of the paragraph style sheet definitions at the start of the doc ument They look like this CFT S CFT lt C gt lt h Standard gt lt kn0 gt lt kt0 gt lt ra0 gt lt 1rb0 gt lt d0 gt lt p 0 0 0 30 0 0 U S English gt lt K gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z30 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Slimbach Black gt Xtags_Ch08 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 180 F 180 Xtags Maximized This can be achieved by doing a Grep Find and Replace which was dis cussed in Chapter 6 The w is any word character a z A Z _ 0 9 This sho
305. t all in support roles and never really allowed to show his skills and Fortune as a comedian Then came a little movie called Ace Ventura that did major things at the box office Following that movie Carrey has been unstoppable Continuous blockbusters like Liar Liar Dumb and Dumber The Truman Show and The Mask have proven that Carrey is at the top of his professional game Rise to Fame Some may consider that when using an asymmetrical design making a lay out change full width having the left indent 11p and the first line 11p would work If there are two lines within the title this always presents a problem and I don t suggest this Making this a piece of Side Art is a bigger nightmare because if you are roundtripping your content you can find it more of a hassle to deal with I suggest anchoring the H1 head and using a full width layout change to accommodate the space 1 Make a layout change for the full margin width ILC 1 M 40p 2 The first text style sheet TX1 will require this Xtags override lt p 84 84 g U S English gt lt t 84 0 1 gt 3 Since an anchored text box will be putting in the H1 head the style sheet will reflect the following TX1 lt p 84 84 g U S English gt lt t 84 0 1 gt lt b 4 gt lt amp tb 64 50 a n 100 n 0 1 1 gt H1 Jim Carrey s Rise to Fame and Fortune lt amp te gt lt b0 gt 4 The process could be streamlined in the Xtags t
306. t and creating the examples to learn from Xtags_ChO1l 11 27 06 5 41 PM Page 1 F I remember hearing the phrase A fool and his money will soon part I feel that the phrase Only a fool will bring in art manually when Xtags exists should be coined Xtags 7 3 for Quark 7 Xtags 6 2 for Quark 6 5 and Xtags 4 2 for Quark 4 1 1 is a text and image importing exporting XTension by Em Software that has a much broader scope than XPress Tags in QuarkXPress With Xtags you can write code to import floating and anchored art create boxes shrink to fit floating and anchored art override paragraph settings create a translation table and much more Xtags is a very in depth program and I m really hoping that this book shows you how vast the possibilities are My goal here is to show you some of the best methods for increased productivity I will say that you will need Xtags if you are using Autopage and want to maximize your productivity I personally cannot do without Xtags nor would I m Why Use Xtags Operating QuarkXPress without Xtags is like buying a car without the tires There is so much importing power in this XTension that not using it would only amount to decreased profits for you or your company There are a lot of companies out there that own this software that are not using it even close to its potential They look at a floating element that has difficult elements and decide to put it in the library instead Then they po
307. t box is at 5p6 so the second box needs to start at 5p6 x First 20 shaded box lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 5p6 2p4 Second 70 shaded box lt amp pbu2 5p6 B 0 18p6 2p4 The circle under the box number can be imported using a picture box tag with the oval o being indicated The line at the bottom will be brought in with using the line feature The tag will be 11 BL1 from the text box with a 12 points y coordinate lt amp lbu 11 BL1 12 0 24p or 1 5 70 gt The circle gives you a chance to use the BR1 tag which isn t used as much as the others I try to use this just to keep in practice The picture box tag is reading 12p6 from the bottom right of the line to center the circle lt amp pbu2 12p6 BR1 6 12 5 12 5 G0 Gn 100 K 20 m 5 gt Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 110 110 Xtags Maximized 6 The combined tags for this box are as follows lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 5p6 2p4 n n 100 K 20 m gt lt pbu2 5p6 B 0 18p6 2p4 n 0 100 K 70 m J gt lt pbu2 1pl0 B 3 22 22 399 0 1 100 01 1 1 1 m gt lt tbu2 11 B 8 22p2 35p wn n 100 n gt bxt Box Title bx All of the box text lt amp te gt lt lbu 11 BL1 12 0 24p or 1 5 70 J gt lt amp pbu2 12p6 BRI 6 12 5 12 5 0 n 100 K 20 m oJ gt lt amp g 3 2 1 4 5 6 gt 7 If using a translation table the simplified coding of this b
308. t could be used in textbooks as well Its when you have the caption screened underneath the image Look at this example FIGURE 15 3 Wireless Internet With the onset of online shopping auction companies and the ease of use through wireless Internet home business ventures are growing to be where some of the big money lies Once established setting priorities and hours are easier but still require a lot of push The idea here is that the caption screen will always be 6 points down from the top of the image and 6 points from the bottom of the image So regardless of the length of the caption unless it goes longer the screen will always be that depth To do this 1 The picture box will need to start 6 points from the left but would need a 2 8 6 8 runaround If the image needed to be on the right you could just move the image 6 points from the right and the caption would still break the same without adjusting the styles as shown here FIGURE 15 3 Wireless Internet With the onset of online shopping auction companies and the ease of use through wireless Internet home business ventures are growing to be where some of the big money lies Once established setting priorities and hours are easier but still require a lot of push 2 The text box will come in next based on the depth of the image as well as the runaround from the image There is a 16 point relative placement depth reduction so the caption will be 8
309. t here in degrees The range is from 75 to 75 Here is how the box will be skewed If placing an image in the skewed box the image within will be skewed to the same degree of the box Boxskews can be combined to make interesting effects for backgrounds flags This is where special handling is applied for the box If you don t assign anything here the box stays to the front You can apply more than one flag For example you could have the following acceptable sequence in the tag lbk Selecting k instructs the box to be sent to the back While the Send to Back feature is my main use for flags there are several other options box print suppression flip contents horizontally send to back lock item picture box print suppression content flip contents vertically lt UTA So runaround This is an important field not to leave empty If you don t want a runaround on the box you must type an n The default is setup to have a runaround A box with a runaround will receive an obstruction message during the Autopage pagination process so unless absolutely necessary I would not suggest applying the runaround if using Autopage Xtags_Cch03 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 45 F Chapter 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes 45 9 frame width Type in the needed frame value such as 5 or 1 pt If a frame is unneeded leave this blank You can also place paren theses around this and add cor
310. t the anchored piece would import each time at the start of the paragraph containing the photo reference I personally would also include the reference tag directly after the anch to ensure that the photo lined at the top of the anchored box I didn t want to overcomplicate this but that would eliminate the placement issue When this imports with Xtags the text will have the anchored picture box as a placeholder for the area Here is an Xtags code for the anchored pic ture box placeholder lt amp pb 78 118 a n 100 n 12 2 12 m gt This way you could still use the first step from Method 1 and get the same effect Here s an example of the placeholder For demonstration purposes I put a 10 screen on the anchored placeholder for visibility The Receeding Shoreline Sea level will cause exposure of the coastal plain and erosion by rivers draining out to the receeding shoreline On the shelf deep water sediments shallow water sediments The example is shown in Photo 2 AR P2 If sea level fall is extensive enough the entire shelf will develop a sequence boundary The shelf edge will correlate to a stratigraphic horizon in the more continuous sequence of deep water sediments This horizon is the correlative conformity of the shoreline Shallow sandy bottoms are home to many stingrays search ing for shells There is a significant occurrence of coral outcrop pings dispersed among the sandy areas Ant
311. t touch the advanced options page that the right informa tion will be entered into the Xtags strings Here is a partial example of what is seen in this section Picture Box Art Advanced amp pbu2 Box Skew Angle Flags Placement Color Runaround Box Skew 0 Box Angle 0 C Runaround Flags None Bg Color Black Bg Shade 0 Placement Centered Xtags_Cho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 207 p Chapter 9 Xtags and FileMaker Pro 207 As you can see in this example the Background Shade is 0 and the Placement is Centered therefore the tag will have the highlighted areas altered from their defaults lt amp pbu2 0 B 0 30p 24p 0 0 n n 100 Black 0 c Cae Since the runaround is not selected the n will go into the runaround field automatically It s important to set this up with the error checking The way the Calculation works for the Placement is by filtering through each of the possibilities using a Case statement and matching on one of them Here is how this would need to be written Case Fl Placement Default m Fl Placement Centered c Fl Placement Expand Shrink to Fit f Fl Placement Expand Shrink Ratio a m This states that if the Fl Placement field Default put in an m and continues through the other possibilities Following the last semi colon is another m which means if something else is in this field or nothing ch
312. t variations To get this result 1 The Learning by Example box is standard but will need 35 opacity on the rule and the type This can be added in the style sheets but for this example I m showing this as an override highlighted below lt rb 2 Solid K 70 35 0 0 6 gt lt p35 gt 2 The second box is the text box below It will have a Black 0 back ground to mask off the image behind it This is very standard 3 The picture box will import the image with the Send to Back flag active The relative placement of 35p R 3p 0 positions this correctly where 12 points are to the left right and bottom giving it a unique bor der effect that will look different depending on the depth Since this is a PSD file there are many options to choose from because the layers are all editable inside of Quark Each layer displays the active Photoshop filter These can be changed inside of Quark 7 with this latest update allowing you to not have to jump back and forth between Quark 7 and the art program Xtags_cCho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 224 224 Xtags Maximized The code for this entire box would be lt amp tbu2 1p B 1 19p 5p n n 100 n gt Title lt p35 gt lt rb 2 Solid K 70 35 0 0 6 gt Learning by Example lt amp te gt lt amp tbu2 0 BLI 8 19p 35p n 100 K 20 012 12 9 12 gt Text Here lt amp te gt lt amp pbu2 12 TL1 2p1 21p 35p R 3p 0 k
313. tal and Vertical Scale 25 HTML 175 184 188 189 192 Hyperlinks 192 Hyphenation and Justification H amp Js 19 Indented Relative Placement 69 Interparagraph Max Inline Text Elements 113 Insert Character 221 Xtags_Index 11 27 06 6 50 PM Page 227 Keep Lines Together 20 Keep with Next 20 Kerning 25 Labels Below Art Alphas 79 Layer Name 50 64 Line Modify 63 Line Name 64 Line Type 63 MacPerl 20 22 32 117 126 138 161 169 170 Master Guides 176 Master Pages 37 MathType 28 56 75 125 Menu Differences in Xtags 7 3 221 Minimum Height 76 Modify Window 50 Multi Columns 111 Multiple Inset 32 119 130 208 Offset x 48 68 Offset y 48 68 Omit Default Elements in Xtags List Tags 12 Origin Tags 97 100 Output separate tags lt B gt lt I gt vs lt BI gt 13 Oval Text Box with Offset Shadow 127 Paragraph Alignment 19 Paragraph Attributes 125 Paragraph Parameters 23 Paragraph Style Sheets 26 28 30 179 180 Paste with Xtags 221 Paste Xtags Text 12 13 16 18 42 221 Pasteboard 18 78 83 85 Importing on 61 Perl 17 Picture Box Using Skew 123 Picture Pathname 49 Picture Usage 100 Pixangle 49 Pixskew 49 Placement 47 48 PowerMath 75 Profitability 3 PSD Files 219 p Index 227 QuarkXPress 4 1 1 1 32 38 47 137 208 QuarkXPress 6 5 1 32 47 137 QuarkXPress 7 1 137 217 Character Attributes 222 Enable Ligatures 222 M
314. ted Text 119 Figure Caption Usage 82 Copy and Paste Xtags 16 Copy with Xtags 221 Copy Xtags Text 12 13 16 17 32 36 38 39 42 71 97 126 142 143 164 204 Creating Boxes with Xtags 101 Custom Publishing Using Xtags 141 Delimiters 13 Don t Export Style Sheet Definitions 11 Drop Caps 22 Error Appearing in the Last Space 39 Error Code 32768 39 Expand or Shrink to Fit with Graduated Screen 130 FileMaker Pro 19 35 147 192 193 197 216 Additional Features 214 Advanced Options 205 Art Placement Options 201 Calculated AppleScript 198 199 Caption Positioning 202 p Caption Width and Depth 203 Database Production Benefits 216 Exporting to Translation Table 208 Image Width and Depth 203 Importance of Databases 194 Indents 212 Level of Understanding 194 Native AppleScript 198 Perform AppleScript 198 Scripting Option 197 Setting Style Sheets 213 Setting up the Database 198 Type of Art 201 First Baseline 50 51 87 133 Fit to Height Fit to Width 73 74 95 96 Flags 44 62 64 103 Font Definition 26 Font Usage 182 Forced Anchored Leading 75 76 Forced Return 38 Frame Color 45 Frame Gap 45 46 Frame Height 45 Frame Shade 45 Frame Shape concave 45 convex 45 oval 45 109 straight 45 Frame Style 46 Frame Width 45 Get Text with Xtags 13 16 18 32 158 Grouping 42 56 76 78 81 83 113 163 Headers and Contents 7 Height 42 Horizon
315. ted to be This book can really give you an edge if you actually read it and do the work My belief is that software books collect dust on the shelves of compo sition companies everywhere It is always the 15 of the workforce that will pick up a book and actually read it Those same people are generally the ones who end up with better raises new opportunities and the best projects Don t let others tell you it cannot be accomplished if you feel otherwise I ve been the victim of that too many times I have worked in a production department where I constantly heard people say This cannot be done It s a manual thing When I was new to the department I would sit back and say to myself that it can be done I made the mistake of not challenging them and that was probably a bad idea in hindsight It is always best to let others know what you have discovered because it will quickly become part of the work flow if others realize it can be accomplished It is a good idea not to be intimidated by the tags When first looking at an Xtags string it can seem overwhelming but you need to look at each comma as a field If you ve ever worked in a database program try to picture each field like that and it may become easier to grow more comfortable with Regardless of your past experience with Xtags it s time to challenge yourself and gain a new understanding of what is possible Xtags_Ch02 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 11 hy Getting to K
316. ted words above the text in this example 1 Inthe Horizontal Alignment parameters make sure the Side Art 3 is set as Reference Side Art 1 Outside B Side Art 2 Outside k Side Art 3 Reference jag Unfortunately the Horizontal Alignment parameter is the only place to apply this feature At this point I do not know of a code equivalent to call in Reference for an override 2 Find an average size for your side element text box For example if it is by 7p then have your ANNO style center or left justify above the word e Xtags_Ch07 11 27 06 6 46 PM Page 161 F Chapter 7 Xtags Working with Autopage 161 Have an Xtags code SA before the ANNO and a SA2 and SA3 that go around the Autopage Object tag The reference tag will imme diately follow next to the word the ANNO will be placed above Within the SA2 code you ll have a soft return The SA code calls out the style sheet for the annotation This way it can be typed directly before the word The tagging will look like this T1 She is SA thinking SA2 S 2 SA3 SR 2 V 3 thanking The SA and SA2 will be set up in Xtags as SA lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 7p 2p3 n gt ANNO Starting the Box SA2 lt n gt lt p gt Soft returning AutoTag The AutoTag will be soft returned and will pick up the same style as the text so it will line up properly SA3 lt amp te gt Closing the text This may
317. th a 2p8 additional width to accommodate the 1p4 x and the additional 1p4 width required Since the text is inset 2p on the left and right 28p will be the maximum width the text box can be This box reads off of the text box width so this will be using 1p4 TL2 x with 2p y lt amp pbu2 1p4 TL2 2p 28p R 2p8 0 8 n Gn 100 K 15 m M 55555 209 gt Our next box will be the upper right square This will also read off of the text box requiring a 1p4 TR3 x and 2p y coordinates lt amp pbu2 1p4 TR3 2p 8 8 n n 100 K 80 m gt Xtags_ChO5 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 136 F 136 Xtags Maximized 5 The left vertical box running the length of the text is next which sits at the coordinates of 2p TL4 x off of the text again and 1p4 y This will also be relative to the length of the text but will have 2p6 5 additional depth added because the descenders on the text extend the box by 1 5 points lt amp pbu2 2p TL4 1p4 8 30p R 2p6 5 0 n 6n 100 K 30 m M 239 gt 6 The bottom bar and the right bar are very similar to their box parallel from it The bottom right square will require a 1p4 BR7 offset from the text box lt amp pbu2 1p4 BR7 1p2 5 8 8 n n 100 K 80 m gt 7 The complete tags for this will be lt amp tbu2 2p B 2p 14p 30p n 6n 100 0 gt Text Here lt amp te gt lt amp pbu2 2p TL1 2p 8 8 n n 100 K 80 m
318. th only minor adjusting needed If you are hoping to get the images to position exact you will want to invest in Autopage since this is one of the many features of the program Creating Boxes with Xtags Creating boxes with Xtags is one of my favorite aspects of the program This is where one can really push the envelope and accomplish some intricate things In this section I have created many examples to show you the time saving benefits of building boxes through Xtags code from simple boxes to some very involved scenarios From experimentation I can take virtually any box and write the code to have it import using Xtags The advantage to this is that everything will trap if set up correctly and shrink to fit leaving very little if any adjust ments to be made when paging I have a few procedures I consistently follow when setting up boxes 1 Try to use as few boxes as possible during the set up If I can use insets or First Baseline to accomplish this I ll spend a little extra up front time to keep the boxes as user friendly as possible 2 Make sure if setting up for XML usage that the text can read through with out any text breaks otherwise the XML will not stay well formed If the box isn t being used with XML this isn t an issue I still try to make it as simplified as I can 3 If there are any blends needed I set them as Adobe Photoshop or Adobe Illustrator files because Xtags currently does not support Quark blends
319. that is smaller than that size The unanchored line is set up in this way lt lbu 176 134 0 212 1 n 6 Blue Green 100 15 Thin Thick 0 Plain 2 gt The breakdown for each unanchored line field is as follows 1 x This represents the left position x coordinate on the page of the line By using B 0 B 0 after the x coordinate before the comma the art will position on the pasteboard You can use the BL1 TL1 positioning on the x and y during placement 2 y This represents the top position y coordinate of the box where it imports on the page Normally this also should be at 0 for the top box 3 angle This is the angle from the terminal point of the line 4 width This is the width of the line from the terminal point 5 flags This is where you can have special handling applied for the line including the type of line it will be You can apply more than one flag For example you could have the following acceptable sequence in the tag orlb Here are the options r line tool ray o orthogonal tool b box suppression l lock item 6 runaround The runaround is self explanatory It puts a runaround around the line The amount of the runaround is specified in field 11 The default is n or blank and i for runaround similar to the box and text box feature 7 width This is the width of the line such as 0 5 1 or 2 8 color For lines that don t support
320. the Gap feature the color will be in it s own field such as Color_01 or if there is a Gap then Xtags_Ch03 11 27 06 6 31 PM 10 ll 12 Page 63 p Chapter 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes 63 you would have the line color first and the color gap second in parenthesis such as Color_01 Color_02 As mentioned earlier the color must be defined first Heres how the Line and Gap will appear in the Line Modify window in QuarkXPress Line Color f Color 01 s Shade 80 3 Gap Color W Color_02 4 Shade 60 3 shade The shade can be in it s own field such as 60 or if there is a Gap then you would have the line shade first and the gap shade second in parenthesis such as 80 60 line type If needing a different line than the standard solid line you can apply any of the others by typing in the name from the frame pull down menu such as Dash Dot Dotted Dotted 2 etc The list below shows a portion of the frame names eeeeeeenes All Dots wee oes Dash Dot oe oe Dotted m m m m Dotted 2 J u 50d Double lt T hjck Thin runaround amount outset If you have the 6 runaround let for i you will need an actual runaround amount listed in this field For lines the runaround can only have a single Outset amount The lines feature does not support top left right or bot
321. the box and finds the art the second part closes it off The input coding file should look similar to the following when set up lt amp tt2 yourtitle ttl gt T1 The following equation is needed DM dm1 EQ_001 eps dm2 T1 This is the text following When the markup department types the dm1 equation path name dm2 it will automatically bring in each equation where needed if named properly This can also be achieved using MacPerl or writing an AppleScript to number each new EQ number as it comes to it You are ready to import the equations into your document I always test a couple first to make sure they are working Xtags_Ch05 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 127 Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 127 Oval Text Box with Offset Shadow When the content is placed into a rounded box with a shadow this is typi cally positioned inline and used as a Tip or possibly a Quote You may even see this as a margin feature but only smaller in width This is fairly easy to do but requires that you have certain spacing built into both boxes to achieve the result TIP Database programs like FileMaker Pro can take scripting and data entry and combine the two making one of the most cost effective programs to work out of You will need to use the oval box type shade the background 15 add a First Baseline of 2p and add 1p6 to the box depth field 9 points in the code lt amp tbu2 0 B 0 25
322. the depth to the bot tom of the text This is achieved by having the image import to the top left at 14 x and 24 y selecting the f in the 16 field having the Send to Back flag and using relative placement and adding 1p7 to the depth lt pbu2 14 TL1 24 25p 24p R 1p7 0 k n n 100 n f 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 05 blend eps gt The Important Points title will just position at 5p x and 0 y We will also be adding the gap in the rule shading at 15 for the 4pt double rule and using the centered vertical alignment lt amp tbu2 5p B 0 15p9 33 n 4 K 75 15 Double c gt The final code to make this box is lt amp tbu2 14 B 28 22p8 24p n n 100 12 9 4 9 gt lext goes here lt te gt lt pbu2 14 TL1 24 25p 24p R 19 0 k n n 100 f 555 20 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 05 blend eps gt lt amp tbu2 55 B 0 189 33 n 4 K 75 15 Double C gt bxt Important Points lt amp te gt lt amp g 3 2 1 gt 2 Xtags_ChO5 11 27 06 6 39 PM Page 131 Chapter 5 Creating Boxes and Elements 131 Box with 3 Separate Parts Depending on the design it is possible to find a box that will require being split into 3 separate parts to achieve automating This is the case with the box element shown here The rigid outline makes it too difficult to just have a top and bottom piece as seen in the Si
323. the production cycles and start building it Start slow get one thing working and then move on to the next Don t make the mistake of having 30 uncompleted things in one database That will end up being troublesome later My opinion is that anytime you can have a group of people working in a program that is customized to the needs of your company profitability will be the end result Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 217 TT Or ay I really anticipate that you will have picked up many new techniques in this book that can be applied to your current workflow It is in your best interest to practice the techniques shown within this book whenever time permits Try to work with taking exported Xtags content and repurposing for the web or XML using BBEdit I really believe this is the direction more textbook pub lishers will be taking and you can really be ahead of others by customizing your workflow and finding faster methods for repurposing You will find that this can really be job security in the changing publishing market Xtags 7 3 Overview Xtags is a software that is constantly expanding and growing Some major advancements reside in the latest Xtags update supporting Quark 7 I believe its one of the most important Quark updates ever I plan on having another edition of Xtags Maximized next year that will dive deeply into the new table tags feature more box examples as well as things that may have been omit ted At press time Em Sof
324. ther may have 55225_f0102 tif which would be the last 5 of the ISBN and then the figure number They may use this later for archiving purposes or repurposing so the naming is critical As a result you will want to have the Calculated AppleScript be able to swap this out based on which figure you need That is why the field Art Name is important because the naming is specified here so Fu author _f0101 eps For this example we ll say we are going to use the first 3 letters of the author s last name in the name of the art In this example our targeted result will be wil_f0101 eps To set this up a calculated AppleScript would need to be written I will demonstrate how the program will choose between two different options by using the Case option which is basically doing an If statement for as many options as needed For this example we ll only use two One is to achieve the f0101 eps naming and the other the author_f0101 eps The highlighted areas show how this is reading off of the fields The fields being used are Chapter No Autopage Yes No and Art Name tell application BBEdit amp activate 1 amp Case Xtags Creator F1 Art Name f0101 eps replace f d d a e X using fg1 Chapter amp Xtags Creator Chapter No amp f amp Xtags Creator Chapter No amp 2 eps fg2 amp If Xtags Creator F1 Autopage
325. ting whenever possible and starting with a short code marker We will discuss this in a later chapter The code then will look like this in the final coded file fgc art1 Chapter 01 fg01_001 eps art2 lt fgn gt Figure 1 1 lt f gt lt f gt lt p gt Figure Caption art3 Translation Table Codes For certain characters it s important to use the ASCII coding for these to work The following codes need to be used within a translation table to work properly when imported Tab lt 009 gt Return lt 013 gt Backslash Translation Table Format A translation table needs to be an ASCII file that can be set up in most appli cations but I prefer using BBEdit I refer a lot to BBEdit and I think it s one of those programs that no pager should be without The time saved alone on working in the translation table is worth the investment It s best to just start in a text editor and save with the ttl extension on the end of it Xtags_Ch02 36 11 27 06 5 56 PM Page 36 p Xtags Maximized It is also possible to set up the translation table in Quark and then do Save Text and select the ASCII Text format This requires an extra step and addi tional back and forth time when changes are needed I ve actually witnessed one setup person who would make the changes and then he would forget to resave the translation table to ASCII again Then he would fight the transla tion table for a half an hour wonderi
326. title gt 3 End Result lt chapter title gt Building Picture and Text Boxes lt chapter title gt Xtags_Ch0s8 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 183 p Chapter 8 Repurposing with Xtags 183 You can get a lot of mileage on the above search for style r This is basically just looking at the style sheet any content within and the return Most styles will read off of this especially paragraphs I ve had books where 60 of the content was handled by matching the style sheet names and using this code More Intricate Coding Going beyond the basics we will use the Xtags exported tags to change lists boxes style enhancements and other tags I think it is best to make your own BBEdit file of the content I have and try each of these examples and practice along as I show each of these examples This should give you a better under standing of the results you will need to produce Let s start with some inline elements This could be italicized words key terms in text among many other possibilities Let s first look at the example NL lk lt f Berkeley Italic gt height lt f Berkeley Medium gt This is the depth height of the text box By typing in the maximum depth of the art can be and adding a question mark the box will lt KT gt shrink to fit lt p gt We have three different tags that will be altered We need a list an italic and a key term We can do all of these by following the Grep replacements Let s st
327. to make sure a lt amp te gt follows it The code is written to find any lt amp tbu2 and any lt amp te gt and generates a Search Result in BBEdit The number of occur rences must be equal or one is mismatched There may be an easier way ap proach but this one has proven successful so I haven t changed it Xtags Caption Positioning Caption positioning is one of the more critical aspects of the XTension and gives some people the most trouble When looking at the design there are generally three ways in which to position the art above below or on the side For the Autopage workflow it doesn t matter which side the caption is on be cause Autopage will place it on either with the Horizontal Alignment parame ter If not using Autopage and you are working with a symmetrical design you will need to base it on averages on which one you think you ll need the most If the caption is below lt amp pbu2 etc lt tbu2 0 BL1 6 30p 6p etc The position is 0x bottom left 1 6 points is the space below the bottom of the art If on the side lt amp pbu2 etc lt tbu2 12 TR1 0 10p 10p etc The 12 TRI would be the 12 points distance from the top right of the art The 0 is the Oy position Xtags_Ch0O3 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 52 52 Xtags Maximized Here are some examples of how the different captions and pictures can be handled using the BL1 TL1 and TR1 options Side Caption Top Left The top left
328. to fix this or use the bottom right of the palette Offset Across Offset Down Scale Across Scale Down Xtags_Cch03 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 43 p Chapter 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes 43 If not you could end up with mistakes highlighted in this example lt amp pbu2 124 585 46 59 0 0 i1 0 K n 100 100 Solid W 100 1 1 1 1 m 100 100 2 2 718 0 0 Hard Drive APManual Art ch_001 eps gt The highlighted fields illustrate that the art would always position at 124 x 585 y while the i for runaround is on affecting the 1 1 1 1 runaround field The art is offset 2 x and 2 718 y This would be a disaster if every piece of art came in that way By checking the piece you re copying with Xtags you should end up with more of the result below lt amp pbu2 0 0 46 59 0 0 n 0 K n 100 100 Solid n 0 0 m 100 100 0 0 0 0 Hard Drive APManual Art ch_001 eps gt All of these are set correctly for what is needed It is essential to start out with the correct amounts in the fields It is also of great importance to know what each of these fields represents To better gain some understanding build some strings from scratch following the Xtags field section in this book or refer to the Xtags User Guide by Em Software Inc Unanchored Picture Box Tags To try to make this more comprehensible I ll break each field down The screen shots show where this would be implemented within Quark
329. to manually bring in an image again I speak from experience on this It is important to apply your knowledge of importing art to building boxes side art and other floating elements There are so many efficiencies that can increase the profitability in your company using this program Misconceptions Since using Xtags I have noticed there are many misconceptions about its uses It can be used in many areas of QuarkXPress but does not necessarily do everything and eliminate all manual work However it reduces time spent on so many manual tasks such as importing art and creating style sheets that normally would take away from profitability Some of the biggest arguments that pagers always use to avoid using the program are shown in this section I must stress that most of these statements have come directly from pagers who haven t spent enough time learning the program and continue doing manual tasks that should be automated There is just not enough time to set up a book with Xtags The schedule is too tight I can t get a coded sample set up with all these codes This could be seen as a justifiable excuse to some degree especially when it is the heaviest time of the production season and you re in the middle of several books It is sometimes difficult to put aside the necessary time to focus and complete the upfront tasks However if the book isn t set up with Xtags a mas sive amount of wasted time will be spent manually creati
330. to use the pipe and be very specific Another great example is if you have marginal notes and the first charac ter was all set with lowercase by the typist but after reviewing the design the editor realized they should all be uppercase Instead of going through and changing each instance by hand you could simply do the following Search for mn1 a z r Replace with 1 u 2 3 4 The u is replacing the first lowercase letter following the style name to be an uppercase letter This should give you some basic background on Grep searches I am barely skimming the surface in here on what you can achieve with Grep Per forming Grep searches are very similar to the Perl type of coding if you do that For more detailed information look through the BBEdit User Manual which has an extensive section concerning Grep Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 141 Chapter 6 Custom Publishing 141 Custom Publishing Using Xtags So what is the first step to doing custom publishing using Xtags To demon strate this here is an example of two chapters The Book 1 Top is the style for the book Book 2 Bottom will need to change to match the Book 1 The Impact of Computer Software on Out Lives 139 s Overview of Computer Software The Impact Gato cise fob ase ml bile jo ve coed terial Where I feel this boo you achieve the task without has pull it off 1 always have learned through instruction like this and I alwa
331. tom runarounds like picture and text boxes arrow type This is actually for what type of arrow you will use with your line In most cases you probably will leave this as Plain but Xtags_Ch03 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 64 64 Xtags Maximized there may be times when you ll want an arrow at the end of your line The options are as follows Plain Left lt __ _ Right 5 _ gt Double lt gt Left Feathered lt x Right Feathered 2 _ 25 line name This is an AppleEvent relative box name This should be left blank unless this fits your workflow If you use AppleScript this is a way to name the line so the script can locate it 26 layer name This is for Quark 6 1 and higher This only works for unanchored lines It instructs which layer for the unanchored box to be placed on If not indicated it will be on the selected layer Unanchored Line Example I think this is a good unanchored line example to work with because it shows different treatments for the lines Screenwriting Resources Internet There is an enormous amount of documentation on the Internet concerning the formatting style and boundaries of writing screenplays Magazines Many online and printed magazines contain all the resources you will need to be up and running Libraries Libraries are a fantastic place to locate screenplays Screenplays
332. tware just released Xtags 7 3 for Quark 7 I want to touch briefly on what I have noticed so far with this new edition Table Tags One of the latest features is the long awaited table tags that can create tables similar to Text Box tbu and Picture Box pbu tags These are featured in Xtags 6 3 and Xtags 7 3 These are very advanced tags which also work in combination with Autopage to speed up the paging process even further The table tags will be handled with unique tags Here is a brief overview of these Unanchored tables lt amp tsu x y width height of columns of rows column widths table angle flags runaround etc gt Unanchored ending lt amp tse gt 217 ae Xtags_Ch09 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 218 218 Xtags Maximized Anchored tables lt ts width height of columns of rows column width flags text align frame width etc gt Table row start lt amp trs type height bg color bg shade etc gt Table row end lt amp tre gt Table cell text start lt amp tcs width height horiz span vert span etc gt Table cell pictures lt amp tcp width height horiz span vert span etc gt Many of the parameters within these tags are the same as the text and pic ture box tags These tags are very advanced and work best with Quark 6 5 2 or later The table tags are not written in detail in this book because they were released less than a week prior to this book going to print and I haven t had en
333. uld cover them all unless the designer put in non word characters into the style sheets Its a good practice to have _ instead of spaces as well such as T_FIRST Here is the actual BBEdit Find and Replace window with performing a Grep search Find amp Replace Search For Q M Use Grep Patterns fs Find ABW NEN WHATS 0M Se va Replace gt M start at Top _ Search Selection Only Replace All Wrap Around _ Extend Selection or Search Backwards z Don t Find Cancel J C Case Sensitive _ Match Entire Words Replace With O Due to the fact that I don t have space to show this window each time I m going to just put in a Search for and a Replace With The settings for the following examples will always be Use Grep and Start at Top unless stated otherwise Here s how this will be shown Search for w w w S 2 r Replaced with Leave Blank 2 Delete all character style definitions at the beginning of the chapter They appear like NLN lt P gt lt s100 gt lt t0 gt lt h100 gt lt z12 gt lt k0 gt lt b0 gt lt cK gt lt f Futura Bold gt This is very similar to the paragraph style The difference is that we are not matching against the S code but rather the lt P gt lt K gt etc that starts off the character style definition Here is the replacement Search for w w w lt D gt
334. ut can match on any other style combination The number remains after doing this replacement but it can be removed from the lt listItem gt as easy as doing this replacement Search for lt listltem gt t d t 2 lt Vlistltem gt Replaced with 1 3 4 You will want to make these replacements before you change the rest of the lt listItem gt styles It is easier to match upon the Quark style because the lt Lis tltem gt tag can be part of the unnumbered list lettered list etc To save a val idation time because of closing tag errors it is a good workflow idea to write Grep replacements for each list tag to ensure there is a closing tag Xtags_Ch08 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 186 F 186 Xtags Maximized Working with Heads and Run in Heads Heads such as h1 h2 h3 etc are all fairly easy to deal with but you may run into mathematic books that have numbered heads that require additional cod ing It all depends on the content A H1 with no extra coding would appear in the XML file as lt hl gt This is the head lt hl gt However a numbered H1 that has a 3 4 for the number could need to take on this type of a replacement Search for H1 d d t 2 r Replaced with lt h1 id 2 gt 4 lt Vh1 gt 5 End result lt h1 id 3 4 gt New Directions in Automation lt h1 gt A run in head such as an h3 head that has a paragraph direction following would need to take on this type of tre
335. ut it s another to get the Xtags Headers amp Contents XMLxt and even the QuarkXPress document set up properly The more you have working correctly up front the less chance there will be of unforeseen problems ater in the project I would put this information in a translation table where the actual text file would appear like this vig vigt1 Intro to Second Party Xtensions vig Second party project vig2 For the remainder of this page do the following 1 Copy the text and select Edit Copy Xtags Text 2 Paste into a new BBEdit file Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 148 148 Xtags Maximized The text exported from the Quark file is ch_h1 What is Second Party Software ch_tx1 One of the prerequisites than just reading about descriptions of various tasks See Figure 9 1 ch_tx lt t 1 gt This lt k 2 gt lt kO gt could lt k 2 gt lt kO gt be lt k 2 gt lt k0 gt seen lt k 2 gt lt kO gt as lt k 2 gt lt kO gt a lt k 2 gt lt kO gt setup lt k 2 gt lt kO gt of lt k 2 gt lt k0O gt Xtags ch_mn lt ch_mnkt gt Xtags lt f gt lt p gt A valuable QuarkXPress Xtension that works with the code underneath that you cannot visibly see It works for both text and images ch_fgcp lt BK gt Figure 9 1 lt BK gt lt f gt lt z7b0 5f ZapfDingbats gt n lt z9bOf Helvetica gt lt f gt lt i gt Leisure time for couples is spent more frequently using laptops 3 The paragraphs above show
336. ut you can already see where the field names can enhance your AppleScripts Setting up the Database Setting up the database correctly is important for the end user That is why who ever creates the database really needs to know their Xtags well so they can cap ture all of the different options for each field This first page is showing options such as the image width and depth caption width and depth etc but the Advanced Options has all of the other fields We ll touch on this in a few pages Xtags_Cho9 11 28 06 2 35 PM Page 199 p Chapter 9 Xtags and FileMaker Pro 199 I will say that for the most part the information on the first page is what you will be changing most often Generally the advanced options do not change that often unless you have a real need for them You will want to customize a program like the Xtags Creator to best fit the needs of your company I do feel what m showing here is a good working model because it works well for me and there isn t much I would want to add to it at this point If you are working with several different publishing com panies it can be a major time saver just in figure naming Figure Names Figure naming is where a lot of power can come into play without having to develop an additional art log If you do composition for other companies chances are you will have many different options needed for art naming One company may use something like fg0102 tif while ano
337. utopage and Xtags codes may be a thing of the past To save a Grep pattern that can be applied throughout many projects go to the upper right of the Find amp Replace window select the Patterns pull down menu and choose Add An Add Replace Grep Pattern dialog will appear to name the pattern Xtags_Ch06 11 27 06 6 44 PM Page 153 p Chapter 6 Custom Publishing 153 The same works for Figures and Tables For example in the text flow you will have a reference for a figure You can find the callout such as see Figure 1 1 Then you can write a Grep search that finds this callout and puts in the Autopage code Search for a z a f h z w 2 Figure d d r Replaced with 1 2 3 4 5 AR 6 6 7 This makes sure that on any line other than one starting with style fg that it looks for references for figures The style name for the figures is fgc so I do not want it to match on those lines The only real issue that can happen here is that if there are multiple references to the same piece a reference will be put in for each You can then write a script that will go through and remove duplicate references Another example is in the margin notes If you know the margin note will fall with the key term this can be fairly easy to do With Autopage the iden tifier can be anything so you can just name it the same as the first word or two words in the key term For example The onset of lt
338. ve Technique The purpose for working through all of these examples is to get the user more familiar with the different aspects of the program It seems that a lot of people work with software like this for years but fail to break new ground out of not having proper direction The goal is to show as many different examples as possible covering all of the picture and text box options through the examples 599 The box has a simulated lowercase i that is built easier by using Boxskew than by finding an actual font for this To do this 1 Take a 20 filled picture box for the top box and add a 15 skew to it This will give the following result 2 The bottom picture box will need the same treatment but will need to have more depth This will also need a runaround with 9 pts on the right side The two boxes together will have this coding lt amp pbu2 0 0 42 16 15 n n 100 K 20 m gt lt pbu2 15 21 45 84 15 Gn 100 K 20 1 1 1 9 m gt 3 The other notable is that the text area is not skewed It is merely playing off of the runaround giving it that effect It is important that the text box has the Send to Back flag 4 The complete code for this box is lt pbu2 0 0 42 16 277 15 n n 100 K 13 m 45 gt lt pbu2 15 21 45 84 15 n 100 K 20 1 1 1 9 m 455 gt lt tbu2 27 10 8 271 25 5 n n 100 n gt title Innovat
339. ve tag for the space needed in the vertical picture box to extend the full length of the image lt amp pbu2 2p1 5 TL1 14 1 48p R 1p2 0 k Gn 100 K 0 m gt The second box reads off of the first box with 5 pt TL1 from the image lt amp pbu2 5 TL1 0 1 48p R 0 0 k Gn 100 K 100 m gt The final element is the circle that will read off of the black 1 pt vertical picture box with 8 2 TL1 This circle uses the o option added lt amp pbu2 8 2 TL1 5 8 17 17 n 0 5 0 n 100 n m gt The 5 picture box grouping needs to be lt amp g 1 2 3 4 5 gt Xtags_Ch0O4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 84 F 84 Xtags Maximized 6 Together this code will be lt amp tbu2 0 B 15 10p 24p 6 n gt fgn Figure 5 3 fgc Wireless hookup anywhere lt amp te gt lt pbu2 12 TR1 1 2 30p 5 48p 2 5 0 5 n 100 m 0 5 0 5 56 GB Disk Xtags Book Images Chapter 04 fg04_011 eps gt lt pbu2 2p1 5 TL1 14 1 48p R 1p2 0 k Gn 100 K 0 m gt lt pbu2 5 TL1 0 1 48p R 0 0 k Gn 100 K 100 m gt lt pbu2 8 2 TL1 5 8 17 17 n 0 5 0 6n 100 n m gt lt amp 8gC1 2 3 4 5 gt 7 By using a translation table this code would be broken down for the markup department in simplicity shown here f1 fgn Figure 5 3 fgc Wireless hookup lets Internet users log on from nearly anywhere f2 Chapter
340. wire less Internet home business ventures are growing to be where the big money lies Unlike the commercials that you see where it shows the entrepreneur sitting by his pool sipping a mixed drink a home business does require a lot of extra time Don t fall vic tim to how people make you believe that being in business for yourself will allow you freedom that being in a work setting hinders Chances are you ll be working for a company that has a 7 5 work day and you ll be expect ed to answer the phones and be available through those hours and many times even later This box is very basic and only really has the image to deal with which is very easy to move into a different box and position using a new Xtags string The major difference in this box lies in the fonts and the background art that is in the destination box Here s how it will need to look Wireless Internet Ween With the onset of online shopping auction companies and the ease of use through wireless Internet home business ventures are growing to be where the big money lies Unlike the commercials that you see where it shows the entrepreneur sitting by his pool sip ping a mixed drink a home business does require a lot of extra time Don t fall victim to how people make you believe that being in busi ness for yourself will automatically allow you freedom that being in a work setting hinders Chances are you ll be working for a company that has a 7 5 work d
341. xample all of the elements in a box need grouped This will keep the entire box as one If a figure inside the box is not grouped with the box this will end up somewhere else in the text document 2 Style sheets need to be applied on all lines of text Do not use No Style or the Normal style sheet 3 Each image and their caption will need to be grouped together 4 The text flow should be continuous whether with Autopage links or Quark links 5 Content needs to be inside the margin guides Boxes figures etc cannot position outside of this area If you have figures that are a few points above for alignment purposes my suggestion is to duplicate the file and change the margin guides to keep the images inside Go to the Master Pages then Page Master Guides to adjust this 6 A marker needs to be in place for all boxes and non referenced floating objects For example if you have a margin note but there s nothing in the text referencing this You should put a marker like m01 in the text next to where this appears and one at the beginning of the margin note This saves time later Here s an example of the placement moil Building Skills Gather in a group of two to three students One strategy for becoming better at computer skills is to actually sit down and work on things This will be explained later why this is so important but I assure you that placing these markers should only take a few minutes depen
342. ximized Solution 1 Using Xtags with Left Right Art Placement When the L and R table placement was developed I noticed afterward that this would also work for art Therefore this solution is to import both pieces two different ways through Xtags The concept here is to have the left piece import with the caption on the outside and the rule above both the caption and art The right page art will import with the caption to the right with the rule running full length regardless of the length of the art On the verso page it is easy to get this result but on the recto page I achieved this by having the rule read off the right edge of the caption and run 42p in reverse This allows the piece of art to shrink to fit but doesn t have any impact on the rule running the full length above the two items To achieve this follow these steps 1 Calculate the length of the rule length of caption and maximum width and depth the art can be 2 Put the piece of art on the Ox Oy coordinates of the page It s easier to cal culate the Xtags applying this method 3 Select the Item tool and group together Select Edit Copy Xtags unless you prefer writing the codes out 4 Ina text box place the cursor and select Edit Paste The tags will contain all the pertinent information however you will have to change the items needing TRI BL1 and so on 5 For this example here are the two different Xtags strings RECTO PAGE lt amp p
343. xt box bg shade Type in the background shade percentage here 100 white is the default Sometimes an image can be placed within the background shade to give a different effect such as Xtags_Ch03 11 27 06 6 31 PM Page 47 F 15 16 Chapter 3 Building Picture and Text Boxes 47 text outset If you have the runaround selected in field 8 enter the runaround amount here If you need a different runaround on certain sides the runaround reads top left bottom right You can also plug in these amounts for a runaround here but leave field 8 as n When you turn the runaround on in QuarkXPress 4 1 1 the amounts will hold Unfortunately QuarkXPress 6 5 will not hold at this point When you turn off the runaround it defaults back to 1 1 1 1 placement This defaults to manual m but c for centered can also be selected The centered can be very beneficial if you needed all the art to center within the text area This is achieved by put ting in your width at 30p not shrinking to fit The example below shows how the art will center in the space within the dot ted lines rather than left aligning This works great when needing the art to center by a width The white space on the right and left of the image doesn t cause any production issues patti The other options are a and f The a option is for expand or shrink to fit while maintaining the original aspe
344. y retain something once I do it It locks in the memory better than just reading about descrip tions of various tasks T also want to help people who son one thing to set up a book in Autor tents XMLat and even the QuarkXPre working correctly up front the less chance project This book has not covered every aspect of Autopage because that is not my intention approaching le confused on where o start I s ope 1o be of unforeseen problems li examples that will give y feel if intermediate and advanced users work through u proficient than before Many of these concepts you you ll eam some new and important things along the way e they ll find themselves more ady know but my hope is that The New Direction of Software noticed there misconceptions about it reduces time spent on manual tasks but there get involved and touch things up This is probably a ood thing because otherwis would not be a need for pagers so this is job security Some of the biggest arguments that pagers always use to avoid using the program are shown in this section I must stress that m st Setting up the Project iison elay when a ae e tasks However ifthe bok sh set up with Aopage a Massive Chapter Objectives After studying this chapter you will be able 10 1 Understand the relationship between computer software and how it impacts our daily lives from commuting to leisure time
345. y hard to detect with the eye and I feel that they look very acceptable ae Xtags_Ccho4 11 27 06 6 33 PM Page 91 F Chapter 4 Image and Caption Building 91 Here s an example of an image with the type of shadow I m referring to I have two shadows that I use for this The first is set horizontally and is known as Shadow2 tif The second is set vertically and is Shadow1 tif This way the scaling will not be so varied that major banding occurs To get this l effect The image pulls in standard with only a p 2 width and depth image reduction to assure that no white space will occur Using relative placement I shrink to fit the shadow to the same pro portions as the original image using relative placement for both the width and depth but offset by 7 pts top and left In the 16 placement field we will be using the f which is the expand or shrink to fit option This will fit the shadow but will scale it to fit where it could be 57 x and 72 y lt amp pbu2 7 TL1 7 36p2 R p 5 1 51p4 R p 5 1 k n K W 100 100 K 0 f 56 GB Disk Shadows Shadow2 tif gt When coding it is essential to know the dimensions of the images You will need to know which images are horizontal and which are vertical Scripts can be written to accomplish this if you don t use an art log Once you can determine this the coding will need to reflect this by marking up the text file lik
346. you should use a con secutive box marker such as bx01 bx02 etc to place in the box and a matching marker near the reference area during post production on a dupli cated file All of this is possible to do because of the content Xtags provides during the export Xtags_Ch08 11 27 06 6 48 PM Page 190 p 190 Xtags Maximized The first step is for the bx to match in the floating element and create up the starting box tag Here s an example of how this would be done Search for BX9T bx 03 lt bxt gt Box 3 3 lt p gt t 2 r Replaced with lt box number 3 gt lt title gt 6 lt title gt 7 End Result lt box number 03 gt lt title gt Internet Home Businesses lt title gt This is where I rely on the magic of BBEdit combined with AppleScript The AppleScript will go through the text file and find the entire box and then cut it and paste it in the place of the referenced bx placeholder It is match ing on the lt box number 03 gt tag and the content following tell application BBEdit activate try find lt box number 03 2 lt Vtitle gt r lt para gt lt box gt 2 lt title gt r lt para gt r lt para gt lt box gt searching in text 1 of text document 1 options search mode grep starting at top true wrap around false backwards false case sensitive false match words false extend selection false with sel

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

9846C - Promac  Installationshandbuch  altronic, inc. 712 trumbull ave. girard, ohio 44420 sistema  Craftsman 200A Manufacturer's Warranty  電話帳コピーツール取扱説明書  MODE D`EMPLOI PDX-6600 PDX-6620 PDX-6630  User Manual - ADFWeb.com  Independence 1.5.0 Handbuch  Projector CP-WU13K User Manual  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file